- All categories
Welcome to Wikbeauty
Main menu
-
SHOP All
-
Shop by Category
- Shop by Category
-
Body Contouring & Fat Reduction
-
Facial & Skin Rejuvenation
-
Recovery & Circulation Therapy
-
Bestsellers
Your cart
Product Comparison
Describe you product comparison grid
|
__ __ |
|
|---|---|
| Vendor |
Vendor - __ |
| SKU |
SKU - __ |
| Description |
Description - __ |
| Customizable title |
Customizable title - __ |
| Variant name |
Variant name - __ |
|
|
Compare products ( / )
All Product collection
74 products
74 products
Sort by:
- Featured
- Most relevant
- Best selling
- Alphabetically, A-Z
- Alphabetically, Z-A
- Price, low to high
- Price, high to low
- Date, old to new
- Date, new to old
From $549.00
Professional HIEMT and Radiofrequency Body Sculpting System
Four Treatment Handles for Muscle Stimulation and Body-Contouring Programs
The EMSlim HIEMT Body Sculpting Machine is a professional dual-technology platform developed for fitness centers, medical spas, wellness clinics and body-sculpting studios.
The system combines High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic technology with controlled radiofrequency energy. HIEMT produces repeated contractions in selected muscle groups, while RF provides controlled thermal energy for suitable body-care and skin-firming protocols.
Four treatment handles support individual or simultaneous multi-area programs for the abdomen, buttocks, thighs, upper arms, calves and obliques. The system can be upgraded to six or eight handles.
HIEMT and RF technology | Four treatment handles | 16-Tesla magnetic field | Three-year warranty
Four Professional Functions on One Body-Sculpting Platform HIEMT Technology
High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic technology delivers programmed electromagnetic pulses to selected muscle groups. Common applications include: Abdominal muscle stimulation Gluteal muscle programs Thigh conditioning Upper-arm stimulation Calf-muscle programs General body conditioning Radiofrequency Energy
The RF function provides controlled heating across suitable treatment areas. Common applications include: Skin-firming support Body-contour refinement Abdomen treatments Thigh treatments Upper-arm programs General body-care services Repeated Muscle Contractions
The system produces repeated contractions in the targeted muscle group during a treatment session. Common applications include: Core-conditioning support Muscle-activation programs Muscle-toning services Fitness-oriented treatments Body-sculpting programs Maintenance sessions Four-Handle Multi-Area Treatment
Four handles allow practitioners to create individual or simultaneous treatment protocols. Common applications include: Abdomen and obliques Left and right thighs Buttocks and thighs Upper arms Calves Customized multi-area programs The appropriate handle placement, HIEMT intensity, RF temperature and session duration should be selected according to the muscle group, client condition and professional protocol. Select the Right Treatment Program for Each Client The system supports customized HIEMT and RF programs for different body areas. Program 1: Abdomen and Core
A muscle-conditioning program for suitable abdominal and deep-core muscle areas. Recommended applications: Abdominal muscle stimulation Core-conditioning support Abdomen contour programs Oblique muscle stimulation Recommended for: Fitness enthusiasts Body-sculpting clients Busy professionals Appropriately assessed post-pregnancy clients Program 2: Buttocks and Gluteal Muscles
A targeted program for suitable gluteal muscle groups. Recommended applications: Gluteal muscle stimulation Buttock-conditioning programs Muscle-tone support Lower-body contour care Recommended for: Fitness clients Body-contouring studios Wellness-center members Clients seeking lower-body conditioning Program 3: Thighs and Calves
A lower-body program for suitable thigh and calf muscle groups. Recommended applications: Quadriceps stimulation Hamstring programs Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning Calf-muscle activation Recommended for: Athletes Fitness enthusiasts Lower-body conditioning programs Professional wellness services Program 4: Upper Arms
A targeted program for suitable biceps, triceps and forearm areas. Recommended applications: Biceps stimulation Triceps stimulation Forearm conditioning Upper-arm contour support Recommended for: Fitness-center clients Upper-body programs Body-sculpting services Customized muscle-conditioning plans Adjustable Energy for Customized Treatments The EMSlim HIEMT Machine provides adjustable HIEMT intensity and radiofrequency settings for different body areas and client tolerance levels. The adjustable controls give trained practitioners greater flexibility over contraction intensity, RF energy and client comfort. New clients should begin with conservative HIEMT and RF settings before treatment intensity is increased gradually. Adjustable Treatment Areas
Four treatment handles support professional programs across multiple body areas. Core and Upper-Body Treatments Abdomen Core muscles Obliques Biceps Triceps Forearms Lower-Body Treatments
Buttocks Quadriceps Hamstrings Inner thighs Outer thighs Calves Combined Body Programs
Abdomen and obliques Abdomen and thighs Buttocks and thighs Left and right upper arms Customized multi-area courses Maintenance-oriented programs Professional Muscle and Body-Contouring Applications
The available treatments depend on handle placement, HIEMT intensity, RF settings, session duration and professional protocol. Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete health and fitness consultation should be performed before every treatment course. How a Professional Treatment Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The practitioner reviews the client’s health history, fitness level, treatment objectives, previous procedures and contraindications. 2. Handle Placement
The selected treatment areas are prepared. Conductive gel is applied where required, and the treatment handles are positioned and secured according to the operating protocol. 3. Parameter Selection
The practitioner selects the HIEMT intensity, RF settings, treatment program and session duration according to the muscle group and client tolerance. 4. HIEMT and RF Treatment
The system delivers programmed electromagnetic pulses and controlled RF energy through the selected handles. A typical treatment lasts approximately 30 minutes. 5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the handles are removed and the treatment areas are cleaned. The client receives suitable hydration, activity and recovery guidance. Temporary warmth, muscle fatigue, tightness, soreness or cramping may occur after treatment. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The system combines HIEMT and RF technologies with four treatment handles and professional cooling for continuous operation. Key operating advantages include: HIEMT electromagnetic stimulation Controlled radiofrequency energy 16-Tesla magnetic field Four treatment handles Upgradeable six- or eight-handle configurations Pre-programmed treatment protocols Water-cooling system 110V–240V power compatibility Technical Specifications
What Is Included?
The package includes the main control system, four treatment handles and required operating accessories. Standard Equipment
One EMSlim HIEMT main unit Four HIEMT and RF treatment handles Handle-positioning straps Handle-connection components One starter bottle of conductive gel Power cable English user manual Operating guidance Treatment table when included with the selected order Documentation and Training
English operating manual Machine installation guidance Treatment-handle setup Handle-placement guidance HIEMT-intensity adjustment RF-setting guidance Pre-programmed treatment protocols Client-positioning guidance Safety and contraindication instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Setup assistance Certificate of Authenticity Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Professional training covers: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen navigation Treatment-handle installation Handle placement by muscle group HIEMT-intensity adjustment RF parameter selection Abdomen and core programs Gluteal muscle programs Thigh and leg programs Upper-arm programs Multi-handle operation Client-comfort monitoring Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic troubleshooting Three-Year Warranty
The EMSlim HIEMT Body Sculpting Machine is supported by a three-year comprehensive warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Touchscreen and control system HIEMT energy components Radiofrequency components Water-cooling system Original treatment handles Handle cables and connectors Other eligible parts supplied with the machine Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the support team will assist with: Remote inspection and fault identification Guided troubleshooting Confirmation of the affected component Warranty-eligibility review Replacement-part assistance when covered Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse Incorrect handle placement or operation Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of straps, cables and consumable items Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service. Full coverage remains subject to the official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional high-intensity electromagnetic and radiofrequency equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete health assessment and contraindication review must be completed before treatment. Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants in or near the treatment area Active cancer Epilepsy or uncontrolled seizure disorders Severe neurological conditions Active or suspected blood clots Hernia in the treatment area Recent surgery Open wounds or severe skin conditions Acute inflammation Severe muscle injury Reduced sensation Uncontrolled medical conditions Other contraindications listed in the operating manual Post-pregnancy clients require appropriate medical clearance. Abdominal separation, recent delivery, cesarean recovery and pelvic-floor condition should be assessed before treatment. RF temperature and HIEMT intensity must remain within the client’s tolerance throughout the session. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for: Fitness centers Medical spas Wellness clinics Body-sculpting studios Beauty salons Sports and recovery centers Trained independent practitioners Qualified aesthetic professionals Businesses expanding their body-conditioning services This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use. Why Choose the EMSlim HIEMT Body Sculpting Machine? Combine HIEMT and RF
The system combines electromagnetic muscle stimulation with controlled radiofrequency energy in one professional platform. Treat Multiple Body Areas
Four handles support professional programs for the abdomen, obliques, buttocks, thighs, upper arms and calves. Customize Every Session
Adjustable HIEMT intensity, RF settings and pre-programmed protocols allow treatments to be adapted to different muscle groups and client tolerance. Expand the System
The standard four-handle configuration can be upgraded to six or eight handles for greater treatment capacity. Protect Your Investment
The machine includes a three-year comprehensive warranty, professional training, setup assistance and ongoing customer support. Frequently Asked Questions
How does the EMSlim HIEMT Machine work?
The machine combines HIEMT electromagnetic pulses with controlled radiofrequency energy. HIEMT produces repeated contractions in selected muscles, while RF provides controlled heating for suitable body-care protocols. What is the 16-Tesla electromagnetic field?
The supplied specification describes a 16-Tesla magnetic-field output used to deliver high-intensity electromagnetic stimulation through the treatment handles. What does the four-handle design provide?
Four handles allow practitioners to treat individual or multiple suitable body areas during one session. The system can also be upgraded to six or eight handles. Which body areas can be treated?
Suitable areas include the abdomen, obliques, buttocks, thighs, biceps, triceps, forearms and calves. How long does a treatment take?
A typical professional session lasts approximately 30 minutes. How many sessions are recommended?
A typical professional course may include approximately 4–6 sessions, commonly scheduled one or two times per week. The final protocol depends on the client’s condition and professional assessment. Is the treatment uncomfortable?
Clients feel repeated muscle contractions and warmth from RF. The intensity and RF settings should remain within the client’s tolerance. Can muscle soreness occur?
Yes. Temporary muscle fatigue, tightness or soreness may occur, similar to the response after physical exercise. Is there downtime?
Many suitable clients can resume normal activities shortly after treatment. Temporary muscle fatigue, soreness, warmth or redness may occur. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The comprehensive warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Consumables, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Add HIEMT and RF Body Sculpting to Your Business
The EMSlim HIEMT Body Sculpting Machine combines: High-intensity focused electromagnetic stimulation Controlled radiofrequency energy Four treatment handles with upgrade options Professional multi-area body-conditioning programs Three-year comprehensive warranty and ongoing support Contact Wikbeauty to order the machine or receive more information about its handle configurations, treatment protocols and professional training. Order Your EMSlim HIEMT Machine and Request Pricing Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Treatment Setting
Recommended Application
Lower Intensity
First-time clients and initial muscle activation
Moderate Intensity
General professional muscle-conditioning programs
Higher Intensity
Appropriately selected experienced clients
Customized HIEMT and RF
Muscle-specific protocols based on professional assessment
Treatment Area
Applicable Technology
Intended Fitness or Aesthetic Application
Abdomen
HIEMT and RF
Core stimulation and contour support
Obliques
HIEMT and RF
Side-body muscle conditioning
Buttocks
HIEMT
Gluteal muscle stimulation
Thighs
HIEMT and RF
Lower-body conditioning
Upper arms
HIEMT and RF
Biceps and triceps stimulation
Calves
HIEMT
Calf-muscle activation
Multiple areas
Four-handle operation
Simultaneous professional treatment
Maintenance
Customized program
Ongoing muscle and body-care support
Specification
Details
Product Name
EMSlim HIEMT Body Sculpting Machine
Machine Power
6500W
Magnetic Field Strength
16 Tesla
RF Function
Yes, built-in radiofrequency
Net Weight
Approximately 59 kg
Machine Dimensions
49 × 56 × 74 cm
Display
15.6-inch intelligent touchscreen
Product Type
Professional HIEMT and RF body-sculpting system
Technology
High-intensity electromagnetic technology stimulation and radiofrequency
Treatment Handles
Four, upgradeable to six or eight
Programmed Contractions
More than 20,000 to 30000 per session
Session Duration
Approximately 30 minutes
Suggested Protocol
Approximately 4–6 sessions, one or two times per week
Treatment Areas
Abdomen, obliques, buttocks, thighs, arms and calves
Control Interface
Touchscreen with pre-programmed protocols
Cooling System
Water-cooled for continuous professional operation
Power Supply
110V–240V
Warranty
Three-year comprehensive warranty
Support
Customer support by email, telephone and WhatsApp
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
From $1,899.00
Professional High-Intensity Electromagnetic Body Sculpting System
Adjustable Muscle Stimulation for Customized Body-Conditioning Programs
The Emslim Gold Magnetic is a professional high-intensity electromagnetic muscle-stimulation platform developed for fitness centers, medical spas, wellness clinics and body-sculpting studios.
The system delivers programmed electromagnetic pulses that produce repeated contractions in selected muscle groups. Adjustable intensity settings allow trained practitioners to create customized programs for the abdomen, buttocks, thighs, upper arms and calves.
Professional treatment courses can be incorporated into muscle-conditioning, body-contouring and fitness-support services.
Electromagnetic muscle stimulation | Adjustable intensity | Multiple body areas | Three-year warranty
Four Professional Functions on One Body-Sculpting Platform Electromagnetic Pulse Delivery
The system delivers high-intensity electromagnetic pulses through treatment applicators positioned over suitable muscle groups. Common applications include: Abdomen treatments Gluteal muscle programs Thigh treatments Upper-arm stimulation Calf-muscle programs General body conditioning Repeated Muscle Contractions
Programmed electromagnetic energy produces repeated contractions in the targeted muscle group during a treatment session. Common applications include: Muscle-activation programs Core-conditioning support Muscle-toning services Fitness-oriented treatments Body-sculpting programs Maintenance sessions Muscle-Conditioning Support
Repeated contractions can be incorporated into professionally planned programs intended to support muscle tone and definition. Common applications include: Abdominal conditioning Gluteal muscle stimulation Thigh-muscle programs Upper-arm conditioning Calf-muscle stimulation General fitness support Body-Contour Support
The machine can be incorporated into broader body-contouring programs for appropriately selected clients. Common applications include: Abdomen and waist programs Buttock-contour support Thigh treatments Upper-arm programs Post-weight-management body care Combination fitness services The appropriate applicator placement, intensity and session duration should be selected according to the muscle group, client condition and professional protocol. Select the Right Treatment Program for Each Client
The system supports customized electromagnetic muscle-stimulation programs for different body areas. Program 1: Abdomen and Core
A muscle-conditioning program for suitable abdominal and core-muscle areas. Recommended applications: Abdominal muscle stimulation Core-conditioning support Abdomen contour programs General muscle-toning services Recommended for: Fitness enthusiasts Body-sculpting clients Busy professionals Appropriately assessed post-pregnancy clients Program 2: Buttocks and Gluteal Muscles
A targeted program for suitable gluteal muscle groups. Recommended applications: Gluteal muscle stimulation Buttock-conditioning programs Muscle-tone support Lower-body body-sculpting services Recommended for: Fitness clients Body-contouring studios Wellness-center members Clients seeking lower-body conditioning Program 3: Thighs and Legs
A lower-body program for suitable thigh and calf muscle groups. Recommended applications: Quadriceps stimulation Hamstring programs Thigh conditioning Calf-muscle activation Recommended for: Athletes Fitness enthusiasts Lower-body conditioning programs Professional wellness services Program 4: Upper Arms
A targeted program for suitable biceps and triceps areas. Recommended applications: Biceps stimulation Triceps stimulation Upper-arm conditioning Muscle-tone support Recommended for: Fitness-center clients Upper-body programs Body-sculpting services Customized muscle-conditioning plans Adjustable Intensity for Customized Muscle Stimulation
The Emslim Gold Magnetic provides adjustable electromagnetic intensity for different muscle groups and client tolerance levels. The adjustable controls give trained practitioners greater flexibility over contraction intensity and client comfort. New clients should begin with a lower intensity before the setting is increased gradually. Adjustable Treatment Areas
Multiple treatment applicators support professional muscle-stimulation programs across several body areas. Core and Upper-Body Treatments Abdomen Core muscles Biceps Triceps Other suitable upper-body muscle groups Lower-Body Treatments
Buttocks Quadriceps Hamstrings Thighs Calves Other suitable lower-body muscle groups Combined Body Programs
Abdomen and buttocks Abdomen and thighs Buttocks and thighs Upper arms Customized multi-area courses Maintenance-oriented programs Professional Muscle and Body-Conditioning Applications
The available treatments depend on applicator placement, intensity, session duration and professional protocol. Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete health and fitness consultation should be performed before every treatment course. How a Professional Treatment Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The practitioner reviews the client’s health history, fitness level, treatment goals, recent procedures and contraindications. 2. Applicator Placement
The appropriate treatment applicators are positioned and secured over the selected muscle groups according to the operating protocol. 3. Parameter Selection
The practitioner selects the treatment program, electromagnetic intensity and session duration according to the muscle group and client tolerance. 4. Electromagnetic Treatment
The system delivers programmed electromagnetic pulses that produce repeated contractions in the selected muscles. A typical session lasts approximately 30 minutes per treatment area. 5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the applicators are removed and the client receives suitable hydration, activity and recovery guidance. Temporary muscle fatigue, tightness, soreness or cramping may occur following treatment. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The system combines adjustable electromagnetic technology with intuitive controls and professional treatment applicators. Key operating advantages include: High-intensity electromagnetic stimulation Programmed repeated contractions Adjustable treatment intensity Multiple body-area applicators 30-minute treatment programs LCD control interface Automatic safety controls Dual-voltage compatibility Technical Specifications
What Is Included?
The package includes the main control system, electromagnetic treatment applicators and required operating accessories. Standard Equipment
One Emslim Gold Magnetic main unit Professional electromagnetic treatment applicators Applicator-positioning straps Handle-connection components Required treatment cables Power cable English user manual Operating guidance Documentation and Training
English operating manual Remote professional training Machine installation guidance Treatment-applicator setup Applicator-placement guidance Intensity-adjustment instructions Muscle-group treatment programs Client-positioning guidance Safety and contraindication instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Basic troubleshooting assistance Training certificate after completion Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Professional training covers: Machine installation and setup LCD control operation Applicator installation Applicator placement by muscle group Intensity adjustment Abdomen and core programs Gluteal muscle programs Thigh and leg programs Upper-arm programs Client-comfort monitoring Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic troubleshooting A professional training certificate is provided after successful completion. Three-Year Warranty
The Emslim Gold Magnetic is supported by a three-year parts warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered: Main machine unit Internal electronic components LCD control system Electromagnetic energy components Original treatment applicators Applicator cables and connectors Other eligible parts supplied with the machine Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the support team will assist with: Remote inspection and fault identification Guided troubleshooting Confirmation of the affected component Warranty-eligibility review Replacement-part assistance when covered Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse Incorrect applicator placement or operation Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of straps, cables and external components Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service. Full coverage remains subject to the official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional high-intensity electromagnetic equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete health assessment and contraindication review must be completed before treatment. Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants in or near the treatment area Active cancer Epilepsy or uncontrolled seizure disorders Severe neurological conditions Active or suspected blood clots Hernia in the treatment area Recent surgery Open wounds or severe skin conditions Acute inflammation Severe muscle injury Reduced sensation Uncontrolled medical conditions Other contraindications listed in the operating manual Post-pregnancy clients require appropriate medical clearance. Abdominal separation, recent delivery, cesarean recovery and pelvic-floor condition should be professionally assessed before treatment. The selected intensity must remain within the client’s tolerance throughout the session. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for: Fitness centers Medical spas Wellness clinics Body-sculpting studios Beauty salons Sports and recovery centers Trained independent practitioners Qualified aesthetic professionals Businesses expanding their muscle-conditioning services This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use. Why Choose the Emslim Gold Magnetic?
Provide Intensive Muscle Stimulation
The system delivers programmed electromagnetic pulses that produce repeated contractions in selected muscle groups. Treat Multiple Body Areas
Professional applicators support programs for the abdomen, buttocks, thighs, upper arms and calves. Customize Every Session
Adjustable intensity settings allow treatments to be adapted to different muscle groups, fitness levels and client tolerance. Expand Your Service Menu
The system supports core-conditioning, gluteal, thigh, upper-arm, calf and comprehensive body-sculpting programs. Protect Your Investment
The machine includes a three-year parts warranty, CE and ISO certificates, professional training and customer support. Frequently Asked Questions
How does Emslim Gold Magnetic work?
The system delivers high-intensity electromagnetic pulses through treatment applicators positioned over selected muscle groups. These pulses produce repeated muscle contractions during the session. What are supramaximal contractions?
The term describes intense, externally induced muscle contractions produced by electromagnetic stimulation. The contraction level depends on applicator placement and selected intensity. How many contractions occur during a session?
The supplied specification describes approximately 20,000–30,000 programmed contractions during a 30-minute session. Which areas can be treated?
Suitable areas include the abdomen, buttocks, thighs, biceps, triceps and calves. How long does a session take?
A typical professional session lasts approximately 30 minutes per treatment area. How many sessions are recommended?
A professional treatment course may include approximately 6–8 sessions over 3–4 weeks. The final schedule depends on the client’s condition and professional assessment. Is the treatment uncomfortable?
Clients feel repeated muscle contractions that can become intense as the setting increases. The intensity should remain within the client’s tolerance. Can muscle soreness occur?
Yes. Temporary muscle fatigue, tightness or soreness may occur, similar to the response after physical exercise. Is there downtime?
Many suitable clients can resume normal activities shortly after treatment. Temporary muscle fatigue or soreness may occur. Is professional training included?
Professional training covers machine setup, applicator placement, intensity adjustment, body-area programs, safety, cleaning and maintenance. A training certificate is provided. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included. Add Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation to Your Business
The Emslim Gold Magnetic combines: High-intensity electromagnetic stimulation Programmed repeated muscle contractions Adjustable treatment intensity Professional multi-area body-conditioning programs Three-year parts warranty and customer support Contact Wikbeauty to order the machine or receive more information about its treatment applicators, muscle programs and professional training. Order Your Emslim Gold Magnetic and Request Pricing Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Intensity Setting
Recommended Application
Lower Intensity
First-time clients and initial muscle activation
Moderate Intensity
General professional conditioning programs
Higher Intensity
Appropriately selected experienced clients
Customized Program
Muscle-specific settings based on professional assessment
Treatment Area
Applicable Program
Intended Fitness Application
Abdomen
Core Program
Abdominal muscle stimulation
Deep core
Customized Program
Core-conditioning support
Buttocks
Gluteal Program
Gluteal muscle stimulation
Thighs
Lower-Body Program
Quadriceps and hamstring conditioning
Upper arms
Arm Program
Biceps and triceps stimulation
Calves
Lower-Leg Program
Calf-muscle activation
Multiple areas
Customized Course
Comprehensive body-conditioning support
Maintenance
Lower-Intensity Program
Ongoing muscle-stimulation services
Specification
Details
Product Name
Emslim Gold Magnetic
Machine Power
6500W
Magnetic Field Strength
14 Tesla
RF Function
Yes, built-in radiofrequency
Net Weight
Approximately 49 kg
Machine Dimensions
63 × 41 × 51 cm
Display
10.4-inch intelligent touchscreen
Product Type
Professional electromagnetic muscle-stimulation system
Technology
High-intensity electromagnetic muscle stimulation
Programmed Contractions
Up to approximately 20,000–30,000 contractions per session
Session Duration
Approximately 30 minutes per treatment area
Intensity Levels
Adjustable
Treatment Applicators
Multiple handles for different muscle groups
Treatment Areas
Abdomen, buttocks, thighs, upper arms and calves
Control Interface
LCD screen with professional controls
Power Supply
110V and 220V
Safety Features
Automatic shut-off, client-safety sensors and overload protection
Design
Professional clinic and salon system
Warranty
Three-year parts warranty
Support
Professional training and customer assistance
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
$999.00
Professional Vibration Massage and Recovery System
Four Treatment Heads for Muscle Relaxation and Professional Wellness Programs
The Wikbeauty G8 Vibration Massage Machine is a professional percussion and oscillation therapy system developed for spas, wellness centers, gyms, recovery studios and physiotherapy clinics.
Its adjustable 5Hz–100Hz frequency range and customizable intensity settings allow trained operators to create different protocols for muscle relaxation, post-workout recovery, circulation support and general wellness.
Four treatment-head options allow the operator to select the size and treatment pattern that best match the target area and professional service.
Four treatment heads | 5Hz–100Hz adjustable frequency | Full-body applications | Three-year warranty
Four Treatment Heads on One Professional Platform Small Treatment Head
The small treatment head is designed for precise applications and smaller muscle areas. Its concentrated treatment pattern allows the operator to work accurately on localized areas requiring controlled vibration. Common treatment areas include: Forearms Hands Feet Calves Small shoulder areas Localized muscle groups Medium Treatment Head
The medium treatment head is designed for general massage and recovery treatments. It provides balanced coverage for common muscle groups and medium-sized treatment areas. Common treatment areas include: Arms Shoulders Neck muscles Lower legs Upper back General muscle groups Large Treatment Head
The large treatment head provides broader coverage for larger muscle areas. It is suitable for professional treatments requiring efficient vibration across wide treatment zones. Common treatment areas include: Back Thighs Gluteal muscles Hamstrings Quadriceps Larger body areas Flexible Treatment Head
The flexible treatment head is designed to adapt to body contours and areas requiring a more adaptable treatment surface. Common treatment applications include: Curved body areas General relaxation Broad muscle groups Body-contour massage Wellness treatments Customized full-body protocols The appropriate treatment head should be selected according to the target area, muscle condition, client comfort and professional protocol. Select the Right Treatment Head for Each Service
The system supports four treatment heads. The appropriate option should be selected according to the size of the treatment area, required intensity and intended wellness application. Option 1: Small Treatment Head
A precision-focused attachment for localized muscle groups and smaller treatment areas. Recommended applications: Localized muscle tension Hands and feet Calves and forearms Precision recovery treatments Recommended for: Targeted wellness protocols Smaller muscle areas Detailed massage services Localized vibration treatments Option 2: Medium Treatment Head
A versatile attachment for general massage, relaxation and recovery programs. Recommended applications: Arms and shoulders Upper-back treatments Lower-leg treatments General muscle relaxation Recommended for: Spa massage services Wellness programs General recovery treatments Regular maintenance sessions Option 3: Large Treatment Head
A broad-coverage attachment for larger muscle groups and body areas. Recommended applications: Back treatments Thigh and leg treatments Gluteal muscles Athletic recovery programs Recommended for: Gyms and recovery centers Sports-wellness businesses Full-body massage services High-volume professional treatments Option 4: Flexible Treatment Head
An adaptable attachment for curved body areas and customized wellness protocols. Recommended applications: Contoured body areas Broad relaxation treatments Flexible full-body protocols General massage services Recommended for: Professional spas Wellness centers Customized treatment programs Businesses offering varied massage services Adjustable Frequency for Customized Vibration Treatments
The G8 Vibration Massage Machine provides an adjustable frequency range from 5Hz to 100Hz. Each frequency and intensity setting should be selected according to the treatment area, client comfort and professional objective. The adjustable settings give trained operators greater control over treatment intensity and client comfort. New clients should begin with a lower frequency and intensity before either setting is increased gradually. Adjustable Treatment Areas
Different treatment heads and frequency settings support different professional applications. Upper-Body Treatments
Back Shoulders Arms Forearms Suitable neck muscles Upper-body recovery programs Lower-Body Treatments
Thighs Hamstrings Quadriceps Calves Gluteal muscles Feet Full-Body Wellness Treatments
General muscle relaxation Post-workout recovery Circulation support Fatigue-relief programs Stress-reduction services Maintenance-oriented wellness sessions Professional Recovery and Wellness Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected treatment head, frequency, intensity and professional protocol. Treatment suitability and expected responses vary between clients. A complete consultation should be performed before every professional treatment. How a Professional Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s concerns, medical history, target muscle groups, comfort level and treatment goals. The appropriate treatment head, frequency and intensity are then selected. 2. System Preparation
The selected treatment head is installed according to the operating manual. The operator confirms that the attachment is secure before beginning the session. 3. Parameter Selection
Frequency, intensity, session duration and treatment pattern are selected according to the target area and professional protocol. 4. Treatment Application
The operator applies the treatment head to the selected muscle groups using light to moderate pressure and controlled movement. A typical session lasts approximately 15–20 minutes. 5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the client receives suitable hydration, recovery and aftercare guidance. Some clients may return to their normal activities shortly after treatment. Temporary tenderness, sensitivity, tingling or muscle fatigue may occur. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The machine combines digital controls with adjustable percussion and oscillation technology for streamlined use in professional settings. Key operating advantages include: Digital control display Adjustable 5Hz–100Hz frequency range Customizable intensity settings Four treatment-head options Percussion and oscillation technology Full-body treatment capability Quiet operation below 70dB Lightweight and portable design Technical Specifications What Is Included?
The package includes the main control system, four treatment heads and the required operating accessories. Standard Equipment
One G8 Vibration Massage Machine One small treatment head One medium treatment head One large treatment head One flexible treatment head Treatment-head connection components Power cable Rechargeable battery where included with the selected model English user manual Operating guidance Documentation and Training
English operating manual Remote professional training Machine setup guidance Treatment-head installation instructions Frequency-selection guidance Intensity-adjustment guidance Treatment-protocol information Safety and contraindication instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Basic troubleshooting assistance Training certificate after completion Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides remote guidance to help buyers understand: Machine installation and setup Treatment-head installation Digital-control operation Frequency adjustment Intensity selection Treatment-area planning Client positioning Basic wellness and recovery protocols Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic troubleshooting A professional training certificate is provided after completion. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty G8 Vibration Massage Machine is supported by a three-year parts and labor warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Digital display and control system Original treatment heads Treatment-head connection components Original power components Other eligible parts supplied with the machine Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with: Remote inspection and fault identification Guided troubleshooting Confirmation of the affected component Replacement-part assistance when covered Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse Incorrect treatment-head operation Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of treatment heads and external components Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service. Full coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional vibration-massage equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be completed before treatment. Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Active or suspected blood clots Severe cardiovascular conditions Acute inflammation or infection Open wounds in the treatment area Recent fractures Recent surgery Severe osteoporosis Bleeding disorders Uncontrolled medical conditions Severe nerve impairment Reduced sensation Other contraindications listed in the operating manual The machine should not be applied directly over the front or side of the neck, eyes, head, spine, kidneys, open wounds, recent injuries or other prohibited areas. The selected frequency, intensity and pressure must remain comfortable throughout the session. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for: Beauty salons Professional spas Wellness centers Gyms and fitness facilities Sports-recovery centers Physiotherapy clinics Massage professionals Corporate wellness providers Trained independent practitioners Businesses expanding their recovery services This machine is not intended for unsupervised use by untrained individuals. Why Choose the G8 Vibration Massage Machine? Select the Appropriate Treatment Head
Four treatment-head options allow practitioners to select the appropriate coverage and treatment pattern for different muscle groups and body areas. Treat Multiple Body Areas
The system supports professional treatments for the back, shoulders, arms, legs, thighs, calves, feet and other suitable muscle groups. Customize Every Session
The adjustable 5Hz–100Hz frequency range and customizable intensity settings allow treatments to be adapted to client comfort and professional objectives. Expand Your Service Menu
The machine can support muscle-relaxation services, athletic-recovery programs, general wellness treatments and suitable add-on massage services. Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year parts and labor warranty, professional training, a training certificate and lifetime technical support. Frequently Asked Questions
What is vibration massage therapy?
Vibration massage uses controlled percussion and oscillation movements to stimulate selected muscle groups. The frequency and intensity can be adjusted according to the treatment area and client comfort. What is the adjustable frequency range?
The G8 Vibration Massage Machine provides an adjustable frequency range from 5Hz to 100Hz. What is the difference between the four treatment heads?
The small head supports precise treatments, the medium head supports general massage, the large head provides broad coverage, and the flexible head adapts to curved body areas. Which body areas can be treated?
Suitable treatment areas include the back, shoulders, arms, forearms, thighs, legs, calves, gluteal muscles, hands and feet. How long does a treatment take?
A typical professional session lasts approximately 15–20 minutes. Treatment time varies according to the target area, frequency, intensity and professional protocol. Is vibration massage uncomfortable?
The frequency and intensity are adjustable. Clients should feel controlled vibration and muscle stimulation without pain. The operator should reduce the settings or stop treatment if discomfort occurs. Can the machine support athletic recovery programs?
Yes. The G8 Machine can be incorporated into professionally planned pre-workout activation, post-workout relaxation and general sports-recovery programs. Can it be offered as an add-on service?
Yes. Short vibration-massage sessions may be added to suitable massage, body-care, fitness and wellness services. Is training included?
Remote professional training and operating guidance are included. A professional training certificate is provided after completion. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts and labor warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included. Add Professional Vibration Massage to Your Business
The Wikbeauty G8 Vibration Massage Machine combines: Four professional treatment heads Adjustable 5Hz–100Hz frequency Percussion and oscillation technology Full-body recovery and wellness applications Three-year warranty and lifetime support Contact Wikbeauty to order the system or receive more information about its treatment heads, frequency settings and professional training. Order Your G8 Vibration Massage Machine and Request a Quote Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Frequency Setting
Recommended Application
Lower Frequency
Gentle relaxation and comfort-focused treatments
Moderate Frequency
General muscle massage and wellness programs
Higher Frequency
Muscle stimulation and recovery-oriented treatments
Customized Frequency
Professional protocols for specific muscle groups
Treatment Area
Applicable Treatment Head
Intended Wellness Application
Back
Large or flexible head
Broad muscle relaxation
Shoulders
Small or medium head
Localized tension support
Arms and forearms
Small or medium head
General massage and recovery
Thighs and legs
Medium or large head
Post-workout recovery
Calves
Small or medium head
Tired-muscle relaxation
Gluteal muscles
Large or flexible head
Broad recovery treatment
Hands and feet
Small head
Targeted relaxation
Full body
Multiple heads
Customized wellness program
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty G8 Vibration Massage Machine
Product Type
Professional vibration massage and recovery system
Technology
Percussion and oscillation vibration therapy
Frequency Range
5Hz–100Hz adjustable
Power Output
50W–150W
Treatment Heads
Small, medium, large and flexible
Session Duration
Approximately 15–20 minutes
Treatment Areas
Back, legs, arms, shoulders, neck muscles, feet and other suitable muscle groups
Control Interface
Digital frequency and intensity controls
Noise Level
Less than 70dB
Safety Features
Automatic shut-off, temperature control, intensity limits and overload protection
Power Supply
110V–240V
Portability
Lightweight design with cordless option available
Warranty
Three-year parts and labor warranty
Support
Professional training and lifetime technical support
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
$2,599.00
Professional 7D HIFU Facial and Body Treatment System
Eight-Cartridge Focused Ultrasound Technology for Facial Lifting and Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine is a professional aesthetic system developed for facial lifting, wrinkle care, skin tightening, collagen stimulation, and body-contouring treatments.
High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound technology delivers concentrated ultrasound energy at selected tissue depths. Eight cartridges covering depths from 1.5mm to 16mm support customized treatments for superficial facial areas, deeper facial structures, and suitable body areas.
With adjustable energy settings, intelligent touchscreen controls, facial and body treatment capability, and dual-voltage compatibility, the system is suitable for aesthetic clinics, beauty salons, slimming centers, and professional skincare facilities.
7D HIFU technology | Eight cartridges | 1.5–16mm treatment depths | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform Multi-Depth Focused Ultrasound
The system delivers focused ultrasound energy at selected depths without requiring incisions or injectable products. Common applications include: Facial skin tightening Fine-line and wrinkle care Jawline contouring Neck and décolletage treatments Body skin-firming programs Professional body-contouring treatments Facial Lifting and Collagen Stimulation
The 1.5mm, 3.0mm, and 4.5mm cartridges are designed for treatments across different facial tissue depths. Common applications include: Reduced facial firmness Fine lines and wrinkles Lower-face laxity Jawline definition Double-chin-area treatment Neck skin tightening Body Contouring and Skin Firming
The 6mm, 8mm, 10mm, 13mm, and 16mm cartridges support professional treatments for suitable body areas. Common applications include: Abdomen contouring Upper-arm treatments Thigh contouring Buttock-area programs Body skin tightening Cellulite-appearance improvement Select the Right Program for Each Client Facial-Rejuvenation Program
Uses suitable facial cartridges and customized energy settings for general facial lifting and skin-rejuvenation treatments. Recommended applications: Fine lines and wrinkles Reduced facial firmness Uneven-looking skin texture Early signs of aging General collagen-stimulation programs Recommended for: Clients seeking non-invasive facial rejuvenation Clients concerned about visible signs of aging Clients wanting progressive skin-quality improvement Facial-Lifting and Jawline Program
Uses suitable middle and deeper facial treatment depths to support lower-face tightening and contour definition. Recommended applications: Lower-face laxity Reduced jawline definition Jowl-area treatments Double-chin concerns Neck skin tightening Recommended for: Clients seeking a firmer-looking lower face Clients concerned about facial contours Clients interested in non-surgical lifting programs Body-Contouring Program
Uses deeper body cartridges for suitable body areas requiring contouring and skin-firming treatments. Recommended applications: Abdomen contouring Upper-arm treatments Thigh contouring Buttock-area programs Body skin tightening Recommended for: Clients concerned about localized body areas Clients seeking non-invasive body treatments Clients combining treatment with healthy lifestyle habits Maintenance Program
Provides periodic treatment following completion of the client’s initial HIFU program. Recommended applications: Facial-lifting maintenance Skin-firming maintenance Body-contour maintenance Continued collagen-stimulation programs Recommended for: Returning HIFU clients Clients completing an initial treatment plan Clients seeking periodic professional maintenance Adjustable Treatment Depths and Energy Settings
The Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine provides eight cartridge depths for different facial and body applications. Energy settings should be selected according to the cartridge, treatment area, tissue condition, client comfort, and professional protocol. Adjustable Treatment Areas Face, Chin, and Jawline
The three facial cartridges support customized treatments across suitable facial areas. Common treatment objectives include: Facial lifting Fine-line care Wrinkle reduction Jawline definition Double-chin-area treatment Neck and Décolletage
Suitable facial depths and controlled energy settings can support professional tightening and rejuvenation programs. Common treatment objectives include: Neck skin tightening Reduced appearance of neck lines Improved-looking firmness Décolletage rejuvenation Collagen-stimulation support Arms, Abdomen, Thighs, and Buttocks
The deeper cartridge configurations support selected body-contouring and skin-firming treatments. Common treatment objectives include: Upper-arm contouring Abdomen treatments Thigh contouring Buttock-area programs Body skin firming Professional Treatment Applications
How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, skin condition, previous aesthetic procedures, target areas, treatment objectives, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment process and establish realistic expectations. Step 2: Cartridge Selection
Select the appropriate facial or body cartridge according to the treatment area, target depth, tissue condition, and professional protocol. Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Clean the treatment area and apply suitable ultrasound gel. Configure the energy level and treatment parameters according to the selected cartridge and client tolerance. Step 4: HIFU Treatment
Position the handpiece correctly and deliver focused ultrasound energy according to the mapped treatment plan. Monitor client comfort and tissue response throughout the session. Step 5: Treatment Completion
Remove the ultrasound gel, inspect and clean the treated area, record the cartridge and settings used, and provide appropriate post-treatment skincare guidance. Designed for Professional Beauty Environments
The Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine combines multi-depth facial and body treatment capability with straightforward professional operation. Key advantages include: Professional 7D HIFU technology Eight treatment cartridges Treatment depths from 1.5mm to 16mm Three facial cartridges Five body cartridges Facial and body treatment capability Adjustable energy settings Intelligent touchscreen controls Approximately 30–60-minute sessions Facial lifting and wrinkle-care programs Jawline and neck treatments Body-contouring and skin-firming programs 110V and 220V compatibility CE and ISO certificates Three-year professional warranty Professional training and ongoing support Technical Specifications Results timelines and duration are supplied product claims and should not be presented as guaranteed outcomes. Individual results vary. What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty 7D HIFU main unit 1 × Professional HIFU treatment handpiece 1 × 1.5mm cartridge 1 × 3.0mm cartridge 1 × 4.5mm cartridge 1 × 6.0mm cartridge 1 × 8.0mm cartridge 1 × 10.0mm cartridge 1 × 13.0mm cartridge 1 × 16.0mm cartridge Intelligent touchscreen control system Adjustable energy controls 1 × Region-compatible power cable Standard machine accessories Warranty card Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and operating guide Safety and maintenance instructions Cartridge-selection guidance Energy-adjustment guidance Facial treatment protocols Jawline and neck protocols Body-contouring protocols Client-consultation materials Post-treatment guidance Professional training certificate Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently. Training covers: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen operation Client consultation and screening Facial and body assessment Treatment-area mapping Cartridge selection Energy-level adjustment Handpiece positioning Facial-lifting protocols Jawline and neck protocols Body-contouring protocols Post-treatment care Equipment cleaning and maintenance Basic troubleshooting Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment. Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period. Cartridges and other components subject to normal use or shot limitations are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement. Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team. Provide the machine model and order information. Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested. A technician will assess the reported issue remotely. Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged. Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable cartridges, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual. Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation, health-history review, and skin assessment should be completed before every treatment. The machine should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals. Treatment may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or breastfeeding Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants within the treatment area Active skin infection Open wounds or severe inflammation Active cancer or ongoing cancer treatment Keloid tendency or significant scarring Severe vascular conditions Poor wound healing Severe or recent sunburn Recent surgery within the treatment area Recent injectable or aggressive skin treatments Reduced or impaired skin sensation Medical conditions requiring physician supervision Clients who have recently received fillers, botulinum toxin, chemical peels, or other professional aesthetic procedures should be assessed before treatment. HIFU should not be applied over the eyes, thyroid gland, major nerves, bones, reproductive organs, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual. Operating Precautions
Inspect the machine, handpiece, cartridges, cables, and accessories before use. Confirm the cartridge and treatment depth before beginning. Map the treatment area carefully. Apply sufficient ultrasound gel. Begin with conservative energy settings. Monitor client comfort and tissue response. Do not deliver energy over prohibited anatomical areas. Do not repeatedly treat the same point outside the protocol. Record the cartridge, depth, energy, and treatment area. Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client. Follow the supplied maintenance schedule. Stop treatment if unexpected pain or skin reaction occurs. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in: Aesthetic clinics Beauty salons Medical spas Skin-rejuvenation studios Body-contouring clinics Professional spas Slimming centers Wellness facilities Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering HIFU treatments. Why Choose the Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine? Eight Multi-Depth Cartridges
Eight cartridges covering depths from 1.5mm to 16mm support customized facial and body treatments. Facial and Body Versatility
One system supports treatments for the face, neck, jawline, arms, abdomen, thighs, and buttocks. Adjustable Professional Settings
Interchangeable cartridges and adjustable energy controls allow professionals to customize treatments according to the target area and client. Intelligent Touchscreen Operation
The touchscreen interface supports cartridge selection, parameter adjustment, and professional treatment management. Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, cartridge guidance, treatment protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine?
It is a professional High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound system developed for facial lifting, skin tightening, wrinkle care, collagen stimulation, and selected body-contouring treatments. What does 7D HIFU mean?
The product uses a multi-depth HIFU cartridge system designed to deliver focused ultrasound energy at different facial and body treatment depths. How many cartridges are included?
The package includes eight cartridges covering treatment depths from 1.5mm to 16mm. Which cartridges are used for facial treatments?
The 1.5mm, 3.0mm, and 4.5mm cartridges are supplied for professional facial and neck treatment protocols. Which cartridges are used for body treatments?
The 6.0mm, 8.0mm, 10.0mm, 13.0mm, and 16.0mm cartridges are supplied for suitable body treatment areas. Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the face, neck, jawline, upper arms, abdomen, thighs, and buttocks. How long does one treatment take?
A standard professional treatment takes approximately 30–60 minutes, depending on the treatment area, cartridge, and selected protocol. How many treatments are recommended?
One to three sessions per year. The final treatment schedule should be personalized according to the client’s condition and objectives. When may clients notice changes?
Some clients may notice an initial tightening effect after one session, with progressive changes continuing over two to three months. How long can results last?
The supplied information indicates a possible duration of 12–18 months. Actual longevity varies according to age, skin condition, treatment settings, lifestyle, and individual response. Is there downtime?
Many clients can continue normal daily activities after a suitable treatment. Temporary redness, swelling, tenderness, or sensitivity may occur. What does HIFU treatment feel like?
Clients may experience warmth, tingling, pressure, or brief sensitivity as focused ultrasound energy is delivered. Can the machine be used for body treatments?
Yes. The deeper cartridge configurations support selected treatments for the upper arms, abdomen, thighs, buttocks, and other suitable body areas. Are results guaranteed?
Results vary according to age, tissue condition, treatment area, cartridge selection, energy settings, lifestyle, and individual response. What certificates are included?
The machine includes CE and ISO certificates. What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues. Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, treatment mapping, cartridge selection, energy adjustment, facial and body protocols, aftercare, maintenance, and troubleshooting. Add Professional 7D HIFU Treatments to Your Business
The Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine enables aesthetic clinics, beauty salons, and wellness professionals to provide customizable facial-lifting, skin-tightening, wrinkle-care, and body-contouring services. Five key benefits: Eight professional cartridges from 1.5mm to 16mm Facial and body treatment capability Adjustable energy settings for customized protocols Intelligent touchscreen with cartridge selection CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, cartridge details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support. Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Treatment Depth
General Treatment Level
Possible Applications
1.5mm
Superficial facial tissue
Fine lines, texture, and delicate facial areas
3.0mm
Dermal facial layer
Collagen stimulation and skin tightening
4.5mm
Deeper facial layer
Facial lifting, jawline, and lower-face treatments
6.0mm
Shallow body treatment
Arms and smaller body areas
8.0mm
Medium body treatment
Abdomen, waist, and thigh programs
10.0mm
Deeper body treatment
Body contouring and suitable buttock areas
13.0mm
Deep body treatment
Larger body areas and thicker tissue
16.0mm
Maximum listed body depth
Professional deep body-contouring protocols
Treatment Area
Primary Objective
Recommended Depth Category
Face
Lifting, tightening, and wrinkle care
1.5mm, 3.0mm, or 4.5mm
Chin and Jawline
Contour definition and lower-face tightening
Suitable facial depth
Neck
Skin tightening and line care
Suitable facial depth
Décolletage
Texture and firmness improvement
Professionally selected facial depth
Upper Arms
Skin firming and contouring
Suitable body depth
Abdomen
Body contouring and tightening
Suitable deeper body depth
Thighs
Contouring and cellulite-appearance care
Suitable body depth
Buttocks
Skin-firming and contouring support
Suitable body depth
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine
Technology
7D High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound
Treatment Cartridges
Eight
Treatment Depths
1.5mm, 3.0mm, 4.5mm, 6.0mm, 8.0mm, 10.0mm, 13.0mm, and 16.0mm
Facial Cartridges
1.5mm, 3.0mm, and 4.5mm
Body Cartridges
6.0mm, 8.0mm, 10.0mm, 13.0mm, and 16.0mm
Primary Functions
Skin tightening, facial lifting, wrinkle care, and body contouring
Treatment Areas
Face, neck, jawline, arms, abdomen, thighs, and buttocks
Session Duration
Approximately 30–60 minutes
Treatment Frequency
Personalized according to client assessment
Supplied Results Timeline
Initial changes may be visible after one session, with progressive improvement over two to three months
Supplied Results Duration
Approximately 12–18 months
Energy Output
Adjustable
Display
Intelligent touchscreen with cartridge selection
Power Supply
110V or 220V
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
Support
Professional training and ongoing technical assistance
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
Professional Thermal Shaping, Sculpting, HIFU and Microneedling System
Four Configurations for Professional Body Contouring and Facial Rejuvenation
The Wikbeauty Hot Plastic & Fine Carving Multifunctional HIFU Machine is a configurable professional aesthetic platform developed for beauty salons, med spas and aesthetic clinics.
Its touchscreen console is available with four handle configurations, allowing buyers to select the treatment technologies that best match their services. Depending on the configuration, the system supports thermal body shaping, skin firming, facial HIFU treatments and microneedling-based skin rejuvenation.
Choose a single-handle system for a specialized service or a dual-handle configuration for a more comprehensive treatment menu.
Four configurations | Touchscreen control | Face and body applications | Three-year warranty
Four Technologies Available on One Professional Platform Thermal Shaping
The Thermal Shaping handle is designed for non-invasive body-contouring treatments on areas with localized fat accumulation. It offers three adjustable energy-output patterns and two cartridge depths, allowing the operator to adapt treatments according to the selected body area and tissue thickness. Common treatment areas include: Abdomen Waist and flanks Upper and lower back Upper arms Thighs Legs Buttocks Sculpting
The Sculpting handle delivers focused thermal energy at selectable depths to support skin firming and body-contour refinement. Cartridges in 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm depths allow trained operators to adapt treatments for different areas and professional protocols. US-Version HIFU
The US-Version HIFU handle is designed for non-surgical facial lifting and skin-tightening treatments. Common applications include: Facial contouring Jawline definition Brow-area lifting Neck treatments Improvement in the appearance of fine lines Overall skin-firming programs Microneedling
The Microneedling handle is supplied with multiple pin configurations for customized skin-rejuvenation treatments. Available options include: 10-needle cartridge 25-needle cartridge 64-needle cartridge Microcrystal tip The appropriate cartridge should be selected according to the treatment area, skin condition and professional protocol. Select the Right Configuration for Your Business
The system is offered in four configurations. The included handles and cartridges depend on the option selected at the time of purchase. Configuration 1: Thermal Shaping
A body-focused configuration for non-invasive contouring treatments. Included technology: One Thermal Shaping handle 0.8 mm cartridge 13 mm cartridge 576-dot, 360-dot and 300-dot output patterns Recommended for: Body-contouring studios Abdomen and waist treatments Back, arm and thigh contouring Businesses adding a specialized body-shaping service Configuration 2: Sculpting
A focused configuration for skin firming and contour refinement. Included technology: One Sculpting handle 1.5 mm cartridge 3.0 mm cartridge 4.5 mm cartridge Recommended for: Skin-firming treatments Contour-refinement services Face and body treatment programs Clinics focused on non-surgical tightening Configuration 3: Sculpting and Thermal Shaping
The complete Hot Plastic and Fine Carving combination for clinics that want to offer both body shaping and skin firming. Included technology: One Thermal Shaping handle 0.8 mm and 13 mm Thermal Shaping cartridges One Sculpting handle 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm Sculpting cartridges Recommended for: Comprehensive body-contouring programs Localized body-shaping treatments Skin-firming services Clinics expanding their non-invasive treatment menu Configuration 4: US-Version HIFU and Microneedling
A face-focused configuration combining HIFU lifting with customizable microneedling treatments. Included technology: One US-Version HIFU handle 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm HIFU cartridges One Microneedling handle 10-needle, 25-needle and 64-needle cartridges Microcrystal tip Recommended for: Facial lifting treatments Jawline and neck contouring Fine-line treatments Skin-texture and rejuvenation programs Precision Output for Customized Thermal Shaping
The Thermal Shaping handle offers three output-dot patterns. Each pattern is intended for a different treatment requirement. The available patterns give trained operators greater control over treatment coverage and energy placement. The correct pattern must be selected following consultation and assessment of the intended treatment area. Adjustable Treatment Depths
Different cartridges are provided for different technologies and treatment depths. Thermal Shaping Cartridges
0.8 mm 13 mm Sculpting Cartridges
1.5 mm 3.0 mm 4.5 mm US-Version HIFU Cartridges
1.5 mm 3.0 mm 4.5 mm Professional Face and Body Applications
The available treatments depend on the configuration selected. Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete consultation should be performed before every treatment. How a Professional Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s concerns, medical history, treatment goals and suitability. The appropriate technology and cartridge are then selected. 2. System Preparation
The selected handle and cartridge are installed according to the operating manual. The operator confirms that the handle is correctly connected before beginning the session. 3. Parameter Selection
Treatment depth, energy level, output pattern and other relevant settings are selected according to the treatment area and professional protocol. 4. Treatment Application
The operator applies the selected handle to the treatment area following the recommended technique. Session duration varies according to the technology, selected area and protocol. 5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After the treatment, the area is cleaned and the client receives appropriate aftercare instructions. Some clients may return to their normal activities shortly after treatment. Temporary redness, sensitivity, swelling or other expected responses may occur, particularly after HIFU or microneedling procedures. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The machine combines a clean touchscreen interface with configurable treatment technologies for streamlined use in a professional setting. Key operating advantages include: Touchscreen control panel Four selectable handle configurations Face and body treatment options Multiple cartridge depths Three Thermal Shaping output patterns Single- and dual-handle configurations Compact multifunctional platform Treatment flexibility for different business models Technical Specifications
Machine dimensions, weight, power input and other specifications may vary by configuration. Contact Wikbeauty for the complete technical datasheet before ordering. What Is Included?
Package contents depend on the selected configuration. Standard Equipment
One touchscreen main unit Handle or handles included with the selected configuration Applicable treatment cartridges or microneedling tips Treatment-handle connection components Power cable Starter conductive gel, where applicable English user manual Operating guidance Documentation and Training
English operating manual Machine setup guidance Safety and operating instructions Treatment-protocol guidance Basic cleaning and maintenance instructions Please confirm your preferred configuration before ordering to ensure that the correct handles and cartridges are included. Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides remote guidance to help buyers understand: Machine installation and setup Handle and cartridge installation Control-interface operation Treatment-parameter selection Basic treatment protocols Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic troubleshooting Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Multifunctional HIFU Machine is supported by a three-year limited warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Touchscreen and control system Original treatment handles Handle-connection components Other eligible parts supplied with the machine Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with: Remote inspection and fault identification Guided troubleshooting Confirmation of the affected component Replacement-part assistance when covered Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse Incorrect treatment-handle operation Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of cartridges, tips and consumable items Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service. Full coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional aesthetic equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be completed before treatment. Depending on the selected technology, treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Implanted electronic or metallic devices Active cancer Serious cardiovascular conditions Blood-clotting disorders Uncontrolled medical conditions Active infection or inflammation Open wounds in the treatment area Severe skin disorders Photosensitivity or photosensitizing medication Recent surgery in the proposed treatment area Conditions affecting normal healing Other contraindications listed in the operating manual Microneedling cartridges and tips must be handled according to professional hygiene and infection-control requirements. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for: Beauty salons Aesthetic clinics Medical spas Body-contouring studios Skin-rejuvenation professionals Trained independent practitioners Businesses expanding their face and body treatment services This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use. Why Choose This Multifunctional System?
Select Only the Technologies You Need
Four configurations allow buyers to match the equipment to their current service menu and budget. Combine Face and Body Treatments
Choose a body-focused system, a facial-rejuvenation system or a dual-technology body-contouring configuration. Work at Multiple Treatment Depths
A range of cartridges supports different treatment areas and professional protocols. Expand Your Service Menu
One configurable platform can support body contouring, skin firming, facial HIFU or microneedling services, depending on the option ordered. Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year limited warranty, remote training and ongoing technical support. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the difference between the four configurations?
Configuration 1 includes Thermal Shaping for body contouring. Configuration 2 includes Sculpting for skin firming. Configuration 3 combines Thermal Shaping and Sculpting. Configuration 4 combines US-Version HIFU with Microneedling for facial rejuvenation. Which configuration is best for body contouring?
Configuration 3 offers the most complete body-focused combination because it includes both Thermal Shaping and Sculpting technologies. Which configuration is best for facial treatments?
Configuration 4 is the face-focused option. It combines the US-Version HIFU handle with multiple microneedling cartridge options. Is this machine a replacement for surgical liposuction?
No. This is professional aesthetic equipment intended for non-invasive body-contouring treatments. It should not be represented as equivalent to or a replacement for surgical liposuction. Do treatments require downtime?
Downtime depends on the technology, treatment intensity and individual client response. Some clients may resume normal activities shortly after treatment, while temporary redness, sensitivity or swelling may occur. How quickly will clients see results?
Results vary according to the treatment performed, client condition, treatment parameters and individual biological response. A fixed result or treatment timeline should not be guaranteed. Is training included?
Remote setup and operating guidance are included. Operators must also meet any training, qualification and licensing requirements applicable in their market. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects in approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Consumables, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the machine include CE and RoHS documentation?
CE and RoHS is included Build the Right Treatment System for Your Business
Choose the configuration that best matches your professional treatment menu: Thermal Shaping Sculpting Sculpting and Thermal Shaping US-Version HIFU and Microneedling Contact Wikbeauty before ordering if you need help comparing the handles, cartridges or intended applications. Select Your Configuration and Request a Quote Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Output pattern
Recommended application
576 dots
Full treatment pattern for broader body areas
360 dots
More targeted output for the navel area
300 dots
Areas where the fat layer is under 25 mm thick
Treatment area
Applicable technology
Intended aesthetic application
Abdomen and waist
Thermal Shaping
Non-invasive body contouring
Back and flanks
Thermal Shaping
Localized contour refinement
Arms and thighs
Thermal Shaping or Sculpting
Body shaping and firming
Buttocks and legs
Thermal Shaping or Sculpting
Contouring and skin firming
Face and jawline
US-Version HIFU
Facial contouring and tightening
Brow and neck
US-Version HIFU
Non-surgical lifting treatments
Facial skin
Microneedling
Texture and tone improvement
Targeted skin areas
Microneedling
Professional rejuvenation protocols
Specification
Details
Product type
Multifunctional professional HIFU and aesthetic system
Available configurations
Thermal Shaping; Sculpting; Sculpting with Thermal Shaping; US-Version HIFU with Microneedling
Control interface
Touchscreen control panel
Thermal Shaping cartridges
0.8 mm and 13 mm
Thermal Shaping patterns
576 dots, 360 dots and 300 dots
Sculpting cartridges
1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm
Sculpting thermal setting
Up to 65°C, according to the supplied specification
US-Version HIFU cartridges
1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm
Microneedling options
10-needle, 25-needle, 64-needle and microcrystal tip
Intended applications
Body contouring, skin firming, facial HIFU and skin rejuvenation
Warranty
Three-year limited warranty
Documentation
English user manual and operating guidance
Service
24 hours online service
Declared compliance
CE and RoHS documentation available according to the ordered model
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
Professional 5-in-1 HIFU and Aesthetic Treatment System
Five Dedicated Technologies for Facial Rejuvenation, Body Contouring and Intimate Care
The Wikbeauty 5-in-1 Multifunctional HIFU Machine combines five professional aesthetic technologies within one touchscreen platform.
With dedicated handles for 8D HIFU, Liposonic body contouring, RF microneedling, Radar Carving and intimate care, the system allows beauty salons, med spas and aesthetic clinics to expand their treatment menus without purchasing multiple standalone machines.
Each technology has its own handle, cartridges and adjustable treatment parameters, giving trained operators greater control when developing professional face and body treatment protocols.
Five technologies | Five dedicated handles | 15-inch touchscreen | Three-year warranty
Five Professional Technologies in One System
8D HIFU
The 8D HIFU handle delivers focused ultrasound energy at selectable depths for professional facial and neck treatments.
It is designed to support non-surgical treatment programs focused on:
-
Facial lifting
-
Skin firming
-
Jawline definition
-
Neck treatments
-
Brow-area lifting
-
Improvement in the appearance of fine lines
The handle is supplied with 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges for treatments at different tissue depths.
Liposonic Body Contouring
The Liposonic handle delivers focused ultrasound energy at deeper levels for professional body-contouring applications.
With 8 mm and 13 mm cartridges, it is designed for larger body areas such as:
-
Abdomen
-
Waist and flanks
-
Upper and lower back
-
Upper arms
-
Thighs
-
Buttocks
The correct cartridge, energy setting and treatment technique should be selected following a complete client consultation.
RF Microneedling
The RF Microneedling handle combines controlled microneedling with bipolar radiofrequency energy.
It is designed to support professional treatments focused on:
-
Skin-texture improvement
-
Enlarged-pore appearance
-
Uneven skin tone
-
Fine-line appearance
-
General skin rejuvenation
-
Targeted facial and body protocols
Four cartridge options allow operators to adapt the treatment to different areas and professional objectives:
-
10-pin
-
25-pin
-
64-pin
-
Nano-pin
Radar Carving
The Radar Carving handle is designed for focused aesthetic treatments at selectable depths.
With 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges, it can be incorporated into professional skin-firming and contour-refinement protocols.
Common applications include:
-
Facial contouring
-
Jawline definition
-
Skin firming
-
Localized contour refinement
-
Complementary treatments alongside other technologies
Intimate Care
The dedicated Intimate Care handle expands the machine’s applications into professional intimate wellness and rejuvenation services.
It includes 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges and must only be used by appropriately trained professionals following strict consultation, hygiene, consent and safety procedures.
Availability and permitted use of intimate treatments may vary by country or region.
One Console, Five Dedicated Handles
Each technology is delivered through its own dedicated treatment handle.
This provides several practical advantages:
-
No need to purchase five separate machines
-
Reduced treatment-room floor space
-
Centralized touchscreen operation
-
Dedicated cartridges for each application
-
Easier organization of face and body services
-
Greater flexibility when expanding a treatment menu
-
Multiple cross-service and package opportunities
Each treatment remains technically distinct. Operators must follow the correct protocol for the handle, cartridge and treatment area selected.
Professional Face and Body Applications
| Treatment category | Technology | Common applications |
|---|---|---|
| Facial lifting | 8D HIFU | Face, neck, jawline and brow area |
| Body contouring | Liposonic | Abdomen, waist, back, arms and thighs |
| Skin rejuvenation | RF Microneedling | Texture, tone, pores and fine-line appearance |
| Contour refinement | Radar Carving | Facial and localized firming treatments |
| Intimate wellness | Intimate Care | Specialized professional protocols |
Treatment outcomes vary according to the client’s condition, treatment parameters, treatment schedule and individual response.
Adjustable Cartridges for Different Treatment Depths
8D HIFU Cartridges 3.0 mm 4.5 mm Liposonic Body Cartridges
8 mm 13 mm Radar Carving Cartridges
1.5 mm 3.0 mm 4.5 mm Intimate Care Cartridges
3.0 mm 4.5 mm RF Microneedling Cartridges
10-pin 25-pin 64-pin Nano-pin Cartridge depth and treatment parameters must be selected by a trained operator according to the treatment area, client suitability and recommended protocol. Build a More Complete Treatment Menu Facial Lifting and Firming
The 8D HIFU and Radar Carving handles can support professional treatment programs focused on facial contouring, skin firming and jawline definition. Advanced Skin Rejuvenation
The RF Microneedling handle adds customizable treatments for skin texture, pore appearance, fine lines and overall skin quality. Professional Body Contouring
The Liposonic handle provides deeper treatment depths for larger body areas, including the abdomen, waist, arms and thighs. Intimate Wellness Services
The dedicated Intimate Care handle allows qualified providers to add specialized intimate rejuvenation treatments where legally permitted. Combination Treatment Planning
Where appropriate, trained professionals may develop treatment plans using more than one technology. Each treatment should be performed according to its individual protocol rather than applying multiple technologies indiscriminately. How a Professional Treatment Session Works 1. Consultation and Assessment
The operator reviews the client’s concerns, medical history, treatment goals and contraindications. The appropriate technology is selected only after confirming suitability. 2. Handle and Cartridge Selection
The correct handle and cartridge depth are selected according to the treatment area and intended protocol. 3. System Preparation
The handle is attached and checked before use. Conductive gel or other required treatment materials are applied where specified in the operating instructions. 4. Parameter Selection
The operator adjusts the energy output and other available settings according to the technology, cartridge depth, treatment area and client tolerance. 5. Controlled Treatment
The selected handle is applied using the recommended technique. Treatment duration depends on the technology, body area and professional protocol. 6. Post-Treatment Care
The treatment area is cleaned and the client receives appropriate aftercare guidance. Temporary redness, sensitivity, swelling, tenderness or other expected responses may occur depending on the technology used. Recovery experience varies between individuals. Designed for Daily Professional Operation
The system brings all five technologies together through a 15-inch color touchscreen interface. Professional operating features include: Five dedicated treatment handles Large color touchscreen Adjustable energy settings Multiple treatment cartridges Facial and body applications Universal AC 110–220 V input Compact multifunctional design Dedicated protocols for each technology Technical Specifications
Technical specifications may be updated or vary according to production configuration. Request the current technical datasheet and electrical requirements before ordering. What Is Included? Main Equipment
One 5-in-1 touchscreen console One 8D HIFU handle One Liposonic handle One RF Microneedling handle One Radar Carving handle One Intimate Care handle Power cable Starter conductive gel, where applicable 8D HIFU Cartridges
One 3.0 mm cartridge One 4.5 mm cartridge Liposonic Cartridges
One 8 mm cartridge One 13 mm cartridge Radar Carving Cartridges
One 1.5 mm cartridge One 3.0 mm cartridge One 4.5 mm cartridge Intimate Care Cartridges
One 3.0 mm cartridge One 4.5 mm cartridge RF Microneedling Cartridges
10-pin cartridge 25-pin cartridge 64-pin cartridge Nano-pin cartridge Package contents should be confirmed against the final quotation before payment. Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote guidance covering: Machine installation and initial setup Touchscreen navigation Handle and cartridge installation Basic parameter selection Treatment-protocol guidance Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic fault diagnosis and troubleshooting Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty 5-in-1 Multifunctional HIFU Machine is supported by a three-year limited warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, coverage may include eligible manufacturing defects involving: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Touchscreen and control system Original treatment handles Handle connectors Other eligible original components Cartridges, microneedling tips and other consumable or limited-use components may have different coverage terms. Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with: Remote technical assessment Guided troubleshooting Identification of the affected component Confirmation of warranty eligibility Replacement-part assistance where applicable Remote installation guidance Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Incorrect operation or misuse Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, disinfection or storage Normal wear of cartridges and consumables Damage caused by unsuitable treatment materials Failure to follow the operating manual Unauthorized transportation damage The order number, machine serial number, photos and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting warranty support. All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional aesthetic equipment and should only be used by appropriately trained personnel. A complete consultation, informed consent process and contraindication assessment must be completed before every treatment. Depending on the selected technology, treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Implanted electronic or metallic devices Active cancer Serious cardiovascular conditions Blood-clotting disorders Uncontrolled medical conditions Active infections Open wounds Severe inflammatory skin conditions Conditions that affect normal healing Recent surgery in the treatment area Use of certain medications Other contraindications identified in the operating manual Additional Microneedling Requirements
RF microneedling must be performed using appropriate hygiene, sterilization and infection-control procedures. Single-use components must not be reused. Additional Intimate Care Requirements
Intimate treatments require appropriate professional training, privacy procedures, informed consent and strict hygiene controls. Operators must confirm that the treatment is permitted within their professional scope and local regulations. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Medical guidance should be obtained whenever treatment suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
This multifunctional system is suitable for: Aesthetic clinics Medical spas Beauty salons Skin-rejuvenation studios Body-contouring centers Qualified independent practitioners Businesses expanding their treatment services The machine is not designed for casual, unsupervised home use. Why Choose a 5-in-1 Aesthetic System?
Five Technologies from One Console
Offer facial lifting, body contouring, RF microneedling, contour refinement and intimate care without maintaining five separate control units. Dedicated Handle for Each Application
Each technology has a purpose-specific handle and cartridge system. Face and Body Treatment Flexibility
Build individual services or structured treatment programs around different client concerns. More Efficient Use of Space
One multifunctional platform requires less floor space than several standalone machines. Long-Term Equipment Support
The system includes remote training, ongoing technical assistance and a three-year limited warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
What does “5-in-1” mean?
The system includes five dedicated technologies: 8D HIFU, Liposonic, RF Microneedling, Radar Carving and Intimate Care. Each technology has its own treatment handle. Can multiple technologies be used in one treatment plan?
Qualified operators may develop combination treatment plans where clinically appropriate. Treatment order, timing and compatibility must be based on proper training, client suitability and the manufacturer’s protocols. What is the difference between 8D HIFU and Liposonic?
The supplied 8D HIFU cartridges are intended for shallower facial and neck applications. The 8 mm and 13 mm Liposonic cartridges are designed for deeper body-contouring applications. What is Radar Carving used for?
Radar Carving uses cartridges at 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm depths for professional firming and contour-refinement treatments. Is the machine suitable for beginners?
The touchscreen system is designed for straightforward operation, but the treatments require professional knowledge. Operators must complete appropriate training and satisfy local qualification requirements. Is there any downtime?
Recovery experience depends on the technology, treatment intensity and individual client response. Temporary redness, swelling, tenderness or sensitivity may occur. “Zero downtime” should not be guaranteed. When can clients expect results?
Results and timelines vary. The selected technology, treatment settings, client condition and individual biological response all influence the outcome. Is training included?
Remote setup, operating guidance and training materials are included. This does not replace any locally required professional qualification or license. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects in approved machine components. Consumables, misuse, accidental damage and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the machine have CE and RoHS documentation?
CE and RoHS Expand Your Treatment Menu with One Professional Platform
The Wikbeauty 5-in-1 Multifunctional HIFU Machine brings five complementary aesthetic technologies into one compact system: 8D HIFU Liposonic RF Microneedling Radar Carving Intimate Care Contact Wikbeauty for the current technical datasheet, cartridge details, training information and purchasing assistance. Request Pricing and Product Consultation Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Specification
Details
Product type
Professional 5-in-1 HIFU and aesthetic system
Included technologies
8D HIFU, Liposonic, RF Microneedling, Radar Carving and Intimate Care
Treatment handles
Five dedicated handles
Control interface
15-inch color touchscreen
8D HIFU cartridges
3.0 mm and 4.5 mm
8D HIFU energy output
0.1–2.0 J
8D HIFU cartridge capacity
Up to 10,000 shots
Liposonic cartridges
8 mm and 13 mm
Liposonic energy output
1–20 J
Liposonic cartridge capacity
Up to 500 shots
Radar Carving cartridges
1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm
Radar Carving energy output
1–8 J
Radar Carving cartridge capacity
Up to 62,000 shots
Intimate Care cartridges
3.0 mm and 4.5 mm
Intimate Care energy output
0.1–1.5 J
Intimate Care cartridge capacity
Up to 10,000 shots
RF Microneedling cartridges
10-pin, 25-pin, 64-pin and Nano-pin
RF frequency
2 MHz bipolar
RF power
10–200 W
Input voltage
AC 110–220 V
Fuse
5 A
Package dimensions
47 × 37 × 51 cm
Package weight
15.9 kg
Warranty
Three-year limited warranty
Declared compliance
CE and RoHS documentation available according to the ordered model
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
$999.00
Professional RF Microneedling Device
Controlled-Depth Skin Rejuvenation, Collagen Remodeling, and Tightening System
The Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device is a professional skin-rejuvenation system combining controlled-depth microneedling with radiofrequency energy.
Adjustable microneedles penetrate the skin at depths from 0.5mm to 4.0mm while delivering controlled RF energy into the targeted tissue. This dual action supports the skin’s natural renewal response and stimulates collagen and elastin remodeling.
With four interchangeable cartridge options, adjustable RF intensity, intelligent touchscreen controls, and both facial and body applications, the system is designed for dermatology practices, medical spas, and advanced aesthetic clinics operating within local professional requirements.
Microneedling and RF | 0.5–4.0mm Adjustable Depth | Four Cartridge Options | CE and ISO Certificates | Three-Year Warranty
Three Professional Technologies on One Platform Controlled-Depth Microneedling
The device creates controlled microchannels at carefully selected depths. This process supports the skin’s natural repair response and encourages collagen and elastin production. Common applications include: Fine-line and wrinkle treatments Acne-scar improvement Surgical-scar treatments Stretch-mark improvement Enlarged-pore care Skin-texture refinement Radiofrequency Dermal Heating
RF energy is delivered through the microneedles into the selected tissue depth. This controlled thermal action supports deeper collagen remodeling while limiting unnecessary surface exposure. Common applications include: Skin-tightening treatments Collagen-remodeling programs Firmness and elasticity support Facial and neck rejuvenation Texture improvement Body skin-firming treatments Interchangeable Cartridge Technology
Four cartridge configurations allow professionals to adapt treatments to delicate facial zones, complete facial areas, the neck and décolleté, or larger body regions. Common applications include: Precision under-eye treatments Full-face rejuvenation Face and neck protocols Décolleté treatments Abdominal stretch-mark care Thigh and arm rejuvenation Select the Right Program for Each Client Anti-Aging and Skin-Tightening Program
A professional facial-rejuvenation protocol designed to address fine lines, wrinkles, reduced elasticity, and skin laxity. Recommended applications: Face, jawline, neck, and décolleté. Recommended for: Suitable clients seeking improved firmness, smoother-looking skin, and progressive collagen remodeling. Scar and Texture-Refinement Program
A customized microneedling and RF protocol developed to improve the appearance of acne scars, selected surgical scars, and uneven texture. Recommended applications: Face and compatible body areas containing fully healed scars. Recommended for: Clients seeking gradual improvement in scar appearance, texture, and overall skin smoothness. Stretch-Mark and Body-Rejuvenation Program
A larger-area protocol using the appropriate cartridge and needle depth for body skin concerns. Recommended applications: Abdomen, thighs, and upper arms. Recommended for: Clients seeking improvement in the appearance of stretch marks, uneven body texture, or reduced skin firmness. Maintenance and Collagen-Support Program
A follow-up treatment designed to support previously achieved rejuvenation results and continued collagen stimulation. Recommended applications: Previously treated facial or body areas. Recommended for: Clients who have completed an initial treatment course and require periodic maintenance based on professional assessment. Adjustable Needle Depth and RF Treatment Settings
Needle depth and RF intensity must be selected according to the client’s skin condition, treatment area, sensitivity, medical history, and applicable professional protocol. Deeper settings are not automatically better and should only be used when clinically appropriate. Adjustable Treatment Areas Facial Areas
The 10-pin and 25-pin cartridges support precision and full-face treatments across suitable facial zones. Treatment objectives include: Fine-line reduction Wrinkle improvement Acne-scar care Enlarged-pore refinement Skin-texture improvement Firmness and elasticity support More even-looking skin tone Neck and Décolleté Areas
The 25-pin or 36-pin cartridge can support carefully controlled treatments across suitable neck and upper-chest areas. Treatment objectives include: Neck-line improvement Skin-firming support Décolleté rejuvenation Texture refinement Collagen stimulation Improved elasticity Body Areas
The 36-pin and 49-pin cartridges provide wider coverage for compatible body-treatment zones. Treatment objectives include: Stretch-mark improvement Abdominal skin rejuvenation Thigh-texture refinement Upper-arm firming Selected scar treatments Smoother-looking body skin Professional Treatment Applications How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s skin concerns, medical history, medications, previous procedures, healing response, sun exposure, and possible contraindications. Step 2: Skin Assessment
Evaluate skin type, treatment area, concern severity, sensitivity, and suitability. Select the appropriate cartridge, needle depth, RF intensity, and treatment pattern. Step 3: Skin Preparation
Cleanse and disinfect the treatment area according to clinical protocol. Apply a suitable topical anesthetic when professionally indicated and permitted, then remove it completely before treatment. Step 4: Controlled RF Microneedling Treatment
Install a new sterile cartridge, confirm the selected settings, and perform the treatment using consistent passes and controlled coverage. A typical session lasts approximately 20–40 minutes. Step 5: Post-Treatment Care
Apply professionally appropriate post-treatment products and provide written aftercare instructions covering sun protection, cleansing, hydration, skincare restrictions, and expected temporary reactions. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments The Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device combines adjustable depth, controlled RF intensity, four cartridge options, and intelligent operation for professional skin-rejuvenation services. Key advantages include: Combined microneedling and RF technology Adjustable 0.5–4.0mm needle depth Adjustable radiofrequency intensity Four interchangeable cartridge configurations Precision facial and larger body applications Approximately 20–40-minute sessions Structured 3–6-session treatment courses Intelligent touchscreen operation 110V and 220V compatibility Professional training and after-sales support CE and ISO certificates Three-year professional warranty Technical Specifications Treatment response, downtime, improvement timeline, and result duration vary according to skin condition, age, treatment depth, RF intensity, treatment course, healing response, lifestyle, sun exposure, and aftercare compliance. Results should not be presented as guaranteed. What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device Compatible professional treatment handpiece Multiple interchangeable needle cartridges 10-pin cartridge configuration 25-pin cartridge configuration 36-pin cartridge configuration 49-pin cartridge configuration 1 × Compatible power cable Standard operating accessories 1 × Warranty card Documentation and Training
English user manual Machine setup guide Touchscreen operating instructions Cartridge-selection guidance Needle-depth guidance RF-setting guidance Treatment-protocol information Contraindication and safety instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Professional operator training Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides professional operating guidance to help qualified users understand the machine’s setup, treatment settings, cartridge selection, and maintenance requirements. Training and support cover: Machine installation and initial setup Intelligent touchscreen operation Treatment-handpiece preparation Sterile cartridge installation Cartridge selection by treatment area Needle-depth adjustment RF-intensity selection Treatment-pattern guidance Client consultation and skin assessment Contraindication screening Infection-control procedures Post-treatment care Cleaning and routine maintenance Troubleshooting assistance Training supplied with the machine does not replace any professional license, medical supervision, infection-control qualification, or legal authorization required in the operator’s location. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device includes a three-year professional warranty and after-sales technical support. Warranty Coverage
The warranty provides support for eligible machine components and manufacturing-related faults arising under normal professional operating conditions. Technical assessment may be required before repair guidance or replacement parts are supplied. Warranty support includes: Remote technical diagnosis Operating and troubleshooting assistance Support for eligible replacement parts Repair instructions Maintenance recommendations After-sales communication during the warranty period Technical Support Process
Contact Wikbeauty with the machine model and order information. Provide a detailed description of the technical problem. Submit clear photographs or a short video when requested. Allow the technical team to diagnose the issue. Follow the supplied troubleshooting or repair instructions. Receive eligible replacement-part support when required. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover damage caused by: Incorrect operation or treatment setup Unauthorized modification or repair Accidental impact or physical damage Improper voltage or electrical installation Liquid damage or unsuitable storage Failure to follow cleaning and maintenance instructions Use of incompatible cartridges or accessories Normal wear of handpieces, cables, and consumable components Used or disposable needle cartridges Shipping or relocation damage occurring after delivery Safety and Contraindications
RF microneedling is a professional procedure requiring appropriate training, infection-control practices, and compliance with local licensing or medical-supervision requirements. Treatment may be unsuitable for clients with: Active skin infection Herpes outbreak Open wounds or sores Active inflammation in the treatment area Recent sunburn or excessive sun exposure Pregnancy or breastfeeding Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Severe keloid-scarring tendency Blood-clotting or bleeding disorders Current anticoagulant treatment without medical clearance Autoimmune conditions affecting healing Uncontrolled diabetes Active cancer or ongoing cancer treatment Recent isotretinoin use Reduced skin sensation Poor wound-healing history Recent injectable or surgical treatment in the area Any condition requiring professional medical clearance A waiting period of approximately 6–12 months after isotretinoin use may be appropriate, but the client must follow the advice of their prescribing healthcare professional. Operating Precautions
Complete a detailed consultation and skin assessment. Confirm the operator is legally permitted to perform RF microneedling. Obtain informed consent before treatment. Document the client’s medical history and current medications. Examine the skin for infection, wounds, irritation, and recent sun exposure. Use a new, sterile, single-use needle cartridge for every client and session. Never reuse disposable needle cartridges. Clean and disinfect the handpiece and treatment environment properly. Select needle depth according to the treatment area and concern. Adjust RF intensity according to skin response and tolerance. Do not assume that deeper penetration produces better results. Monitor the skin continuously during treatment. Stop treatment if an unexpected reaction occurs. Avoid overlapping passes beyond the professional protocol. Follow appropriate sharps-disposal procedures. Provide complete written aftercare guidance. Maintain accurate treatment records. Follow all local infection-control and clinical-waste requirements. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device is intended for appropriately qualified users, which may include: Dermatology practices Medical spas Aesthetic medical clinics Licensed healthcare professionals Physicians Qualified nurses or nurse practitioners Properly trained aesthetic practitioners under required supervision Advanced beauty clinics where legally permitted Licensing, supervision, insurance, and scope-of-practice requirements vary by location. Buyers and operators are responsible for confirming all applicable local requirements before providing treatments. Why Choose the Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device? 1. Combined Microneedling and RF Technology
The system combines controlled micro-injury with targeted RF energy to support both surface renewal and deeper collagen remodeling. 2. Adjustable 0.5–4.0mm Needle Depth
Variable penetration enables qualified professionals to adapt treatments to different skin concerns, areas, and protocols. 3. Four Specialized Cartridge Options
The 10-pin, 25-pin, 36-pin, and 49-pin configurations support precision facial work, full-face rejuvenation, extended areas, and body treatments. 4. Facial and Body Treatment Capability
One platform supports treatments for the face, neck, décolleté, abdomen, thighs, and upper arms. 5. Certified Quality and Professional Support
The device includes CE and ISO certificates, professional operating guidance, technical support, and a three-year warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
Q: How does RF microneedling work?
The device inserts microneedles at a controlled depth while delivering RF energy into the targeted tissue. Microneedling supports the skin’s natural repair response, while RF heating promotes deeper collagen and elastin remodeling. Q: How is RF microneedling different from standard microneedling?
Standard microneedling creates controlled microchannels. RF microneedling adds thermal energy at the selected tissue depth, providing an additional collagen-remodeling and skin-firming action. Q: What needle depths are available?
The needle depth is adjustable from approximately 0.5mm to 4.0mm. Q: Is the same needle depth used for every treatment?
No. Depth must be selected according to the treatment area, skin thickness, concern, client sensitivity, and professional protocol. Q: Which cartridges are included?
The system includes 10-pin, 25-pin, 36-pin, and 49-pin cartridge options. Q: What is the 10-pin cartridge used for?
The 10-pin cartridge supports precise treatment of small or delicate areas, including selected under-eye, nose, mouth, and small-scar applications. Q: What is the 25-pin cartridge used for?
The 25-pin cartridge is designed for standard full-face rejuvenation, wrinkle care, skin tightening, and general texture improvement. Q: What is the 36-pin cartridge used for?
The 36-pin cartridge provides wider coverage for the face, neck, décolleté, and other extended treatment zones. Q: What is the 49-pin cartridge used for?
The 49-pin cartridge supports larger body areas such as the abdomen, thighs, and upper arms, including stretch-mark treatments. Q: Which skin concerns can the machine address?
Professional applications include fine lines, wrinkles, acne scars, selected surgical scars, stretch marks, enlarged pores, reduced firmness, and uneven texture. Q: Which areas can be treated?
Compatible areas include the face, neck, décolleté, abdomen, thighs, and upper arms. Q: How long does a session take?
A typical professional session lasts approximately 20–40 minutes, excluding consultation, cleansing, and topical-anesthetic time. Q: Is topical anesthetic required?
A topical anesthetic may be used when professionally appropriate and legally permitted. The operator must follow the product instructions and local requirements. Q: Is the treatment painful?
Client experience varies. With suitable preparation and correctly selected settings, most clients describe temporary pressure, warmth, or prickling rather than severe pain. Q: How many sessions are recommended?
A typical starting course includes approximately 3–6 sessions. Q: How far apart should treatments be scheduled?
Sessions are commonly spaced approximately 4–6 weeks apart to allow the skin to recover and remodel. Q: Is there downtime?
Temporary redness, sensitivity, or mild swelling may last approximately 1–2 days. Recovery varies according to the treatment depth, RF intensity, area, and individual response. Q: When can clients expect visible changes?
Some clients notice early texture improvements after initial sessions. Collagen remodeling develops gradually, with more visible changes commonly appearing over several weeks. Q: How long can results last?
The supplied estimate is approximately 12–18 months with suitable skincare and maintenance. Individual result duration varies. Q: Is RF microneedling suitable for every skin tone?
Adjustable settings may allow trained professionals to treat a broad range of skin tones. However, suitability and settings must be determined through an individual assessment. Q: Can active acne be treated?
Treatment should not be performed over active infection, open lesions, or significant inflammation. The client should be assessed by an appropriately qualified professional. Q: Can the device be used on scars?
It can support treatments for fully healed acne scars and selected surgical scars. Active wounds and incompletely healed tissue must not be treated. Q: Are cartridges reusable?
Needle cartridges should be sterile and single-use. A new cartridge must be used for every client and every treatment session. Q: What aftercare is recommended?
Clients should follow the professional aftercare plan, use broad-spectrum SPF 30 or higher, avoid harsh skincare for approximately 3–5 days, and avoid swimming, saunas, and excessive heat for at least 48 hours. Q: Who can operate the device?
The operator must have the qualifications, training, licensing, supervision, and insurance required in the location where treatments are provided. Q: Does training come with the machine?
Yes. Professional machine-operation and treatment guidance are included. This training does not replace legally required clinical qualifications or licenses. Q: What certificates are included?
The device is supplied with CE and ISO certificates. Q: What warranty is provided?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with after-sales technical support. Add Professional RF Microneedling to Your Clinic
The Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device provides qualified clinics and aesthetic professionals with an adjustable platform for skin rejuvenation, collagen remodeling, wrinkle care, scar improvement, stretch-mark treatments, and skin tightening. Five key benefits: Combined microneedling and radiofrequency technology Adjustable needle depth from 0.5mm to 4.0mm Four interchangeable cartridge configurations Facial, neck, décolleté, and body applications CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, ordering information, professional training details, and technical support. Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Setting
Available Configuration
Professional Purpose
Needle Depth
Adjustable from 0.5mm to 4.0mm
Adapts penetration to the skin concern, treatment area, and professional protocol
RF Intensity
Adjustable energy control
Customizes thermal delivery according to skin condition and tolerance
10-Pin Cartridge
Precision cartridge
Treats small and delicate facial areas
25-Pin Cartridge
Standard facial cartridge
Supports complete facial rejuvenation
36-Pin Cartridge
Extended-coverage cartridge
Treats the face, neck, and décolleté efficiently
49-Pin Cartridge
Large-area body cartridge
Supports stretch-mark and body-rejuvenation treatments
Treatment Time
Approximately 20–40 minutes
Allows sessions to be adapted to the treatment area
Treatment Course
Approximately 3–6 sessions
Supports progressive collagen remodeling
Session Interval
Approximately 4–6 weeks
Allows suitable skin-recovery time between treatments
Control Interface
Intelligent touchscreen
Provides convenient depth, intensity, and program control
Power Supply
110V/220V compatibility
Supports use in different international markets
Treatment Application
Primary Area
Professional Objective
Fine-Line Treatment
Face and eye contour
Improve the appearance of superficial lines
Wrinkle Reduction
Face and neck
Support collagen remodeling and smoother-looking skin
Acne-Scar Care
Face
Improve the appearance of fully healed acne scars
Surgical-Scar Care
Suitable healed scars
Support gradual texture remodeling
Skin Tightening
Face, neck, abdomen, and arms
Improve the appearance of firmness and elasticity
Pore Refinement
Face
Reduce the visible appearance of enlarged pores
Texture Improvement
Face and body
Support smoother and more even-looking skin
Stretch-Mark Care
Abdomen, thighs, and arms
Improve the appearance of stretch marks
Décolleté Rejuvenation
Upper chest
Address texture, lines, and reduced firmness
Collagen Maintenance
Previously treated areas
Support ongoing skin-renewal programs
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device
Technology
Controlled-depth microneedling and radiofrequency energy
Needle-Depth Range
Adjustable from 0.5mm to 4.0mm
RF Energy
Adjustable intensity control
Cartridge Options
10-pin, 25-pin, 36-pin, and 49-pin
10-Pin Application
Under-eye area, nose, mouth area, small scars, and precision treatments
25-Pin Application
Standard full-face rejuvenation and wrinkle treatments
36-Pin Application
Face, neck, décolleté, and extended treatment zones
49-Pin Application
Abdomen, thighs, arms, stretch marks, and larger body areas
Treatment Areas
Face, neck, décolleté, abdomen, thighs, and arms
Primary Functions
Skin rejuvenation, wrinkle reduction, scar care, stretch-mark improvement, skin tightening, pore refinement, and texture improvement
Session Duration
Approximately 20–40 minutes
Recommended Course
Approximately 3–6 sessions
Recommended Interval
Approximately 4–6 weeks
Expected Downtime
Commonly 1–2 days of temporary redness or swelling
Results Duration
Supplied estimate of approximately 12–18 months with suitable maintenance
Display and Controls
Intelligent touchscreen interface
Power Supply
110V/220V dual compatibility
Certificates
CE and ISO
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
After-Sales Service
Professional training and technical support
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
Professional 5-in-1 HIFU and RF Microneedling System
Five Dedicated Technologies for Face, Body and Intimate-Care Applications
The Wikbeauty 5-in-1 8D HIFU Machine combines five professional aesthetic technologies within one compact desktop platform.
Dedicated handles for 8D HIFU, Liposonic Thermal Sculpting, Radar Carving, Gold RF Microneedling and Intimate HIFU allow trained professionals to develop facial lifting, skin-rejuvenation, body-contouring and intimate-care services from one system.
A 15-inch intelligent touchscreen, adjustable energy settings and interchangeable cartridges provide controlled operation across different treatment areas and protocols.
Five technologies | Five dedicated handles | 15-inch touchscreen | Three-year warranty
Five Professional Technologies in One Machine 8D HIFU
The 8D HIFU handle delivers multiple focused-ultrasound treatment lines with each activation. It includes: 3.0 mm cartridge at 7 MHz 4.5 mm cartridge at 4 MHz These cartridge depths support professional protocols focused on facial lifting, skin firming, jawline definition and suitable neck treatments. The supplied specification indicates up to 12 treatment lines per activation and up to 10,000 shots per cartridge, depending on the cartridge and operating configuration. Liposonic Thermal Sculpting
The Liposonic handle provides deeper focused-energy delivery for appropriately selected body areas. It includes: 8.0 mm cartridge 13.0 mm cartridge Common treatment areas include: Abdomen Waist and flanks Upper and lower back Upper arms Thighs Hips Buttocks Cartridge selection must be based on the client’s anatomy, tissue thickness and professional treatment protocol. Radar Carving
The Radar Carving handle supports controlled treatments at three selectable depths: 1.5 mm 3.0 mm 4.5 mm It can be incorporated into professional protocols focused on skin firming, facial contour refinement and selected face or neck applications. Gold RF Microneedling
The Gold RF Microneedling handle combines controlled needle penetration with radiofrequency energy. It includes: 10-pin cartridge 25-pin cartridge The needles create controlled microchannels while RF energy is delivered at the selected depth. This technology can support treatments focused on: Skin-texture improvement Fine-line appearance Enlarged-pore appearance Uneven-looking skin tone Acne-scar appearance General skin rejuvenation RF microneedling is minimally invasive and requires strict hygiene, infection-control and aftercare procedures. Intimate HIFU
The dedicated Intimate HIFU handle delivers focused ultrasound through a 360° treatment format. It includes: 3.0 mm cartridge 4.5 mm cartridge This handle is designed for specialized professional intimate-care protocols where legally permitted. It must only be used by appropriately qualified professionals following consultation, informed consent, privacy, hygiene and safety requirements. Multi-Line 8D HIFU Delivery
The 8D HIFU handle is designed to deliver up to 12 treatment lines per activation. Compared with a conventional single-line system, this may provide: More efficient treatment-area coverage More consistent line placement Reduced repetitive repositioning Streamlined facial treatment workflows Greater coverage across appropriate areas “8D” is the commercial name of the treatment platform. It should not be interpreted as meaning the handle delivers exactly eight lines. Multi-line delivery does not remove the need for correct spacing, safe energy selection or professional knowledge of facial anatomy. Treatment Handles and Cartridge Depths The correct handle, cartridge and parameters must be selected according to the treatment area, client suitability and professional protocol. Professional Face, Body and Intimate-Care Applications Individual results vary according to client condition, tissue depth, treatment settings, treatment frequency and biological response. How the Technologies Work Focused Ultrasound
The 8D HIFU, Liposonic, Radar Carving and Intimate HIFU handles deliver focused energy to a selected depth below the surface. When applied correctly, the controlled focal points support the body’s natural tissue-remodeling and collagen-response processes. Radiofrequency Microneedling
The Gold RF Microneedling handle uses fine needles to deliver radiofrequency energy at a controlled depth. This produces a targeted treatment response designed to support collagen remodeling and improvement in the appearance of skin texture. RF microneedling is not a laser treatment and does not rely on light energy. Build a Complete Professional Service Menu
Facial Lifting and Firming
Use the 8D HIFU handle for professional face, jawline and suitable neck protocols. Skin-Rejuvenation Treatments
The Gold RF Microneedling handle adds targeted services focused on texture, pores, fine lines and scar appearance. Body-Contouring Services
The 8.0 mm and 13.0 mm Liposonic cartridges support treatments for appropriately selected body areas. Contour-Refinement Treatments
The Radar Carving handle provides three depth options for focused facial and body protocols. Intimate Wellness Services
The Intimate HIFU handle enables qualified providers to add specialized services where permitted within their professional scope. Combination Treatment Planning
Qualified operators may develop plans using more than one technology where appropriate. Treatment sequence, compatibility and intervals must follow professional training and manufacturer protocols. Compact Professional Desktop Design
The system combines five treatment technologies in a desktop housing measuring approximately 58 × 44 × 44 cm. Key operating features include: 15-inch intelligent color touchscreen Five dedicated treatment handles Pre-programmed treatment modes Adjustable energy from 0.1–3.0 J Temperature monitoring Automatic shut-off Adjustable operating limits AC 110–240 V compatibility Approximately 19 kg net weight The machine should be installed on a stable treatment trolley or work surface with sufficient ventilation. How a Professional Treatment Session Works 1. Consultation and Assessment
The operator reviews the client’s concerns, treatment goals, medical history, tissue condition and contraindications. Intimate treatments require additional privacy, informed-consent and professional-scope procedures. 2. Handle Selection
The appropriate handle is selected according to whether the treatment focuses on lifting, skin rejuvenation, body contouring or intimate care. 3. Cartridge Selection
The operator installs the cartridge or microneedling tip appropriate for the treatment area. 4. Treatment Preparation
The area is cleansed and prepared. Conductive gel or another approved coupling material is applied where required. Sterile preparation and single-use needle cartridges are required for RF microneedling. 5. Parameter Selection
Energy, depth, delivery mode and other settings are selected according to the approved protocol. 6. Controlled Treatment
The treatment is performed using correct placement and technique while monitoring client comfort and tissue response. 7. Post-Treatment Care
The treatment area is cleaned and the client receives technology-specific aftercare instructions. Temporary redness, swelling, sensitivity, tenderness, tingling or pinpoint crusting may occur. Recovery experience varies between treatments and clients. Technical Specifications
The stated 60–70°C figure refers to the manufacturer-specified focal thermal setting. It must not be interpreted as a safe surface temperature or used without the supplied professional protocol. Specifications may be updated according to the final production configuration. What Is Included?
Main Equipment
One 5-in-1 desktop touchscreen console One 8D HIFU handle One Liposonic Thermal Sculpting handle One Radar Carving handle One Gold RF Microneedling handle One Intimate HIFU handle Universal power cable Starter conductive gel 8D HIFU Cartridges
3.0 mm 4.5 mm Liposonic Cartridges
8.0 mm 13.0 mm Radar Carving Cartridges
1.5 mm 3.0 mm 4.5 mm Intimate HIFU Cartridges
3.0 mm 4.5 mm RF Microneedling Tips
10-pin 25-pin Documentation and Certification
English user manual CE certificate RoHS certificate Installation and setup guidance Treatment-protocol guidance Cleaning and maintenance instructions Basic troubleshooting assistance Final cartridge quantities and package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation. CE and RoHS Certified
The Wikbeauty 5-in-1 8D HIFU Machine comes with: CE Certificate RoHS Certificate These certificates are included with the machine and support its professional positioning and international distribution. Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote training and operating guidance covering: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen operation 8D HIFU operation Liposonic operation Radar Carving operation RF Microneedling operation Intimate HIFU operation Handle and cartridge installation Basic treatment-parameter selection Hygiene and infection-control procedures Facial, body and intimate-care protocols Cleaning and routine maintenance Basic troubleshooting Training supports equipment familiarization but does not replace professional qualifications, anatomy training, intimate-care training or licenses required in the operator’s jurisdiction. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty 5-in-1 8D HIFU Machine is supported by a three-year limited warranty covering eligible parts and labor. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty conditions, coverage may include eligible manufacturing defects affecting: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Touchscreen and control system Original treatment handles Temperature-monitoring system Handle connectors Other eligible original components Eligible repair labor during the warranty period Cartridges, microneedling tips and other limited-use components may have separate warranty conditions. Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with: Remote technical assessment Guided diagnostic testing Identification of the affected component Confirmation of warranty eligibility Replacement-part or repair assistance where applicable Remote installation guidance Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Incorrect operation or misuse Unauthorized repair or modification Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, disinfection or storage Damage caused by dropping a handle Normal cartridge or tip depletion Reuse of single-use microneedling tips Unauthorized transportation damage Failure to follow the operating manual Order information, the machine serial number, photographs and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting warranty support. All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional aesthetic equipment and must only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete consultation, informed-consent process and contraindication assessment must be completed before every treatment. Depending on the selected technology, treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Implanted electronic devices Metallic implants in or near the treatment area Active cancer Serious cardiovascular conditions Blood-clotting disorders Uncontrolled medical conditions Active infection or inflammation Open wounds Severe skin conditions Conditions affecting normal healing Recent surgery in the treatment area Recent injectable treatments Use of medication affecting healing or bleeding Other contraindications listed in the operating manual RF Microneedling Safety
RF microneedling requires appropriate disinfection and infection-control procedures. Single-use needle cartridges must not be reused. Intimate HIFU Safety
Intimate treatments require specialist training, privacy safeguards, informed consent and strict hygiene controls. Operators must confirm that intimate treatments are permitted within their professional scope and local regulations. Incorrect depth, temperature or placement can cause tissue injury. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Medical guidance should be obtained whenever treatment suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
The 5-in-1 8D HIFU Machine is suitable for: Aesthetic clinics Medical spas Beauty salons Skin-rejuvenation studios Body-contouring centers Qualified intimate-care providers Appropriately trained independent practitioners The machine is not intended for casual or unsupervised home use. Why Choose This 5-in-1 System?
Five Dedicated Treatment Technologies
Provide professional facial lifting, skin rejuvenation, body contouring and intimate-care services from one platform. Efficient Multi-Line HIFU
The 8D HIFU handle can deliver up to 12 treatment lines per activation for efficient area coverage. Professional RF Microneedling
The 10-pin and 25-pin tips support precise, depth-controlled skin-rejuvenation protocols. Face and Body Depth Options
Cartridges range from 1.5 mm for superficial protocols to 13.0 mm for deeper body applications. Compact Desktop Format
Five treatment technologies are integrated within a system weighing approximately 19 kg. Professional Certifications
The machine comes with CE and RoHS certificates. Long-Term Equipment Support
Remote training, technical assistance and a three-year limited warranty covering eligible parts and labor are included. Frequently Asked Questions
What does “5-in-1” mean?
The system combines 8D HIFU, Liposonic Thermal Sculpting, Radar Carving, Gold RF Microneedling and Intimate HIFU. Each technology has a dedicated handle. How is 8D HIFU different from conventional HIFU?
The 8D handle can deliver multiple treatment lines per activation, providing more efficient coverage than a conventional single-line system. Does “8D” mean eight treatment lines?
No. “8D” is the commercial name of the system. The supplied specification indicates up to 12 treatment lines per activation. Is RF microneedling non-invasive?
No. RF microneedling is minimally invasive because the needles penetrate the skin. Appropriate hygiene and post-treatment care are required. What is Radar Carving used for?
The Radar Carving handle includes 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges for professional firming and contour-refinement protocols. What is the Liposonic handle used for?
The 8.0 mm and 13.0 mm Liposonic cartridges are intended for body-contouring treatments on appropriately selected areas. Is there any downtime?
Recovery varies by technology. RF microneedling may produce temporary redness, swelling or pinpoint crusting. Ultrasound treatments may cause temporary sensitivity, tenderness or swelling. How many sessions will a client need?
Treatment frequency depends on the technology, treatment area, client condition and professional protocol. A fixed number of sessions or guaranteed result should not be promised. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components and eligible repair labor. Cartridges, tips, normal wear, accidental damage and misuse are excluded. Does the machine come with CE and RoHS certificates?
Yes. The Wikbeauty 5-in-1 8D HIFU Machine comes with CE and RoHS certificates. Expand Your Face, Body and Intimate-Care Services
The Wikbeauty 5-in-1 8D HIFU Machine combines: 8D HIFU Liposonic Thermal Sculpting Radar Carving Gold RF Microneedling Intimate HIFU Contact Wikbeauty for current pricing, delivery information and purchasing assistance. Request Pricing and Product Consultation Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Technology
Included cartridges
Primary application
8D HIFU
3.0 mm and 4.5 mm
Facial lifting and skin firming
Liposonic
8.0 mm and 13.0 mm
Professional body contouring
Radar Carving
1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm
Contour refinement and firming
Gold RF Microneedling
10-pin and 25-pin
Skin-texture and rejuvenation protocols
Intimate HIFU
3.0 mm and 4.5 mm
Specialized intimate-care treatments
Treatment category
Common areas
Applicable technology
Facial lifting
Face and lower face
8D HIFU
Jawline definition
Jawline and submental area
8D HIFU or Radar Carving
Neck firming
Suitable neck areas
8D HIFU or Radar Carving
Skin rejuvenation
Face and selected body areas
Gold RF Microneedling
Body contouring
Abdomen, waist, back and thighs
Liposonic
Contour refinement
Selected facial and body areas
Radar Carving
Intimate care
Intimate treatment area
Intimate HIFU
Specification
Details
Product type
Professional 5-in-1 HIFU and RF Microneedling system
Machine design
Black desktop housing
Control interface
15-inch intelligent color touchscreen
Treatment handles
Five dedicated handles
Included technologies
8D HIFU, Liposonic, Radar Carving, Gold RF Microneedling and Intimate HIFU
8D HIFU cartridges
3.0 mm at 7 MHz and 4.5 mm at 4 MHz
Liposonic cartridges
8.0 mm and 13.0 mm
Radar Carving cartridges
1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm
Intimate HIFU cartridges
3.0 mm and 4.5 mm
RF Microneedling tips
10-pin and 25-pin
Adjustable energy
0.1–3.0 J
Multi-line output
Up to 12 lines per activation
Cartridge capacity
Up to 10,000 shots, depending on cartridge
Intimate probe focal thermal setting
Manufacturer-stated 60–70°C focal range
Rated voltage
AC 110–240 V
Machine dimensions
58 × 44 × 44 cm
Net weight
Approximately 19 kg
Safety features
Automatic shut-off, temperature monitoring and adjustable operating limits
Certifications
CE and RoHS certified
Warranty
Three-year limited warranty covering eligible parts and labor
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
Professional 12D Focused Ultrasound System
Seven Cartridge Depths for Facial Firming and Body-Contouring Applications
The Wikbeauty HIFU 12D New Gold TT is a professional focused-ultrasound system with three treatment handles and seven interchangeable cartridge depths.
Four facial cartridges—1.5 mm, 2.0 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm—support professionally planned facial and neck treatments. Three deeper cartridges—6.0 mm, 9.0 mm and 13.0 mm—are intended for appropriately selected body areas.
Single and multi-line operating modes provide flexibility for targeted energy placement and broader treatment-area coverage.
Three treatment handles | Seven cartridge depths | 10,000 shots per cartridge | Three-year warranty
Separate Facial and Body Cartridge Systems The seven cartridges must be divided clearly between facial and body applications. Facial Cartridges
1.5 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm 4.5 mm Body Cartridges
6.0 mm 9.0 mm 13.0 mm The 6.0 mm, 9.0 mm and 13.0 mm cartridges should not be marketed for facial treatment. These depths are intended for body areas with sufficient tissue thickness. A 13.0 mm cartridge must never be used on the face. Four Facial Treatment Depths 1.5 mm — Superficial Facial Applications
The 1.5 mm cartridge operates at a supplied frequency of 5.5 MHz and is intended for suitable superficial facial areas. Potential professional applications include: Superficial skin-firming protocols Fine-line appearance Skin-texture refinement Suitable areas of the forehead and cheeks 2.0 mm — Precision Facial Applications
The 2.0 mm cartridge also uses a supplied frequency of 5.5 MHz. It may support precise treatment of appropriately selected facial areas, including suitable tissue around—but never directly over—the eyes. Operators must understand orbital anatomy and follow all prohibited treatment zones. 3.0 mm — Mid-Depth Facial Applications
The 3.0 mm cartridge is intended for controlled treatment within suitable facial and neck tissue. Potential applications include: Facial skin firming Cheek treatments Lower-face contour refinement Suitable neck areas Collagen-remodeling protocols 4.5 mm — Deeper Facial Applications
The 4.5 mm cartridge operates at a supplied frequency of 4 MHz and is intended for appropriately selected deeper facial areas. Potential professional applications include: Lower-face firming Jawline definition Submental-area protocols Suitable neck treatments Three Body Treatment Depths 6.0 mm — Shallow Body Applications
The 6.0 mm cartridge is intended for selected body areas with sufficient tissue depth. It is not a pore-refinement cartridge and should not be used as a superficial facial option. 9.0 mm — Medium-Depth Body Applications
The 9.0 mm cartridge operates at a supplied frequency of 2 MHz and is intended for professional body protocols. Potential areas may include: Abdomen Flanks Upper arms Thighs Other approved body areas 13.0 mm — Deeper Body Applications
The 13.0 mm cartridge operates at a supplied frequency of 2 MHz and is intended only for body areas with appropriate tissue thickness. Incorrect use on thin tissue or facial areas could expose nerves, blood vessels, muscles or other structures to unintended thermal or mechanical injury. Three Professional Treatment Handles 5.5 MHz Handle
Designed for the 1.5 mm and 2.0 mm cartridges used in suitable superficial and precision facial protocols. 4 MHz Handle
Designed for the 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges used in mid-depth and deeper facial applications. 2 MHz Handle
Designed for the 6.0 mm, 9.0 mm and 13.0 mm cartridges used in approved body protocols. Handle and cartridge compatibility should always follow the supplied user manual. Single and Multi-Line Operating Modes Single Mode
Single mode supports controlled placement in targeted treatment areas. It may be useful for: Smaller facial zones Detailed contour planning Areas requiring careful line placement Customized professional protocols Multi-Line Mode
Multi-line mode supports broader treatment-area coverage and more efficient line delivery. It may be useful for: Larger facial areas Body-treatment zones Structured full-area protocols Clinics requiring efficient treatment workflows Multi-line delivery does not make the treatment hands-free. The operator must actively position and monitor the handpiece throughout treatment. How Focused Ultrasound Works The system delivers ultrasound energy to a defined focal depth beneath the skin’s surface. At the focal point, the energy creates controlled thermal and mechanical effects within the targeted tissue. This response may support gradual tissue remodeling and improvement in the appearance of skin firmness. Focused ultrasound does not provide a surgical facelift and should not be marketed as permanently changing facial anatomy. Individual outcomes vary according to: Client age Skin condition Tissue thickness Treatment area Cartridge depth Acoustic output Line placement Individual biological response Professional Face and Body Applications The treatment area must be assessed before selecting a cartridge. A deeper cartridge is not automatically more effective. Claims That Should Not Be Guaranteed
The HIFU 12D should not be advertised as providing: Guaranteed immediate lifting A surgical-facelift result Permanent wrinkle removal Permanent pore reduction Muscle tightening or muscle building Guaranteed collagen regeneration Zero risk of thermal damage Pain-free treatment for every client Zero downtime Safety for every skin type or medical condition Guaranteed body tightening after weight loss Fixed results within 2–4 week How a Professional Treatment Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s concerns, medical history, previous aesthetic treatments, skin condition, tissue thickness and contraindications. 2. Treatment Mapping
Suitable treatment zones and prohibited areas are identified and marked. 3. Handle and Cartridge Selection
The operator chooses the correct facial or body handle and cartridge depth. 4. Skin Preparation
The area is cleansed, and an appropriate ultrasound coupling gel is applied to maintain complete contact. 5. Parameter Selection
Energy, line spacing, mode and treatment pattern are selected according to the area and professional protocol. 6. Test Delivery
Where specified by the protocol, a test line or low-energy application is performed to assess comfort and tissue response. 7. Controlled Treatment
The operator maintains full contact and actively controls handpiece placement throughout the session. 8. Post-Treatment Care
The area is cleaned and the client receives suitable aftercare guidance. Temporary redness, swelling, tenderness, tingling, numbness or discomfort may occur. Technical Specifications
“12D” is the commercial model name. It should not be interpreted as twelve treatment dimensions, depths or clinically proven advantages. What Is Included? Main Equipment
One HIFU 12D New Gold TT control system Three professional treatment handles Power cable suitable for the selected market Starter ultrasound coupling gel Required handle-connection accessories Facial Cartridges
One 1.5 mm cartridge One 2.0 mm cartridge One 3.0 mm cartridge One 4.5 mm cartridge Body Cartridges
One 6.0 mm cartridge One 9.0 mm cartridge One 13.0 mm cartridge Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and setup guidance Handle and cartridge training Facial treatment guidance Body-treatment guidance Safety and contraindication instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Basic troubleshooting assistance Training certificate after completion Final cartridge quantities and package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation. Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote equipment training covering: Machine installation Handle identification Facial and body cartridge selection Cartridge installation Single and multi-line modes Treatment-area mapping Prohibited anatomical zones Basic parameter selection Coupling-gel application Treatment monitoring Cleaning and maintenance Basic troubleshooting A training certificate is provided after completion. Equipment training does not replace professional anatomy education, aesthetic qualifications or licenses required in the operator’s jurisdiction. Three-Year Professional Warranty
The Wikbeauty HIFU 12D New Gold TT is supported by a three-year limited professional warranty. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects may be covered for: Main control system Internal electronic components Display and control interface Original treatment handles Handle connectors Other eligible original machine components Cartridges are limited-use components and may have separate warranty conditions. Technical-Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with: Remote technical assessment Guided diagnostic testing Identification of the affected component Confirmation of warranty eligibility Replacement-part assistance where applicable Remote installation guidance Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Incorrect operation or misuse Unauthorized repair or modification Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Damage caused by dropping a handle Normal cartridge depletion Incorrect cartridge installation Operation without sufficient coupling gel Unauthorized transportation damage Failure to follow the user manual All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
The HIFU 12D is professional aesthetic equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. Treatment may be contraindicated or require specialist assessment for clients with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Active electronic implants Metal implants in or near the treatment area Active cancer Open wounds or active infection Severe skin disease in the treatment area Blood-clotting disorders Uncontrolled medical conditions Impaired sensation Recent surgery Recent injectable treatments Facial implants or threads Other contraindications listed in the user manual Prohibited Treatment Areas
Focused ultrasound must not be applied directly over: Eyes or eyelids Thyroid Major nerves Large blood vessels Bone surfaces Trachea Breast tissue Genitals Other areas prohibited by the device instructions Body-Cartridge Safety
The 6.0 mm, 9.0 mm and 13.0 mm cartridges must not be used on facial areas. Using an excessively deep cartridge can cause unintended thermal or mechanical injury. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Medical clearance should be obtained whenever treatment suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
The HIFU 12D system is suitable for: Aesthetic clinics Medical spas Beauty salons Facial-rejuvenation studios Professional body-contouring centers Qualified independent practitioners Appropriately trained healthcare professionals The system is not intended for casual, consumer or unsupervised home use. Why Choose HIFU 12D New Gold TT?
Seven Clearly Defined Depths
Four facial cartridges and three body cartridges support a broad range of professional applications. Three Frequency-Specific Handles
The 5.5 MHz, 4 MHz and 2 MHz handles support different compatible cartridge groups. Single and Multi-Line Modes
Choose targeted delivery or broader treatment-area coverage according to the professional protocol. High Cartridge Capacity
Each cartridge provides up to 10,000 shots according to the supplied specification. Universal Voltage
AC 110–240 V compatibility supports international installation. Professional Training
Remote setup, operating guidance and a training certificate are included. Long-Term Equipment Support
The system includes a three-year limited professional warranty and remote technical assistance. Frequently Asked Questions
What makes this a “12D” HIFU machine?
“12D” is the commercial model name. The system’s measurable features are three handles, seven cartridge depths and single or multi-line operation. Are all seven cartridges intended for the face?
No. Only the 1.5 mm, 2.0 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges are facial options. The 6.0 mm, 9.0 mm and 13.0 mm cartridges are for appropriate body areas What is the difference between the three handles?
The 5.5 MHz handle supports shallower facial cartridges, the 4 MHz handle supports mid-depth and deeper facial cartridges, and the 2 MHz handle supports body cartridges. Can the system treat around the eyes?
Only suitable areas around the eyes may be treated by a properly trained operator using the correct cartridge and protocol. Energy must never be applied directly over the eye or eyelid. Are results immediate?
Some clients may notice an early change in firmness. Tissue-remodeling responses may develop progressively, and results vary between individuals. Is treatment painless?
No treatment experience is identical. Clients may experience warmth, tingling, tenderness or temporary discomfort. Is there any downtime?
Some clients resume normal activities shortly afterward, but temporary redness, swelling, tenderness, tingling or numbness may occur. How long does treatment take?
Treatment time depends on the area, mode, number of lines and professional protocol. A universal 20–30-minute duration should not be promised. Can the operator leave during treatment?
No. Focused-ultrasound treatment is not hands-free. The operator must actively control and monitor handpiece placement. Is training included?
Yes. Remote operating guidance and a training certificate are included. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components. Cartridge depletion, normal wear, accidental damage and misuse are excluded. Expand Your Professional Face and Body Services
The Wikbeauty HIFU 12D New Gold TT combines: Four facial cartridge depths Three body cartridge depths Three frequency-specific handles Single and multi-line operation Up to 10,000 shots per cartridge Available for qualified professional use and subject to applicable local requirements. Request Professional Pricing and Product Information Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Treatment category
Suitable cartridges
Common areas
Superficial facial firming
1.5 mm
Suitable forehead and cheek areas
Precision facial treatment
2.0 mm
Appropriate facial areas
Facial contour refinement
3.0 mm
Cheeks, lower face and neck
Deeper facial firming
4.5 mm
Jawline, submental area and suitable neck areas
Shallow body treatment
6.0 mm
Approved body areas
Medium-depth body treatment
9.0 mm
Abdomen, arms, flanks and thighs
Deeper body treatment
13.0 mm
Areas with sufficient tissue thickness
Specification
Details
Product name
Wikbeauty HIFU 12D New Gold TT
Product type
Professional focused-ultrasound aesthetic system
Technology
Manufacturer-described micro-pulse focused ultrasound
Treatment handles
Three
Total cartridge depths
Seven
Facial cartridges
1.5 mm, 2.0 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm
Body cartridges
6.0 mm, 9.0 mm and 13.0 mm
Supplied frequencies
2 MHz, 4 MHz and 5.5 MHz
Cartridge capacity
Up to 20,000 shots per cartridge
Operating modes
Single and multi-line
Application format
Professional desktop system
Input voltage
AC 110–240 V
Treatment areas
Face, suitable neck areas and approved body areas
Warranty
Three-year limited professional warranty
Support
Professional training and remote technical assistance
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
$2,499.00
Professional 10-in-1 80K Cavitation and Vacuum RF System
Multi-Technology Body Contouring with a Complete Treatment Kit
The 10-in-1 80K Cavitation Vacuum RF Machine is a multifunctional body-contouring platform developed for beauty salons, medical spas, aesthetic clinics and professional body-sculpting studios.
The system combines 80K ultrasonic cavitation, Vacuum RF, Multipolar RF, lipolaser plates and Inner Ball Roller vibration massage. Its comprehensive accessory kit includes seven professional handles, five massage heads, eight lipolaser plates and 29 vacuum cups.
Multiple technologies and applicator sizes allow trained practitioners to create customized programs for the abdomen, waist, thighs, upper arms, back, hips, legs and suitable face and neck areas.
Ten treatment functions | 80K cavitation | 29 vacuum cups | Three-year warranty
Five Core Technologies on One Professional Platform 80K Ultrasonic Cavitation
The 80K Cavitation Handle delivers ultrasonic energy to suitable body areas for professional non-invasive contour-refinement programs. Common applications include: Abdomen treatments Waist and flank programs Thigh treatments Upper-arm programs Hip and back treatments General body-contouring services Vacuum RF Therapy
The Vacuum RF function combines controlled suction with radiofrequency energy. Common applications include: Cellulite-appearance programs Skin-firming support Circulation-focused body care Vacuum massage Body-contour refinement General aesthetic treatments Multipolar RF
Multipolar RF delivers controlled thermal energy for professional skin-firming and texture-refinement programs. Common applications include: Loose-looking body skin Skin-firming support Texture-improvement programs Abdomen and thigh treatments Suitable facial protocols General rejuvenation services Lipolaser Plates
Eight lipolaser plates support professionally planned, multi-area body-contouring programs. Common applications include: Abdomen Waist and flanks Thighs Upper arms Back and hips Simultaneous multi-area treatments Inner Ball Roller Massage
The Inner Ball Roller provides controlled mechanical massage and vibration across selected body areas. Common applications include: Circulation-focused massage Temporary water-retention support Cellulite-appearance programs Muscle relaxation Post-treatment massage General body wellness The appropriate technology, applicator, energy setting, vacuum level and session duration should be selected according to the treatment area, client condition and professional protocol. Select the Right Treatment Program for Each Client The system supports customized body-contouring pathways using one or more treatment technologies. Program 1: Abdomen and Waist Contouring
A body-focused program for suitable localized areas around the abdomen and waist. Recommended technologies: 80K Cavitation Vacuum RF Multipolar RF Lipolaser Plates Inner Ball Roller Recommended for: Abdomen treatments Waist-contour refinement Flank programs Professional body-sculpting services Program 2: Thigh and Cellulite Appearance
A lower-body program designed for suitable inner- and outer-thigh concerns. Recommended technologies: Vacuum RF Multipolar RF Inner Ball Roller 80K Cavitation Lipolaser Plates Recommended for: Inner thighs Outer thighs Cellulite-appearance programs Lower-body contouring Program 3: Arms, Back and Hips
A customizable program for smaller or contoured body areas. Recommended technologies: Suitable Cavitation Handle Vacuum Cups Multipolar RF Lipolaser Plates Roller Massage Recommended for: Upper arms Upper and lower back Bra-line areas Hips and flanks Program 4: Face and Neck Firming
A gentler professional program using only applicators and settings approved for facial and neck areas. Recommended technologies: Suitable small RF Handle Appropriate Vacuum Cups Gentle Roller Massage Customized low-intensity settings Recommended for: Facial-contour refinement Jawline treatments Suitable neck areas Professional skin-firming services Complete Accessory Kit for Customized Treatments
The machine includes multiple handles, heads, plates and cups for different treatment areas. The range of applicators allows trained operators to select a suitable size and shape for each treatment zone. New clients should begin with conservative energy, vacuum and temperature settings before the intensity is increased gradually. Adjustable Treatment Areas
The system supports professional treatments across multiple body and facial zones. Upper-Body Treatments
Upper arms Upper back Lower back Bra-line areas Waist Flanks Lower-Body Treatments
Abdomen Hips Buttocks Inner thighs Outer thighs Legs Face and Neck Treatments
Suitable cheek areas Jawline Lower face Appropriate neck areas Other professionally assessed facial zones Professional Body and Facial Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected technology, handle, cup, plate, energy setting and professional protocol. Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete consultation should be performed before every treatment. How a Professional Treatment Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The practitioner reviews the client’s health history, treatment goals, body composition, target areas and contraindications. 2. Technology and Applicator Selection
The appropriate treatment handles, massage heads, vacuum cups and lipolaser plates are selected according to the treatment plan. 3. Parameter Selection
The practitioner selects the cavitation energy, RF level, vacuum pressure, massage intensity and session duration according to client tolerance and professional protocol. 4. Multi-Technology Treatment
The selected technologies are applied in the appropriate sequence. A complete professional session generally lasts approximately 60–90 minutes. 5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the areas are assessed and the client receives suitable hydration, activity and aftercare guidance. Temporary redness, warmth, tenderness, bruising, tingling or sensitivity may occur, particularly after vacuum treatments. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments The machine combines multiple contouring technologies with an extensive accessory kit for streamlined professional operation. Key operating advantages include: Ten integrated treatment functions 80K ultrasonic cavitation Vacuum RF and Multipolar RF Eight lipolaser plates Inner Ball Roller massage Seven professional handles Five massage heads Twenty-nine vacuum cups Technical Specifications What Is Included?
The package includes the main control system and a comprehensive selection of professional treatment accessories. Standard Equipment
One 10-in-1 Cavitation Vacuum RF main unit Seven professional treatment handles One 80K Cavitation Handle Vacuum RF treatment components Multipolar RF Handles Inner Ball Roller Handle Five massage heads Eight lipolaser plates Twenty-nine vacuum cups Handle and cup connection components Lipolaser cables and accessories Power cable English user manual Operating guidance Documentation and Training
English operating manual Remote professional training Machine installation guidance Treatment-handle setup Cavitation operation RF parameter selection Vacuum-cup selection Lipolaser-plate placement Inner Ball Roller operation Body and facial treatment protocols Safety and contraindication instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Basic troubleshooting assistance Training certificate after completion Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Professional training covers: Machine installation and setup Control-interface operation Installation of all treatment handles 80K Cavitation operation RF-energy adjustment Vacuum-pressure selection Selection of the 29 vacuum cups Lipolaser-plate placement Inner Ball Roller operation Multi-technology treatment sequencing Client consultation Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic troubleshooting A professional training certificate is provided after successful completion. Three-Year Warranty
The 10-in-1 80K Cavitation Vacuum RF Machine is supported by a three-year parts warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Digital control interface Cavitation-generation components RF and vacuum components Original treatment handles Lipolaser plates Handle and cable connections Other eligible parts supplied with the machine Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the support team will assist with: Remote inspection and fault identification Guided troubleshooting Confirmation of the affected component Warranty-eligibility review Replacement-part assistance when covered Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse Incorrect handle, cup or plate operation Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of cups, membranes and consumable items Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service. Full coverage remains subject to the official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional cavitation, RF, vacuum and lipolaser equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete health assessment and contraindication review must be completed before treatment. Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants in or near the treatment area Active cancer Active or suspected blood clots Severe cardiovascular conditions Severe varicose veins Open wounds or active skin infections Severe liver or kidney conditions Uncontrolled diabetes Bleeding disorders Recent surgery Reduced sensation Uncontrolled medical conditions Other contraindications listed in the operating manual Cavitation must not be applied over the head, heart, breasts, kidneys, liver, reproductive organs, bone surfaces or other prohibited areas. RF, vacuum and lipolaser settings must be adjusted according to the treatment area, skin condition and client tolerance. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for: Beauty salons Professional spas Aesthetic clinics Medical spas Body-contouring studios Wellness centers Trained independent practitioners Qualified aesthetic professionals Businesses expanding their body-contouring services This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use. Why Choose the 10-in-1 80K Cavitation Vacuum RF Machine? Combine Multiple Technologies
The system combines cavitation, Vacuum RF, Multipolar RF, lipolaser and Inner Ball Roller massage in one professional platform. Access a Complete Treatment Kit
Seven handles, five massage heads, eight lipolaser plates and 29 vacuum cups support a wide range of professional protocols. Treat Multiple Body Areas
The system supports treatments for the abdomen, waist, thighs, arms, back, hips, legs and suitable facial and neck areas. Customize Every Session
Multiple technologies, applicator sizes and adjustable settings allow treatments to be adapted to client condition and professional objectives. Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year parts warranty, CE and ISO certificates, professional training and customer support. Frequently Asked Questions
What technologies are included?
The system combines 80K Ultrasonic Cavitation, Vacuum RF, Multipolar RF, lipolaser plates, Inner Ball Roller massage and additional integrated treatment functions. What is 80K cavitation?
The 80K Cavitation Handle delivers ultrasonic energy for professionally planned body-contouring programs on suitable localized areas. Why are 29 vacuum cups included?
Different body and facial areas require different cup sizes and shapes. The selection allows practitioners to choose an appropriate cup for each treatment zone. How many lipolaser plates are included?
The system includes eight lipolaser plates for professionally planned multi-area treatments. Which body areas can be treated?
Suitable areas include the abdomen, waist, flanks, thighs, upper arms, back, hips, buttocks, legs and selected face or neck areas. How long does a treatment take?
A complete multi-technology session generally lasts approximately 60–90 minutes. The duration depends on the number of areas and technologies selected. How many sessions are recommended?
The treatment course should be customized according to the client’s condition and objectives. Professional programs commonly include multiple sessions with appropriate intervals. Is the treatment uncomfortable?
Client sensation varies by technology. Cavitation may produce an audible tone, RF creates warmth, vacuum produces suction and the Roller Handle provides mechanical massage. Is there downtime?
Many suitable clients can resume normal activities shortly after treatment. Temporary redness, warmth, bruising, tenderness or sensitivity may occur. Is professional training included?
Professional training covers all treatment handles, vacuum cups, lipolaser plates, technology sequencing, safety, cleaning and maintenance. A training certificate is provided. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Consumables, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included. Add Multi-Technology Body Contouring to Your Business
The 10-in-1 80K Cavitation Vacuum RF Machine combines: 80K ultrasonic cavitation Vacuum RF and Multipolar RF Eight lipolaser plates Seven handles, five massage heads and 29 vacuum cups Three-year parts warranty and professional support Contact Wikbeauty to order the machine or receive more information about its technologies, accessories and professional training. Order Your 10-in-1 Cavitation Vacuum RF Machine and Request Pricing Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Accessory Category
Quantity
Recommended Application
Professional Treatment Handles
7
Cavitation, RF, Vacuum RF, Roller and additional functions
Massage Heads
5
Customized mechanical massage
Lipolaser Plates
8
Simultaneous multi-area body programs
Vacuum Cups
29
Different body, face and neck areas
Inner Ball Roller
1 system
Massage and circulation-focused body care
Treatment Area
Applicable Technology
Intended Aesthetic Application
Abdomen
Cavitation, RF and Lipolaser
Body-contour refinement
Waist and flanks
Cavitation and Vacuum RF
Waist-contouring support
Thighs
Vacuum RF and Roller
Cellulite-appearance and texture care
Upper arms
Cavitation, RF or Lipolaser
Targeted body-care programs
Back
Vacuum RF and Lipolaser
Localized contour refinement
Hips and buttocks
RF and Roller
Firming and texture support
Face and jawline
Suitable RF and Vacuum Applicators
Facial-contour programs
Neck
Suitable RF Handle
Professional firming support
Specification
Details
Product Name
10-in-1 80K Cavitation Vacuum RF Machine
Product Type
Professional multifunctional body-contouring system
Primary Technologies
80K Cavitation, Vacuum RF, Multipolar RF, Lipolaser and Roller Massage
Cavitation Frequency
80KHz
Treatment Handles
Seven
Massage Heads
Five
Lipolaser Plates
Eight
Vacuum Cups
Twenty-nine
Treatment Duration
Approximately 60–90 minutes
Treatment Areas
Abdomen, waist, thighs, arms, back, hips, legs, face and neck
Control Interface
Professional touchscreen or digital control panel
Power Supply
110V and 220V
Design
Professional wheeled trolley system
Safety Features
Automatic shut-off, temperature monitoring, overload protection and adjustable intensity
Warranty
Three-year parts warranty
Support
Professional training and customer assistance
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
$1,499.00
Professional Vibration Massage and Body Wellness System
Five Massage Heads for Customized Relaxation and Body-Care Treatments
The Vibration Massage Slimming Machine is a professional massage and wellness platform developed for beauty salons, spas, body-contouring studios and wellness clinics.
The system combines adjustable vibration and percussion therapy with five interchangeable massage heads. An optional 40K vacuum-heating function supports additional professional body-care and contouring programs.
Its digital controls, ergonomic treatment handpiece and portable wheeled design allow trained operators to customize treatments for the arms, thighs, abdomen, legs, back, neck and shoulders.
Vibration and percussion therapy | Five massage heads | Optional 40K vacuum heating | Three-year warranty
Six Professional Functions on One Massage Platform Vibration Massage
The vibration function delivers rapid mechanical movements to suitable muscles and body tissue. Common applications include: General body massage Muscle relaxation Tired-muscle treatments Body-wellness programs Post-workout support Maintenance-oriented massage Percussion Therapy
The percussion function provides controlled repetitive movement for professional massage and recovery programs. Common applications include: Localized muscle tension Larger muscle groups Back and shoulder treatments Thigh and leg massage Fitness-recovery programs General relaxation Circulation and Drainage Support
Mechanical vibration can be incorporated into professionally planned circulation and fluid-movement programs. Common applications include: Tired-leg treatments General circulation support Temporary water-retention programs Body-care services Post-treatment massage Wellness-maintenance sessions Optional 40K Vacuum Heating
The optional 40K vacuum-heating configuration combines suction and controlled warmth with the base massage platform. Common applications include: Cellulite-appearance programs Body-contour refinement Skin-firming support Abdomen and thigh treatments Circulation-focused body care Combination contouring services The appropriate treatment head, vibration intensity, vacuum level, temperature and session duration should be selected according to the treatment area, client condition and professional protocol. Select the Right Treatment Program for Each Client The system supports customizable massage, recovery and body-care programs. Program 1: Relaxation and Wellness
A comfort-focused vibration program for general body massage and relaxation. Recommended applications: General relaxation Stress-relief programs Tired-muscle massage Maintenance-oriented wellness Recommended for: Spa clients Fatigued professionals First-time clients General wellness programs Program 2: Muscle Recovery
A percussion-focused program for suitable muscle groups and post-workout support. Recommended applications: Back and shoulder massage Thigh and leg treatments Post-workout recovery Localized muscle tension Recommended for: Fitness enthusiasts Athletes Sports-recovery clients Wellness-center members Program 3: Body Shaping Support
A customized vibration program for suitable body-contouring and skin-texture concerns. Recommended applications: Abdomen treatments Thigh treatments Upper-arm programs Cellulite-appearance support Recommended for: Body-contouring studios Beauty salons Aesthetic wellness clinics Clients seeking non-invasive body care Program 4: Vacuum-Heating Body Care
An optional program combining vibration, vacuum suction and controlled heating. Recommended applications: Abdomen and waist Thighs Buttocks Upper arms Recommended for: Advanced body-care packages Cellulite-appearance treatments Skin-firming programs Clinics combining multiple contouring technologies Five Massage Heads for Customized Treatments
Five interchangeable heads provide different coverage patterns and massage sensations. The interchangeable heads allow operators to adapt the treatment pattern to the selected body area and client comfort. New clients should begin with a lower vibration intensity before the setting is increased gradually. Adjustable Treatment Areas
The treatment handpiece and interchangeable heads support professional massage across multiple body areas. Upper-Body Treatments
Neck muscles Shoulders Upper back Lower back Upper arms Suitable side-body areas Core and Lower-Body Treatments
Abdomen Waist Thighs Buttocks Lower legs Calves Full-Body Wellness Programs
General relaxation Muscle-recovery support Circulation-focused massage Body-care treatments Post-workout wellness Maintenance-oriented services Professional Wellness and Body-Care Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected head, vibration intensity, optional vacuum and heating settings and professional protocol. Treatment suitability and expected responses vary between clients. A complete health consultation should be performed before every treatment. How a Professional Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s health history, target areas, muscle condition, comfort level and contraindications. 2. Treatment-Head Selection
The appropriate massage head is selected and installed according to the operating manual. The operator confirms that the attachment is secure. 3. Parameter Selection
Vibration intensity, treatment duration and optional vacuum or heating settings are selected according to the client’s tolerance and professional protocol. 4. Massage Treatment
The operator moves the treatment handpiece across the selected body area using controlled pressure and the recommended technique. A typical session lasts approximately 15–20 minutes per area. 5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After the session, the treatment area is assessed and the client receives suitable hydration, activity and aftercare guidance. Temporary redness, warmth, tenderness, tingling or mild muscle fatigue may occur. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The machine combines adjustable vibration with five massage heads and portable professional controls. Key operating advantages include: Vibration and percussion massage Five interchangeable treatment heads Multiple adjustable intensity levels Optional 40K vacuum heating Digital touchscreen or control panel Ergonomic treatment handpiece Portable wheeled design Dual-voltage compatibility Technical Specifications
What Is Included?
The package includes the main machine, treatment handpiece, five massage heads and required operating accessories. Standard Equipment
One Vibration Massage Slimming Machine One professional treatment handpiece One Round Massage Head One Spiked Massage Head One Flat Massage Head One Textured Massage Head One Specialty Massage Head Head-connection components Optional vacuum-heating accessories for the selected model Power cable English user manual Operating guidance Documentation and Training
English operating manual Remote professional training Machine installation guidance Treatment-head installation Head-selection guidance Vibration-intensity adjustment Vacuum and heating guidance where applicable Body-area treatment protocols Safety and contraindication instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Basic troubleshooting assistance Training certificate after completion Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Professional training covers: Machine installation and setup Control-panel operation Treatment-handpiece use Installation of all five massage heads Head selection by body area Vibration-intensity adjustment Optional vacuum operation Optional heating controls Client positioning Professional massage protocols Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic troubleshooting A professional training certificate is provided after successful completion. Three-Year Warranty
The Vibration Massage Slimming Machine is supported by a three-year parts warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Digital control system Original treatment handpiece Vibration and percussion components Optional vacuum and heating components Handpiece-connection components Other eligible parts supplied with the machine Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the support team will assist with: Remote inspection and fault identification Guided troubleshooting Confirmation of the affected component Warranty-eligibility review Replacement-part assistance when covered Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse Incorrect treatment-head installation Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of treatment heads and consumable components Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service. Full coverage remains subject to the official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional vibration massage equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete health assessment and contraindication review must be completed before treatment. Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Active or suspected blood clots Deep-vein thrombosis Severe cardiovascular conditions Severe varicose veins in the treatment area Recent fractures Severe osteoporosis Acute inflammation or fever Open wounds or active infections Recent surgery Herniated discs or severe spinal conditions Reduced sensation Uncontrolled medical conditions Other contraindications listed in the operating manual The device must not be applied directly over the head, front or side of the neck, spine, kidneys, open wounds, acute injuries or other prohibited areas. Optional vacuum and heat settings require additional assessment of skin condition, circulation and heat sensitivity. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for: Beauty salons Professional spas Wellness clinics Body-contouring studios Fitness and recovery facilities Massage professionals Aesthetic centers Trained independent practitioners Businesses expanding their wellness services This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use. Why Choose the Vibration Massage Slimming Machine? Access Five Massage Heads
Five interchangeable heads allow operators to customize treatment coverage and massage sensation for different body areas. Treat Multiple Body Areas
The system supports professional massage for the arms, thighs, abdomen, legs, back, neck muscles and shoulders. Customize Every Session
Adjustable vibration intensity and optional vacuum-heating settings allow treatments to be adapted to client comfort and professional objectives. Expand Your Service Menu
The machine supports relaxation, muscle-recovery, body-care, cellulite-appearance and complementary contouring programs. Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year parts warranty, CE and ISO certificates, professional training and customer support. Frequently Asked Questions
How does vibration massage work?
The machine delivers rapid mechanical vibration and percussion through the selected massage head. Intensity can be adjusted according to the treatment area and client comfort. What are the five massage heads used for?
The Round Head supports general massage, the Spiked Head provides more intensive stimulation, the Flat Head covers larger areas, the Textured Head supports localized massage and the Specialty Head is used for targeted protocols. Which body areas can be treated?
Suitable areas include the shoulders, back, upper arms, abdomen, waist, thighs, buttocks, legs and calves. How long does a treatment take?
A typical session lasts approximately 15–20 minutes per body area. Treating multiple areas may require additional time. Can the machine be used for relaxation only?
Yes. The system can be used for general muscle relaxation, stress-relief and professional wellness massage without including body-contouring protocols. What is the optional 40K vacuum-heating function?
The optional configuration combines vacuum suction and controlled heating with vibration massage for additional body-care and contour-refinement programs. Can it be combined with other body treatments?
The machine may be incorporated into professionally planned packages with suitable cavitation, RF or body-contouring services. Is the treatment uncomfortable?
Vibration intensity is adjustable. Clients should feel controlled mechanical stimulation without pain. Settings should be reduced or treatment stopped if discomfort occurs. Is professional training included?
Professional training covers machine setup, treatment heads, intensity settings, optional vacuum heating, body protocols, cleaning and safety. A training certificate is provided. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Consumables, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included. Add Professional Vibration Massage to Your Business
The Vibration Massage Slimming Machine combines: Adjustable vibration and percussion therapy Five interchangeable massage heads Optional 40K vacuum heating Professional relaxation and body-care applications Three-year parts warranty and customer support Contact Wikbeauty to order the machine or receive more information about its treatment heads, optional vacuum configuration and professional training. Order Your Vibration Massage Slimming Machine and Request Pricing Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Massage Head
Recommended Application
Round Head
General massage and medium-sized body areas
Spiked Head
More intensive stimulation for suitable muscle groups
Flat Head
Broader coverage for the back, thighs and abdomen
Textured Head
Localized muscle tension and customized massage
Specialty Head
Targeted treatment according to professional protocol
Treatment Area
Applicable Treatment Head
Intended Wellness Application
Neck and shoulders
Round or Textured Head
Muscle-relaxation support
Back
Flat or Round Head
Broad-area massage
Upper arms
Round or Specialty Head
Massage and body-care support
Abdomen
Flat Head
General body-contouring support
Thighs
Flat or Spiked Head
Massage and texture-refinement support
Legs and calves
Round or Textured Head
Tired-muscle relaxation
Buttocks
Flat or Specialty Head
Body-care and massage programs
Localized muscle areas
Textured or Specialty Head
Targeted professional treatment
Specification
Details
Product Name
Vibration Massage Slimming Machine
Product Type
Professional vibration massage and body-wellness system
Primary Technology
Vibration and percussion therapy
Optional Technology
40K vacuum heating
Massage Heads
Five interchangeable heads
Head Types
Round, spiked, flat, textured and specialty
Vibration Intensity
Multiple adjustable levels
Session Duration
Approximately 15–20 minutes per area
Treatment Areas
Arms, thighs, abdomen, legs, back, neck and shoulders
Control Interface
Digital touchscreen or control panel
Power Supply
110V and 220V
Design
Ergonomic handpiece with optional wheeled cart
Portability
Lightweight and movable
Safety Features
Automatic shut-off, overheat protection and intensity controls
Warranty
Three-year parts warranty
Support
Professional training and customer assistance
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
From $1,660.77
Professional RF Microneedling Skin Rejuvenation System
Four Cartridge Options for Professional Facial and Body Treatments
The Wikbeauty Morpheus 8 RF Microneedling Machine is a professional fractional radiofrequency system developed for aesthetic clinics, medical spas, dermatology practices and professional beauty centers.
The system combines controlled microneedling with radiofrequency energy to support skin tightening, collagen remodeling, wrinkle reduction, acne-scar improvement and body-contouring treatments.
Four cartridge options and an adjustable needle depth from 0.2mm to 7.0mm allow trained practitioners to create customized protocols for different facial zones, body areas and skin concerns.
Four cartridge options | 0.2–7.0mm adjustable depth | Face and body applications | Three-year warranty
Four Cartridge Options on One Professional Platform 12-Pin Cartridge
The 12-pin cartridge is designed for precise treatments and smaller facial areas. Its concentrated treatment pattern makes it suitable for detailed skin-rejuvenation protocols and localized concerns. Common treatment applications include: Fine-line treatments Localized acne scars Under-eye areas Small facial zones Detailed texture-refinement protocols Precision collagen-remodeling treatments 24-Pin Cartridge
The 24-pin cartridge is a versatile option for general facial rejuvenation. It provides balanced treatment coverage for common facial skin concerns and medium-sized treatment areas. Common treatment applications include: Facial skin tightening Wrinkle treatments Uneven skin texture Enlarged-looking pores Mild facial laxity General collagen-remodeling protocols 40-Pin Cartridge
The 40-pin cartridge provides broader treatment coverage for larger facial and body areas. Its wider treatment pattern helps practitioners perform efficient treatments across areas requiring greater coverage. Common treatment areas include: Abdomen Thighs Buttocks Upper arms Neck and décolletage Larger facial areas Nano Cartridge
The Nano cartridge is designed for superficial skin-rejuvenation and texture-refinement treatments. It supports surface-focused protocols without the deeper penetration provided by the pin cartridges. Common treatment applications include: Superficial skin refinement Uneven-looking texture Enlarged-looking pores Skin-tone improvement Maintenance-oriented treatments Overall skin-quality programs The appropriate cartridge should be selected according to the treatment area, skin condition and professional protocol. Select the Right Cartridge for Each Treatment
The system supports four cartridge options. The appropriate cartridge should be selected according to the size of the treatment area, required coverage and intended skin-rejuvenation protocol. Option 1: 12-Pin Cartridge
A precision-focused cartridge for smaller treatment areas and localized skin concerns. Recommended applications: Fine lines Localized acne scars Detailed facial treatments Small or delicate treatment zones Recommended for: Precision facial protocols Targeted scar treatments Localized collagen remodeling Clinics offering detailed facial services Option 2: 24-Pin Cartridge
A versatile cartridge for general facial rejuvenation and medium-sized areas. Recommended applications: Facial skin tightening Wrinkle treatments Uneven skin texture Enlarged-looking pores Recommended for: General facial rejuvenation Full-face treatment programs Skin-texture improvement Collagen-stimulation protocols Option 3: 40-Pin Cartridge
A broader-coverage cartridge for larger facial and body areas. Recommended applications: Abdomen treatments Thigh treatments Buttock treatments Upper-arm treatments Recommended for: Body skin-firming programs Larger treatment areas Efficient body protocols Clinics expanding into face and body treatments Option 4: Nano Cartridge
A superficial cartridge for skin refinement and maintenance-oriented treatments. Recommended applications: Surface texture refinement Skin-tone improvement Enlarged-looking pores Superficial rejuvenation Recommended for: Gentle skin-quality treatments Maintenance protocols Surface-focused facial services Clients requiring superficial applications Precision Depth Control for Customized RF Microneedling
The system offers an adjustable needle depth from 0.2mm to 7.0mm. Each depth should be selected according to the treatment area, tissue thickness, cartridge type and professional protocol. The adjustable depth gives trained operators greater control over treatment placement and protocol customization. The correct depth must be selected following consultation and assessment of the intended treatment area. Adjustable Treatment Depths
Different needle depths support different professional treatment requirements. Superficial Depths
0.2mm to 1.0mm Surface-focused skin-refinement protocols Fine-line appearance Delicate facial zones Maintenance-oriented treatments Mid-Depth Treatments
1.0mm to 3.0mm General facial rejuvenation Skin-tightening protocols Uneven texture Acne-scar appearance Collagen-remodeling treatments Deeper Treatments
3.0mm to 7.0mm Appropriately selected body areas Abdomen, thighs, buttocks and upper arms Body skin-firming protocols Deeper professional treatment programs Professional Face and Body Applications
The available treatments depend on the cartridge, needle depth and professional protocol selected. Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete consultation should be performed before every treatment. How a Professional Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s skin concerns, medical history, previous treatments, treatment goals and suitability. The appropriate cartridge, needle depth and RF parameters are then selected. 2. System Preparation
The selected cartridge is installed according to the operating manual. The operator confirms that the handpiece and cartridge are correctly connected before beginning treatment. 3. Parameter Selection
Needle depth, RF energy, frequency and other available settings are selected according to the treatment area, skin condition and professional protocol. 4. Treatment Application
The operator applies the treatment handpiece to the selected area using the appropriate technique. Session duration varies according to the cartridge, treatment depth, area size and protocol. 5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the area is cleaned and the client receives appropriate aftercare instructions. Temporary redness, sensitivity, swelling, dryness, pinpoint marks or other expected skin responses may occur following RF microneedling treatment. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The machine combines a 10.4-inch control screen with adjustable RF microneedling technology for streamlined use in professional settings. Key operating advantages include: 10.4-inch control screen Four interchangeable cartridge options Adjustable needle depth from 0.2mm to 7.0mm Face and body treatment capability Adjustable 1–15MHz RF frequency Specialized 6MHz thermal RF mode Maximum 500W output power Compact vertical professional design Technical Specifications What Is Included?
Package contents include the main equipment, treatment handpiece, cartridge options and professional operating guidance. Standard Equipment
One RF microneedling main unit One professional treatment handpiece 12-pin cartridge 24-pin cartridge 40-pin cartridge Nano cartridge Treatment-handle connection components Power cable English user manual Operating guidance Documentation and Training
English operating manual Remote professional training Machine setup guidance Cartridge installation guidance Needle-depth selection training RF-parameter guidance Facial and body treatment guidance Safety and operating instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Training certificate after completion Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides remote guidance to help buyers understand: Machine installation and setup Treatment-handpiece operation Cartridge installation Cartridge selection Needle-depth adjustment Control-interface operation RF-parameter selection Facial and body treatment protocols Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic troubleshooting A professional training certificate is provided after completion. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Morpheus 8 RF Microneedling Machine is supported by a three-year parts warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Control screen and operating system Original treatment handpiece Handpiece-connection components Other eligible parts supplied with the machine Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with: Remote inspection and fault identification Guided troubleshooting Confirmation of the affected component Replacement-part assistance when covered Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse Incorrect treatment-handpiece operation Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of cartridges and consumable items Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service. Full coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional RF microneedling equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be completed before treatment. Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Implanted electronic devices Active cancer Serious cardiovascular conditions Blood-clotting disorders Uncontrolled medical conditions Active infection or inflammation Open wounds in the treatment area Severe skin disorders Recent isotretinoin use Recent surgery in the proposed treatment area Conditions affecting normal healing A history of abnormal or keloid scarring Other contraindications listed in the operating manual RF microneedling cartridges must be handled according to professional hygiene and infection-control requirements. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for: Aesthetic clinics Medical spas Dermatology practices Professional beauty centers Skin-rejuvenation professionals Trained independent practitioners Businesses expanding their facial and body treatment services This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use. Why Choose This RF Microneedling System? Select the Appropriate Cartridge
Four cartridge options allow practitioners to select the appropriate coverage pattern for different facial zones, body areas and skin concerns. Treat the Face and Body
The system supports professional protocols for the face, jawline, neck, décolletage, abdomen, thighs, buttocks and upper arms. Work at Adjustable Treatment Depths
The adjustable 0.2–7.0mm depth range supports superficial, mid-depth and deeper professional applications. Expand Your Service Menu
One professional platform can support facial rejuvenation, skin tightening, wrinkle treatments, acne-scar protocols, texture refinement and body skin-firming services. Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year parts warranty, professional training, a training certificate and lifetime technical support. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the difference between the four cartridges?
The 12-pin cartridge supports precise and localized treatments. The 24-pin cartridge is suitable for general facial rejuvenation. The 40-pin cartridge provides broader coverage for larger face and body areas. The Nano cartridge supports superficial skin-refinement protocols. How is RF microneedling different from traditional microneedling?
Traditional microneedling creates controlled microchannels without delivering radiofrequency energy. This system combines microneedling with RF energy to support thermal collagen remodeling, skin tightening and texture improvement. What is the adjustable needle-depth range?
The needle depth can be adjusted from 0.2mm to 7.0mm. The appropriate depth should be selected according to the treatment area, tissue thickness, cartridge and professional protocol. Which cartridge is best for facial treatments?
The 12-pin and 24-pin cartridges are suitable for many professional facial protocols. The final selection depends on the treatment area, skin condition and required coverage. Which cartridge is best for body treatments?
The 40-pin cartridge provides broader coverage for larger body areas such as the abdomen, thighs, buttocks and upper arms. How long does a treatment take?
A typical session takes approximately 30–60 minutes. Treatment time varies according to the selected area, cartridge, depth and professional protocol. How quickly will clients see results?
Results vary according to the treatment area, skin condition, treatment parameters and individual biological response. Progressive improvement may develop as the skin-remodeling process continues. Is there downtime?
Temporary redness, sensitivity, swelling, dryness or pinpoint marks may occur after treatment. The duration varies according to treatment depth, RF settings and individual response. Is training included?
Remote professional training and operating guidance are included. A professional training certificate is provided after completion. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects in approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Consumables, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included. Add Professional RF Microneedling to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Morpheus 8 RF Microneedling Machine combines: Four professional cartridge options Adjustable 0.2–7.0mm needle depth A 10.4-inch control screen Professional face and body applications Three-year parts warranty and lifetime support Contact Wikbeauty to order the system or receive more information about its cartridges, treatment applications and professional training. Order Your RF Microneedling Machine and Request a Quote Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Depth Range
Recommended Application
0.2–1.0mm
Superficial skin-refinement and delicate-area protocols
1.0–2.0mm
General facial rejuvenation and fine-line treatments
2.0–4.0mm
Deeper facial skin tightening and scar-remodeling protocols
4.0–7.0mm
Appropriately selected body areas and deeper professional applications
Treatment Area
Applicable Cartridge
Intended Aesthetic Application
Under-eye area
12-pin
Delicate skin-firming and fine-line protocols
Face and cheeks
12-pin or 24-pin
Facial rejuvenation and texture improvement
Jawline and lower face
24-pin
Skin tightening and contour refinement
Neck and décolletage
24-pin or 40-pin
Firming and texture-improvement protocols
Acne scars
12-pin or 24-pin
Targeted collagen-remodeling treatments
Abdomen
40-pin
Body skin firming and texture improvement
Thighs and buttocks
40-pin
Body rejuvenation and firming protocols
Superficial facial areas
Nano
Texture, tone and skin-quality improvement
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty Morpheus 8 RF Microneedling Machine
Product Type
Professional fractional RF microneedling system
Technology
Fractional radiofrequency microneedling
Maximum Output Power
500W
Input Voltage
100V / 110V / 220V
Control Interface
10.4-inch control screen
RF Frequency
1–15MHz adjustable
Thermal RF Mode
6MHz
Cartridge Options
12-pin, 24-pin, 40-pin and Nano
Adjustable Needle Depth
0.2–7.0mm
Treatment-Area Sizes
1.1 × 1.1cm, 1.6 × 1.6cm, 1.6 × 1.5cm and 2 × 2cm
Machine Dimensions
40 × 36 × 81cm
Machine Weight
13.3kg
Package Dimensions
49 × 46 × 102cm
Package Weight
28.4kg
Intended Applications
Skin tightening, wrinkle reduction, acne-scar improvement, texture refinement and body treatments
Warranty
Three-year parts warranty
Support
Lifetime technical support
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
From $2,499.00
Professional 5D Lipo Laser System
Five-Wavelength Technology for Non-Invasive Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty 5D Lipo Laser Machine is a professional body-contouring system developed for beauty studios, wellness centers and qualified independent practitioners.
Combining five laser wavelengths with an adjustable multi-pad design, the system enables trained operators to create customized treatments for the abdomen, waist, thighs, arms, back and other commonly requested body areas.
Available in vertical and portable configurations, the machine provides a practical balance of treatment flexibility, operator control and client comfort.
Five wavelengths | Up to 14 pads | 15 energy levels | Vertical or portable
Advanced Five-Wavelength Technology The system integrates five laser wavelengths within one professional platform: 650 nm 780 nm 808 nm 940 nm 980 nm This multi-wavelength configuration provides greater versatility than a conventional single-wavelength system. Treatment parameters can be adjusted according to the selected area, professional protocol and individual client requirements. Each treatment pad contains 28 diode lasers, depending on the configuration selected, with an output of up to 209 mW per diode. Key Product Advantages Multi-Wavelength System
Five available wavelengths provide greater flexibility when developing professional body-contouring protocols. Adjustable Treatment Parameters
Fifteen energy levels, adjustable pulse timing and continuous or pulsed modes allow the operator to customize each session. Flexible Pad Configuration
The standard system includes six large pads and two small pads. Compatible configurations can be expanded to a maximum of 14 treatment pads. Independent Pad Cooling
Each treatment pad features an independent wind-cooling system to support stable performance during operation. Multiple Equipment Formats
Choose a vertical unit for a permanent treatment room or a portable unit for smaller spaces and more flexible working arrangements. International Compatibility
The system is available in 110 V and 220 V versions, with US, UK, EU and AU plug options. Professional Body-Contouring Applications The 5D Lipo Laser Machine is designed for non-invasive aesthetic treatments focused on improving the appearance of body contours. Common treatment areas include: Treatment suitability, pad placement and operating parameters should be determined by a trained operator following a complete client consultation. How the System Works The treatment pads are positioned securely over the selected body area using adjustable straps. The operator then selects the treatment duration, energy level and pulse mode according to the recommended protocol. The pads deliver controlled low-level laser energy to the treatment area without surgical incisions, injections or anesthesia. Sessions are designed to be comfortable and generally do not require a surgical recovery period. The system should be used as part of a structured body-contouring program. Individual outcomes vary according to body composition, lifestyle, treatment frequency and the protocol applied. Configurable Treatment-Pad System Large Treatment Pads
The six large pads provide wider coverage for areas such as the abdomen, waist, back, thighs and buttocks. Small Treatment Pads
The two small pads are designed for more targeted placement on areas such as the upper arms and smaller localized zones. Optional Expansion
Selected machine configurations can support up to 14 pads. This provides additional flexibility when covering larger areas or developing multi-pad protocols. Additional treatment pads are sold separately. Compatibility should be confirmed before purchase. Vertical and Portable Options Vertical Configuration
The vertical model provides a refined, professional presentation for dedicated treatment rooms. Its mobile base allows the equipment to be repositioned within the working area when necessary. Recommended for: Beauty studios Aesthetic clinics Body-contouring centers Permanent treatment rooms Higher-volume treatment environments Portable Configuration
The portable model offers a more compact footprint while retaining the core multi-pad functionality of the system. Recommended for: Independent practitioners Smaller studios Limited treatment spaces Professionals requiring easier storage or transportation Controlled, Client-Focused Operation
The system offers adjustable parameters to support professional operation and individual client comfort. Energy adjustment from level 1 to 15 Pulse-time adjustment from 0.1 to 5 seconds Continuous and pulsed operating modes Adjustable session duration Touchscreen control interface Independent cooling for each pad Secure pad-positioning straps IC-card control system Treatment duration may range from approximately 15 to 60 minutes, depending on the selected area and treatment protocol. Technical Specifications Product specifications may vary according to the selected configuration. Confirm the final specification sheet with Wikbeauty before ordering. Standard Package Contents The standard package includes: One 5D Lipo Laser main unit Six large treatment pads Two small treatment pads Treatment-pad connection cables Adjustable securing straps Protective eyewear Power cable with selected plug English user manual Setup and operating guidance Optional pads and accessories can be added according to the selected system configuration. Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides guidance to help buyers understand: Equipment installation Basic system operation Treatment-parameter selection Pad positioning Routine cleaning and maintenance Basic troubleshooting Recommended safety procedures Intended Users
This system is designed for professional use by: Aesthetic practitioners Body-contouring specialists Beauty-studio owners Wellness professionals Trained independent operators Qualified entrepreneurs establishing a treatment business Safety and Contraindications A complete consultation and suitability assessment should be performed before every treatment. Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Implanted electronic devices Active cancer Serious cardiovascular conditions Uncontrolled medical conditions Active skin infections Open wounds in the treatment area Photosensitivity or the use of photosensitizing medication Other conditions identified in the operating manual This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the supplied user manual, relevant professional standards and applicable local regulations. Clients should seek medical advice when treatment suitability is uncertain. Why Professionals Choose Wikbeauty Specialized Beauty-Equipment Supply
Wikbeauty provides professional aesthetic and body-contouring equipment to international buyers. Configurable Equipment
Select the machine format, voltage, plug and number of treatment pads according to your operating requirements. International Electrical Options
The system can be prepared for different markets with 110 V or 220 V operation and the appropriate regional plug. Operating Assistance
Support is available for installation, initial setup, routine operation and basic troubleshooting. Direct Purchasing
Buy directly from the equipment supplier and receive assistance when confirming the most appropriate configuration. Frequently Asked Questions
Is this a professional or home-use machine?
This is professional beauty equipment. It should be operated by a trained individual who understands consultation procedures, contraindications, treatment parameters and equipment safety. What is the standard pad configuration?
The standard system includes six large pads and two small pads. Compatible configurations can be expanded to a maximum of 14 pads. What is the difference between the large and small pads?
Large pads provide broader coverage for areas such as the abdomen, back and thighs. Small pads enable more targeted placement on the arms and other localized areas. Should I choose the vertical or portable version?
The vertical model is suitable for a dedicated professional treatment room. The portable model is better suited to smaller spaces or operators who require easier storage and transportation. How long does a session take?
A session may last approximately 15–60 minutes. Duration varies according to the treatment area, pad configuration, operating parameters and professional protocol. Is there a recovery period?
The treatment is non-invasive and does not involve surgical incisions. Clients can generally resume normal daily activities after a session, subject to individual circumstances and professional guidance. Are results guaranteed?
No aesthetic treatment can guarantee identical results for every person. Outcomes may vary depending on the client’s body composition, lifestyle, treatment schedule and the protocol used. Can I order additional treatment pads?
Additional pads may be purchased for compatible configurations. Confirm the maximum number of supported pads before ordering. Which voltage should I select?
Select the voltage that matches the electrical standard in your country. If uncertain, contact Wikbeauty before completing your purchase. Configure Your 5D Lipo Laser System
Select the machine format, voltage, plug and treatment-pad configuration that best suits your professional requirements. For assistance choosing between the vertical and portable models, contact Wikbeauty before placing your order. Three-Year Warranty
Your Wikbeauty 5D Lipo Laser Machine is supported by a three-year limited warranty, providing additional confidence in your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the warranty terms, coverage includes manufacturing defects and eligible failures involving: Main machine components Internal electronic components Touchscreen and control system Treatment-pad connections Other eligible parts supplied with the original machine Technical Support
If a covered technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty’s support team will help you: Identify the issue through remote technical assessment Complete basic troubleshooting Determine whether a replacement part or repair is required Receive guidance for installing eligible replacement components Warranty Conditions
The warranty applies to defects arising under normal and proper use. It does not cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse or incorrect operation Unauthorized modification or repair Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of consumable parts and accessories Damage caused during unauthorized transportation Failure to follow the supplied operating instructions The original order information and machine serial number may be required when requesting warranty service. Full coverage is subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty terms. Three years of warranty coverage. Professional technical assistance. Long-term confidence in your purchase. Select Your Configuration and Add to Cart Explore the complete range of professional lipo laser machines. Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Treatment area
Typical application
Abdomen
Abdominal contouring
Waist and flanks
Waistline definition
Upper and lower back
Localized body contouring
Upper arms
Arm-contouring treatments
Inner and outer thighs
Thigh shaping
Buttocks
Contour-focused treatments
Legs and calves
Localized lower-body treatments
Specification
Details
Product type
Professional 5D lipo laser machine
Technology
Low-level diode laser
Laser wavelengths
650 nm, 780 nm, 808 nm, 940 nm and 980 nm
Diode output
Up to 209 mW per diode
Diodes per pad
28 on big and 3 on a small pad
Standard configuration
6 large pads and 2 small pads
Maximum configuration
Up to 14 treatment pads
Energy adjustment
Levels 1–15
Pulse-time range
0.1–5 seconds
Operating modes
Continuous and pulsed
Treatment duration
Approximately 15–60 minutes
Cooling system
Independent wind cooling for each pad
Control interface
Touchscreen
Additional control
IC-card system
Equipment options
Vertical or portable
Voltage options
110 V or 220 V
Plug options
US, UK, EU and AU
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
$2,399.00
Professional EMSlim Body-Sculpting System
Smart Fat Reduction, Muscle Toning, and Skin-Firming Technology
The Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine is a professional, non-invasive system designed to support fat reduction, muscle development, body contouring, and firmer-looking skin within one treatment platform.
The system combines high-intensity focused electromagnetic technology with radiofrequency energy. Electromagnetic pulses stimulate powerful muscle contractions while controlled RF energy heats the underlying tissue, supporting fat-reduction and skin-firming treatments.
Equipped with four ergonomic applicators, an intelligent touchscreen, and 110V/220V compatibility, the machine is suitable for aesthetic clinics, beauty centers, spas, wellness businesses, gyms, fitness studios, and professional body-contouring providers.
HI-EMT and Radiofrequency | Four Applicators | 20–30-Minute Sessions | CE and ISO Certificates | Three-Year Warranty
Three Professional Technologies on One Platform High-Intensity Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation
HI-EMT energy penetrates the treatment area and stimulates repeated supramaximal muscle contractions that cannot normally be maintained through voluntary exercise alone. Common applications include: Abdominal muscle toning Buttock muscle stimulation Arm definition Thigh toning Core-strengthening support Improved muscle conditioning Radiofrequency Fat and Tissue Heating
Controlled radiofrequency energy heats the treatment area while the electromagnetic function stimulates the muscles. This thermal action supports fat-reduction treatments and improves the appearance of skin firmness. Common applications include: Localized fat-reduction support Abdominal contouring Waistline shaping Thigh and arm treatments Skin-firming programs Smoother-looking body contours Combined Body-Contouring Technology
The simultaneous use of electromagnetic muscle stimulation and RF energy allows professionals to address muscle tone, localized fat, and skin quality during the same treatment program. Common applications include: Muscle building and definition Fat-reduction support Full-body contouring Buttock toning Improved skin firmness Post-weight-loss body shaping Select the Right Program for Each Client Muscle-Toning Program
A focused treatment program designed to stimulate muscle contractions and improve the appearance of strength, firmness, and definition. Recommended applications: Abdomen, buttocks, arms, and thighs. Recommended for: Clients seeking greater muscle definition and improved body tone without intensive conventional exercise during treatment. Fat-Reduction Program
A professional protocol that combines electromagnetic stimulation with controlled RF heating to support the reduction of localized fat deposits. Recommended applications: Abdomen, waistline, arms, thighs, and buttocks. Recommended for: Clients with stubborn body areas that may not respond sufficiently to diet and exercise alone. Complete Body-Sculpting Program
A combined protocol developed to support muscle tone, fat reduction, skin firmness, and improved body contours during one structured treatment course. Recommended applications: Abdomen and waist, buttocks and thighs, or other compatible area combinations. Recommended for: Clients seeking comprehensive body-contouring benefits rather than a single-function treatment. Maintenance and Conditioning Program
A follow-up program designed to support previously achieved muscle tone and body-contouring results. Recommended applications: Previously treated areas requiring periodic muscle stimulation or contour maintenance. Recommended for: Clients who have completed an initial 4–6-session course and want occasional maintenance treatments. Adjustable Electromagnetic and RF Treatment Settings
Energy and RF intensity should begin at a comfortable level and be increased gradually according to the client’s response, treatment area, physical condition, and professional operating protocol. Adjustable Treatment Areas Abdominal and Waist Areas
The abdomen and waist are common areas for combined muscle-toning and body-contouring treatments. Treatment objectives include: Abdominal muscle stimulation Improved core definition Waistline contouring Localized fat-reduction support Firmer-looking abdominal skin Improved midsection shape Arms and Upper-Body Areas
Ergonomic applicators can be positioned on compatible upper-body muscle groups to support toning and definition. Treatment objectives include: Upper-arm toning Biceps and triceps stimulation Improved muscle definition Localized contouring Firmer-looking skin Buttocks and Thigh Areas
The machine supports lower-body programs developed to stimulate the gluteal and thigh muscles while improving body contours. Treatment objectives include: Buttock toning and firming Gluteal muscle stimulation Inner- and outer-thigh contouring Improved lower-body definition Localized fat-reduction support More balanced body proportions Professional Treatment Applications How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s goals, medical history, physical condition, previous treatments, and possible contraindications. Step 2: Body and Muscle Assessment
Identify the treatment area, evaluate muscle condition, and determine the appropriate applicator placement and treatment program. Step 3: Applicator Placement
Position and secure the treatment applicators over the selected muscle groups according to the professional operating protocol. Step 4: Treatment Configuration
Select the treatment time, electromagnetic intensity, and RF level through the intelligent touchscreen. Begin at a comfortable setting and increase the intensity gradually. A typical session lasts approximately 20–30 minutes. Step 5: Aftercare Guidance
Remove the applicators, inspect the treated area, and provide suitable hydration, exercise, nutrition, and maintenance recommendations. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine combines professional HI-EMT and RF technology with four applicators and an intelligent control system. Key advantages include: Combined muscle stimulation and RF technology Four ergonomic treatment applicators Muscle toning and fat-reduction support Multiple body-treatment applications Approximately 20–30-minute sessions Structured 4–6-session treatment courses 8-inch intelligent touchscreen Air and water circulation cooling 110V and 220V compatibility Professional training and after-sales support CE and ISO certificates Three-year professional warranty Technical Specifications
The stated muscle-contraction equivalent is a product-performance comparison and should not be interpreted as an exact substitute for conventional exercise. Treatment experiences and outcomes vary according to body composition, muscle condition, lifestyle, settings, treatment frequency, and adherence to the recommended course. What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine 4 × Ergonomic treatment applicators Compatible applicator straps Standard handle connections 1 × Compatible power cable Standard machine accessories 1 × Warranty card Documentation and Training
English user manual Machine setup guide Applicator-placement instructions Treatment-protocol guidance Safety and contraindication information Cleaning and maintenance instructions Professional operating training Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides professional training and technical guidance to help machine owners and treatment providers operate the EMSlim system safely and confidently. Training and support cover: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen operation Applicator positioning HI-EMT energy adjustment RF setting adjustment Treatment-area selection Client consultation procedures Contraindication screening Treatment-course planning Cleaning and routine maintenance Basic troubleshooting After-sales technical assistance Ongoing support is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine includes a three-year professional warranty and after-sales technical support. Warranty Coverage
The warranty provides support for eligible machine components and manufacturing-related faults arising during normal professional operation. Technical assessment may be required before replacement parts or repair assistance are provided. Warranty support includes: Remote technical diagnosis Operating and troubleshooting guidance Support for eligible replacement parts Repair instructions Maintenance recommendations After-sales communication during the warranty period Technical Support Process
Contact Wikbeauty with the machine model and order information. Provide a detailed explanation of the technical issue. Submit clear photos or a short video when requested. Allow the technical team to diagnose the problem. Follow the supplied troubleshooting or repair instructions. Receive eligible replacement-part support when required. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover damage caused by: Incorrect machine operation Unauthorized modification or repair Accidental impact or physical damage Improper voltage or electrical installation Operation without the required cooling conditions Water damage or unsuitable storage Failure to follow maintenance instructions Normal wear of straps, cables, connectors, and other consumable components Shipping or relocation damage occurring after delivery Safety and Contraindications
A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be performed before treatment. The system should only be operated by trained professionals following the supplied instructions and applicable local regulations. Treatment may be unsuitable for clients with: Pregnancy or breastfeeding Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants in or near the treatment area Serious cardiovascular conditions Epilepsy or seizure disorders Active cancer or ongoing cancer treatment Severe liver or kidney conditions Blood-clotting disorders Uncontrolled diabetes Active infection or inflammation Open wounds or damaged skin Recent surgery in the treatment area Severe muscle injuries Abdominal or inguinal hernia Reduced sensation in the treatment area Any medical condition requiring professional clearance Clients with medical conditions or implanted devices should consult a qualified healthcare professional before receiving treatment. Operating Precautions
Complete a consultation before every initial treatment. Inspect the machine, cables, applicators, and cooling system before operation. Position applicators over suitable muscle groups only. Secure each applicator correctly before beginning treatment. Start with a low electromagnetic intensity. Increase energy gradually according to client tolerance. Monitor RF warmth and client comfort throughout the session. Do not place applicators over the head, chest, heart, or injured tissue. Stop treatment if the client experiences pain, dizziness, abnormal discomfort, or skin irritation. Do not exceed the recommended session duration. Maintain sufficient spacing between sessions. Clean and disinfect applicators after every client. Follow the required cooling and maintenance procedures. Use a stable and correctly grounded power source. Maintain appropriate client-treatment records. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine is suitable for: Aesthetic clinics Beauty salons Body-contouring centers Medical spas where locally permitted Wellness facilities Gyms and fitness studios Slimming centers Professional muscle-toning providers Entrepreneurs entering the aesthetic-equipment market Users should complete appropriate operating training and comply with local requirements governing electromagnetic, radiofrequency, and body-contouring treatments. Why Choose the Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine? 1. Combined HI-EMT and RF Technology
The machine combines powerful muscle stimulation with controlled RF heating, allowing professionals to address muscle tone, localized fat, and skin firmness within one treatment program. 2. Four Ergonomic Applicators
Four treatment applicators provide flexible positioning and support efficient single-area or multi-area protocols. 3. Multiple Body Applications
The system supports professional treatments for the abdomen, waistline, arms, thighs, and buttocks. 4. Intelligent Professional Operation
An 8-inch touchscreen, adjustable settings, and air-and-water cooling support convenient use in busy professional environments. 5. Certified Quality and Professional Support
The machine includes CE and ISO certificates, professional training, ongoing technical assistance, and a three-year warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
Q: How does the EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine work?
The system combines high-intensity electromagnetic muscle stimulation with radiofrequency energy. HI-EMT stimulates powerful muscle contractions while RF heats the surrounding tissue to support fat-reduction and skin-firming treatments. Q: What is the difference between HI-EMT and RF?
HI-EMT primarily stimulates muscle contractions, while radiofrequency delivers controlled thermal energy to the tissue. Combining them supports muscle toning, body contouring, and skin-firming objectives. Q: What results can the machine support?
The machine supports improved muscle tone, greater body definition, localized fat reduction, firmer-looking skin, and more balanced body contours. Q: Is the treatment invasive?
No. The system works externally and does not require needles, incisions, anesthesia, or surgical procedures. Q: Is the treatment painful?
Clients generally feel strong muscle contractions and controlled warmth. Comfort varies, so intensity should be adjusted gradually and monitored throughout the treatment. Q: How long does one treatment take?
A typical professional session lasts approximately 20–30 minutes. Q: How many sessions are recommended?
A starting course generally includes approximately 4–6 sessions, with around two sessions per week when suitable. Q: When can clients expect visible changes?
Some clients may notice improved muscle activation or firmness after several sessions. More developed changes generally appear progressively during and after the treatment course. Individual outcomes vary. Q: Which areas can be treated?
Compatible treatment areas include the abdomen, waistline, arms, thighs, and buttocks. Q: Can multiple areas be treated?
The machine includes four applicators, allowing professionals to create flexible treatment configurations according to the selected protocol and machine controls. Q: Does the machine replace exercise?
EMSlim should complement, not replace, regular physical activity, balanced nutrition, and a healthy lifestyle. Q: Is there any downtime?
Most suitable clients can return to their normal activities after a session. Temporary muscle fatigue or soreness similar to post-exercise sensations may occur. Q: Can the machine help build muscle?
HI-EMT technology stimulates repeated muscle contractions and can support improved muscle tone and conditioning through a structured treatment course. Q: Can it reduce fat?
The combined HI-EMT and RF treatment supports localized fat-reduction programs. Outcomes depend on the client’s body composition, lifestyle, treatment settings, and completed course. Q: Does it tighten the skin?
Controlled RF energy can support collagen-related skin-firming treatments and improve the appearance of skin texture. Q: Is the treatment suitable for everyone?
Every client must complete a consultation and contraindication screening before treatment. Q: Can clients with metal implants receive treatment?
Clients with metal implants in or near the treatment area should not receive treatment without clearance from a qualified healthcare professional. Q: Does the machine support 110V and 220V power?
Yes. The supplied specifications include 110V and 220V dual-voltage compatibility. Q: What certificates are included?
The machine is supplied with CE and ISO certificates. Q: Is professional training included?
Yes. Training includes machine setup, applicator placement, energy adjustment, treatment protocols, safety, cleaning, and maintenance guidance. Q: What warranty is provided?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with after-sales technical support. Add Professional EMSlim Treatments to Your Business
The Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine provides clinics, salons, wellness centers, and fitness businesses with a professional solution for muscle toning, fat-reduction support, body contouring, and skin firming. Five key benefits: Combined HI-EMT and radiofrequency technology Four ergonomic applicators Efficient 20–30-minute treatment sessions Multiple body-treatment applications CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, ordering information, training details, and professional support. Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Setting
Available Configuration
Professional Purpose
HI-EMT Energy
Adjustable electromagnetic intensity
Allows muscle stimulation to be adapted to the treatment area and client tolerance
RF Energy
Adjustable controlled tissue heating
Supports fat-reduction and skin-firming treatments
Treatment Handles
Four ergonomic applicators
Enables flexible single-area or multi-area treatment
Treatment Time
Approximately 20–30 minutes
Supports efficient professional appointment scheduling
Treatment Course
Approximately 4–6 sessions
Provides a structured program for progressive results
Session Frequency
Approximately two sessions per week
Supports consistent muscle stimulation and body contouring
Control Interface
8-inch intelligent touchscreen
Provides convenient treatment selection and adjustment
Cooling System
Air and water circulation
Supports temperature management during professional operation
Power Supply
110V/220V dual compatibility
Enables operation in different international markets
Treatment Application
Primary Area
Professional Objective
Abdominal Muscle Toning
Abdomen
Stimulate abdominal muscles and improve definition
Waistline Contouring
Waist and sides
Support a slimmer and more balanced waistline
Buttock Toning
Buttocks
Stimulate gluteal muscles and improve firmness
Thigh Sculpting
Inner and outer thighs
Improve muscle tone and lower-body contours
Arm Definition
Upper arms
Support biceps and triceps conditioning
Localized Fat Reduction
Compatible body areas
Support the reduction of stubborn fat deposits
Skin-Firming Treatment
Abdomen, arms, thighs, and buttocks
Improve the appearance of skin firmness
Muscle Conditioning
Selected muscle groups
Support strength, tone, and muscle activation
Post-Weight-Loss Contouring
Abdomen, thighs, arms, and buttocks
Improve body shape and muscle definition
Maintenance Treatment
Previously treated areas
Help maintain muscle tone and contouring results
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine
Machine Power
6500W
Magnetic Field Strength
14 Tesla
RF Function
Yes, built-in radiofrequency
Net Weight
Approximately 57 kg
Machine Dimensions
60 × 40 × 65 cm
Display
8-inch intelligent touchscreen
Technology
High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology and Radiofrequency
Treatment Handles
Four ergonomic applicators
Primary Functions
Fat reduction, muscle building, muscle toning, skin firming, and body contouring
Treatment Areas
Abdomen, waistline, arms, thighs, and buttocks
Session Duration
Approximately 20–30 minutes
Recommended Course
Approximately 4–6 sessions
Recommended Frequency
Approximately two sessions per week
Muscle Contractions
Claimed equivalent of up to 30,000 crunches or squats per session
Cooling System
Air and water circulation
Power Supply
110V/220V dual compatibility
Certificates
CE and ISO
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
After-Sales Service
Professional training and technical support
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
$549.00
Professional Lipo Laser Slimming Machine
Non-Invasive Fat Reduction, Body Slimming, and Contouring System
The Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine is a professional body-contouring system designed to support targeted fat reduction, inch loss, and improved body shape without surgery or downtime.
Using 650nm low-level laser therapy, the system delivers controlled red-light energy through multiple laser pads positioned over selected treatment areas. This energy supports the release of stored triglycerides from fat cells as free fatty acids and glycerol, which are then processed naturally by the body.
With an intelligent touchscreen, multiple body applicators, and universal 110V/220V compatibility, the machine is suitable for slimming salons, spas, wellness centers, fitness clinics, and professional aesthetic practices.
650nm Lipo Laser | Multiple Treatment Pads | 20–40-Minute Sessions | CE and ISO Certificates | Three-Year Warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform Lipo Laser Fat-Reduction Technology
The machine uses 650nm low-level laser therapy to target localized fat deposits without surgery, needles, or anesthesia. Multiple laser pads deliver controlled energy across the selected treatment area. Common applications include: Localized fat-reduction treatments Waist and abdominal contouring Arm and thigh slimming Hip, flank, and back shaping Buttock contour refinement Body Sculpting and Inch-Loss Treatments
The flexible laser-pad system allows operators to position applicators around different body zones. This supports customized slimming programs based on the client’s proportions and treatment objectives. Common applications include: Waistline definition Abdominal contour improvement Arm and thigh reshaping Hip and flank contouring Multi-area body-sculpting programs Cellulite and Skin-Quality Support
Lipo laser treatments can be incorporated into professional programs designed to improve the appearance of uneven skin texture while supporting smoother and firmer-looking skin. Common applications include: Cellulite-appearance reduction Skin-texture improvement Firmness and elasticity support Post-slimming skin conditioning Body-smoothing treatments Select the Right Program for Each Client Targeted Fat-Reduction Program
Designed for clients with localized areas of stubborn fat that may be resistant to regular diet and exercise. Recommended applications: Abdomen, waist, hips, thighs, arms, back, and flanks. Recommended for: Clients seeking focused treatment of one or two specific body areas. Complete Body-Contouring Program
A multi-area protocol that uses several laser pads to support balanced body shaping and improved proportions. Recommended applications: Abdomen and waist, thighs and hips, arms and back, or other compatible area combinations. Recommended for: Clients seeking a more comprehensive body-sculpting course. Cellulite and Skin-Smoothing Program
A treatment program focused on the appearance of uneven texture, cellulite, and reduced skin firmness. Recommended applications: Thighs, hips, buttocks, abdomen, and upper arms. Recommended for: Clients who want smoother-looking skin alongside body-contouring benefits. Maintenance and Shape-Management Program
A flexible follow-up program designed to support previously achieved contouring results. Recommended applications: Previously treated body areas requiring periodic maintenance. Recommended for: Clients who have completed an initial treatment course and want ongoing body-contouring support. Adjustable Laser and Treatment Settings Treatment settings, session frequency, and pad positioning should be selected according to the client’s assessment, treatment area, comfort, and professional operating protocol. Adjustable Treatment Areas Upper-Body Areas
Treatment pads can be positioned on suitable upper-body zones where localized fat deposits or reduced definition are present. Treatment objectives include: Upper-arm contouring Back-fat reduction support Flank shaping Waistline definition Improved upper-body proportions Abdominal and Waist Areas
The abdomen and waist are common areas for professional lipo laser body-contouring programs. Treatment objectives include: Abdominal contouring Waistline slimming Localized inch-loss support Flank and side shaping Improved midsection definition Lower-Body Areas
Multiple pads can be arranged across compatible lower-body treatment zones. Treatment objectives include: Inner- and outer-thigh contouring Hip shaping Buttock contour refinement Cellulite-appearance improvement Smoother-looking lower-body contours Professional Treatment Applications How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s treatment goals, medical history, lifestyle, current body condition, and potential contraindications. Step 2: Body Assessment
Identify suitable treatment areas, document measurements when required, and create a personalized treatment plan. Step 3: Laser-Pad Placement
Position the laser pads securely over the selected treatment areas according to the operating protocol. Step 4: Treatment Configuration
Select the appropriate treatment time and operating settings using the intelligent touchscreen interface. A typical session lasts approximately 20–40 minutes. Step 5: Aftercare Guidance
Remove the applicators, inspect the treated area, and provide suitable hydration, nutrition, activity, and treatment-course guidance. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments The Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine combines a straightforward operating system with flexible applicator placement, making it suitable for a variety of professional body-contouring businesses. Key advantages include: Non-invasive treatment technology Multiple laser pads for flexible positioning Intelligent touchscreen operation Single-area and multi-area treatment capability Approximately 20–40-minute sessions No surgical recovery period 110V and 220V compatibility Professional training and after-sales support CE and ISO certificates Three-year warranty Technical Specifications Treatment experiences and visible outcomes may vary according to the client’s body composition, lifestyle, treatment area, treatment frequency, and adherence to the recommended course. Results should not be presented as guaranteed. What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine Multiple laser-pad body applicators 1 × Compatible power cable 1 × Warranty card Standard accessories required for machine operation Documentation and Training
English user manual Machine setup guidance Operating instructions Laser-pad placement guidance Treatment protocol training Safety and maintenance instructions After-sales technical support Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides professional operating guidance to help owners and treatment providers use the machine confidently and consistently. Training and support cover: Machine installation and initial setup Touchscreen operation Laser-pad positioning Treatment-area selection Session configuration Client assessment procedures Safety and contraindication screening Cleaning and routine maintenance Troubleshooting assistance Treatment-protocol guidance Ongoing after-sales support is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine includes a three-year professional warranty and after-sales technical support. Warranty Coverage
The warranty provides support for eligible machine components and manufacturing-related faults under normal operating conditions. Technical assessment may be required before replacement parts or repair instructions are issued. Warranty support includes: Remote technical diagnosis Operating and troubleshooting assistance Support for eligible replacement parts Repair guidance Maintenance recommendations After-sales communication throughout the warranty period Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty support team with the machine model and order information. Provide a clear description of the issue. Submit photos or a short video when requested. Allow the technical team to diagnose the machine. Follow the provided troubleshooting or repair instructions. Receive eligible replacement-part support when required. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover damage caused by: Incorrect operation Unauthorized modification or repair Accidental impact or physical damage Improper voltage or electrical installation Water damage or unsuitable storage conditions Failure to follow maintenance instructions Normal wear of consumable components Shipping or relocation damage occurring after delivery Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and contraindication screening should be completed before treatment. The machine should be operated only by trained users following the supplied instructions and applicable local requirements. Treatment may be unsuitable for clients with: Pregnancy or breastfeeding Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Serious cardiovascular conditions Active cancer or ongoing cancer treatment Severe liver or kidney conditions Uncontrolled diabetes Blood-clotting disorders Active infection or inflammation Open wounds or damaged skin in the treatment area Recent surgery in the intended treatment area Photosensitivity or use of photosensitizing medication Any medical condition requiring professional clearance Clients with medical concerns should consult a qualified healthcare professional before treatment. Operating Precautions
Complete a client consultation before every initial treatment. Inspect the machine, cables, and laser pads before use. Clean and disinfect applicators according to the manual. Position laser pads securely without excessive pressure. Do not apply pads over open wounds or inflamed skin. Do not exceed the recommended treatment time. Monitor client comfort throughout the session. Stop treatment if the client experiences an unexpected reaction. Keep the machine away from excessive moisture and heat. Use a stable and correctly grounded power supply. Follow the recommended cleaning and maintenance schedule. Keep accurate treatment records when required. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine is suitable for: Body-slimming salons Beauty salons Aesthetic clinics Wellness centers Day spas and medical spas Fitness and body-transformation centers Weight-management businesses Professional body-contouring providers Users must follow the supplied operating instructions, complete appropriate training, and comply with local regulations governing aesthetic equipment. Why Choose the Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine? 1. Professional 650nm Lipo Laser Technology
The system uses 650nm low-level laser therapy to support non-invasive fat-reduction and body-contouring treatments. 2. Multiple Laser-Pad Applicators
Flexible pad placement allows professionals to target different body areas and create customized treatment programs. 3. Non-Invasive Client Experience
Treatments require no surgery, needles, anesthesia, or extended recovery period, making the service convenient for suitable clients. 4. Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating guidance, treatment training, technical assistance, and after-sales support. 5. Three-Year Warranty and Certified Quality
The system includes a three-year professional warranty and is supplied with CE and ISO certificates. Frequently Asked Questions
Q: How does the Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine work?
The system uses 650nm low-level laser energy delivered through body applicators. The treatment supports the release of stored triglycerides from fat cells into free fatty acids and glycerol, which are processed naturally by the body. Q: Is the treatment invasive?
No. Lipo laser is a non-invasive body-contouring treatment that does not require surgery, injections, or anesthesia. Q: Is the treatment painful?
Most clients describe the treatment as comfortable and relaxing. Individual sensitivity can vary, so client comfort should be monitored throughout every session. Q: How long does one session take?
A typical professional session lasts approximately 20–40 minutes, depending on the treatment area and selected protocol. Q: How many sessions are recommended?
A complete course generally includes approximately 8–12 sessions. The final recommendation should be based on the client’s assessment and treatment objectives. Q: When can clients expect visible changes?
Some clients may notice changes after the first few sessions, while more developed results usually require completion of the recommended treatment course. Individual outcomes vary. Q: Which body areas can be treated?
Compatible areas include the abdomen, waist, arms, thighs, hips, back, flanks, and buttocks. Q: Can multiple areas be treated during one session?
The multiple-pad system supports simultaneous placement across compatible treatment zones. Operators must follow the recommended pad arrangement and treatment protocol. Q: Is there any downtime?
Lipo laser treatments generally do not require a surgical recovery period. Suitable clients can normally return to their usual activities after treatment. Q: Can the machine help improve the appearance of cellulite?
The system can be incorporated into professional programs designed to improve body contours and the appearance of uneven skin texture. Q: Does the machine provide skin-tightening benefits?
Treatments can support smoother and firmer-looking skin as part of a structured body-contouring program. Q: Are lipo laser results permanent?
Results depend on the client’s lifestyle, nutrition, physical activity, treatment course, and weight stability. The service should not be marketed as guaranteeing permanent fat loss. Q: What should clients do after treatment?
Clients are generally advised to remain hydrated, maintain balanced nutrition, and follow appropriate activity and aftercare guidance provided by the treatment professional. Q: Is the machine suitable for every client?
No. Every client should complete a consultation and contraindication screening before treatment. Q: Can the machine be used on all skin types?
Low-level laser therapy may be suitable for a broad range of skin types, but individual assessment and contraindication screening remain necessary. Q: Does the machine support 110V and 220V power?
Yes. The supplied specifications include 110V and 220V dual-voltage compatibility. Q: What certificates are included?
The machine is supplied with CE and ISO certificates. Q: Is professional training included?
Yes. Professional setup, operating, treatment-protocol, safety, and maintenance guidance are included. Q: What warranty is provided?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with after-sales technical support. Q: What is included with the machine?
The package includes the main machine, multiple laser-pad applicators, a compatible power cable, a user manual and training guide, a warranty card, and standard operating accessories. Add Professional Lipo Laser Slimming to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine gives salons, spas, wellness centers, and aesthetic clinics a versatile solution for non-invasive fat reduction, body contouring, cellulite care, and skin-quality treatments. Five key benefits: Professional 650nm low-level laser technology Multiple pads for flexible body-area treatment Non-invasive 20–40-minute sessions Intelligent touchscreen operation CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, ordering information, training details, and professional support. Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Setting
Available Configuration
Professional Purpose
Laser Wavelength
650nm red light
Supports professional low-level laser body-contouring treatments
Treatment Time
Adjustable within the recommended 20–40-minute range
Allows sessions to be adapted to the selected area and protocol
Laser Pads
Multiple body applicators
Supports simultaneous treatment of compatible body areas
Treatment Area
Single-area or multi-area positioning
Enables targeted and comprehensive body-contouring programs
Treatment Course
Approximately 8–12 sessions recommended
Supports progressive results through a structured treatment plan
Control Interface
Intelligent touchscreen
Provides convenient treatment selection and operating control
Treatment Application
Primary Area
Professional Objective
Abdominal Slimming
Abdomen
Support localized fat reduction and improved abdominal contour
Waistline Contouring
Waist and flanks
Create a more defined waistline
Arm Slimming
Upper arms
Improve arm shape and reduce the appearance of localized fullness
Thigh Contouring
Inner and outer thighs
Support smoother and more balanced leg contours
Hip Shaping
Hips
Improve overall body proportions
Back Contouring
Upper and lower back
Target localized fat deposits and improve back definition
Buttock Contouring
Buttocks
Refine shape and improve surrounding contours
Cellulite Care
Thighs, hips, and buttocks
Improve the appearance of uneven skin texture
Skin-Firming Support
Multiple body areas
Support smoother and firmer-looking skin
Multi-Area Sculpting
Combined body zones
Deliver a customized body-contouring program
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine
Technology
Low-Level Laser Therapy
Laser Wavelength
650nm red light
Primary Functions
Fat reduction, body slimming, body contouring, cellulite care, and skin-tightening support
Applicators
Multiple laser pads for different body areas
Treatment Areas
Abdomen, waist, arms, thighs, hips, back, flanks, and buttocks
Session Duration
Approximately 20–40 minutes
Recommended Course
Approximately 8–12 sessions
Display and Controls
Intelligent touchscreen interface
Power Supply
110V/220V dual compatibility
Certificates
CE and ISO
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
After-Sales Service
Professional training and technical support
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
From $3,909.02
Professional Four-Handle NEO EMShape Body-Sculpting System
Straight and Curved Electromagnetic Applicators for Muscle Conditioning and Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine is a professional body-sculpting system developed for electromagnetic muscle conditioning, fat-reduction support, and improved definition across multiple body areas.
The system combines EMShape electromagnetic technology with four ergonomic applicators: two straight handles for conventional placement and two curved handles designed for improved contact across contoured anatomical areas.
With approximately 20,000 contractions per session, adjustable treatment settings, a 15-inch intelligent touchscreen, air-and-water cooling, and a professional vertical design, the machine is suitable for body-sculpting clinics, medical spas, slimming centers, fitness facilities, and wellness studios.
EMShape technology | Two straight and two curved handles | Vertical design | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform EMShape Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation
EMShape technology delivers high-intensity electromagnetic energy to targeted muscle groups, producing repeated involuntary contractions throughout the treatment program. Common applications include: Abdominal muscle conditioning Buttock muscle stimulation Thigh muscle conditioning Upper-arm toning Waistline definition Calf muscle stimulation Straight and Curved Applicator Treatment
The system includes two straight and two curved handles for different body shapes and placement requirements. Common benefits include: Conventional straight-handle placement Improved contact on curved body areas Focused muscle stimulation Bilateral treatment capability Multi-area treatment flexibility Customized applicator positioning Multi-Area Body Contouring
Four applicators can be positioned across suitable muscle groups according to the client’s anatomy and treatment objectives. Common applications include: Abdomen and thigh treatments Arms and abdomen Buttocks and thighs Waistline and love-handle areas Bilateral calf treatments Customized multi-area programs Select the Right Program for Each Client Abdominal and Waistline Program
Uses suitable straight or curved applicators to stimulate abdominal muscles and support midsection definition. Recommended applications: Abdominal muscle conditioning Core-area stimulation Waistline sculpting Love-handle-area programs General midsection definition Recommended for: Clients seeking improved abdominal tone Fitness clients wanting additional muscle stimulation Clients following healthy lifestyle programs Buttock and Thigh Program
Positions multiple applicators over suitable buttock and thigh muscle areas for lower-body treatment. Recommended applications: Buttock muscle stimulation Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning Bilateral lower-body treatments Shape-enhancement programs Lower-body definition Recommended for: Clients seeking improved buttock or thigh tone Clients combining treatment with exercise Clients receiving comprehensive lower-body programs Arm and Calf Program
Uses the available applicators for suitable upper-arm and calf muscle-conditioning programs. Recommended applications: Upper-arm muscle stimulation Biceps and triceps conditioning Calf muscle stimulation Bilateral limb treatments Improved-looking muscle definition Recommended for: Clients seeking improved arm or calf tone Fitness and body-contouring clients Clients requiring smaller-area placement Multi-Area Maintenance Program
Provides periodic treatment after completion of the client’s initial NEO EMSlim course. Recommended applications: Muscle-tone maintenance Body-contour maintenance Multi-area conditioning Fitness-program support Seasonal body-sculpting treatments Recommended for: Returning NEO EMSlim clients Clients completing six to eight initial sessions Clients combining treatment with regular exercise Adjustable Energy and Treatment Settings
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine allows practitioners to customize treatments according to applicator type, body area, client tolerance, and professional protocol. Settings should be increased progressively according to client comfort, muscle response, treatment objectives, and the supplied operating protocols. Adjustable Treatment Areas Abdomen and Waistline
Straight or curved handles can be positioned over suitable abdominal and waist muscle groups for focused or combined treatments. Common treatment objectives include: Abdominal muscle activation Core-area conditioning Waistline definition Love-handle-area treatment Multi-zone midsection sculpting Buttocks and Thighs
Curved and straight applicators support customized placement across suitable lower-body areas. Common treatment objectives include: Buttock muscle stimulation Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning Bilateral lower-body treatment Improved-looking definition Lower-body sculpting Arms and Calves
The applicator selection supports suitable upper-arm and lower-leg treatment programs. Common treatment objectives include: Upper-arm muscle stimulation Arm definition Calf muscle conditioning Bilateral limb treatment Customized smaller-area programs Professional Treatment Applications How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, fitness level, target areas, body-sculpting objectives, previous procedures, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment sensation and establish realistic expectations. Step 2: Applicator Selection and Placement
Select straight or curved handles according to the treatment area and client anatomy. Position and secure the applicators over suitable muscle groups. Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Choose the appropriate program and begin with conservative energy settings. Adjust the intensity according to the body area, client comfort, and muscle response. Step 4: EMShape Treatment
The system delivers electromagnetic energy for approximately 20–30 minutes. Monitor the client’s comfort, muscle response, and applicator position throughout the session. Step 5: Treatment Completion
Stop the program, remove the applicators, inspect the treatment areas, document the selected settings, and provide suitable hydration, recovery, or lifestyle recommendations. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine combines EMShape technology with straight and curved applicator options. Key advantages include: Professional EMShape technology Four ergonomic treatment handles Two straight applicators Two curved applicators Approximately 20,000 contractions per session Focused, bilateral, and multi-area configurations Treatments for the abdomen, thighs, arms, buttocks, waistline, and calves Vertical professional design Adjustable energy intensity 15-inch intelligent touchscreen Air-and-water circulation cooling Approximately 20–30-minute sessions Six- to eight-session treatment programs 110V and 220V compatibility CE and ISO certificates Three-year professional warranty Professional training and ongoing support Technical Specifications
Performance figures are supplied product claims and should not be presented as guaranteed outcomes. Individual results vary. What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim main unit 2 × Straight EMShape treatment applicators 2 × Curved EMShape treatment applicators Applicator connection cables Applicator-positioning accessories 15-inch intelligent touchscreen control system Adjustable energy controls Air-and-water circulation cooling system 1 × Region-compatible power cable Standard machine accessories Warranty card Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and operating guide Safety and maintenance instructions Straight-handle placement guidance Curved-handle placement guidance Energy-adjustment guidance Abdominal and waistline protocols Arm-treatment protocols Buttock-treatment protocols Thigh-treatment protocols Calf-treatment protocols Multi-area treatment guidance Client-consultation materials Post-treatment guidance Professional training certificate Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently. Training covers: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen operation Client consultation and screening Treatment-area assessment Straight-handle placement Curved-handle placement Applicator selection by body area Energy-level adjustment Abdominal and waistline protocols Arm-treatment protocols Buttock-treatment protocols Thigh-treatment protocols Calf-treatment protocols Multi-area treatment planning Client monitoring Post-treatment guidance Cooling-system maintenance Basic troubleshooting Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment. Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period. Applicator covers, straps, cables, connectors, cooling-system fluids, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement. Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team. Provide the machine model and order information. Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested. A technician will assess the reported issue remotely. Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged. Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper cooling-system maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual. Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and health-history review should be completed before every treatment. The machine should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals. Treatment may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants within or near the treatment area Serious cardiovascular conditions Cardiac rhythm disorders Epilepsy or seizure disorders Active muscle injury Severe inflammation Open wounds within the treatment area Recent surgery within the treatment area Serious neurological or muscular conditions Reduced or impaired sensation Medical conditions requiring physician supervision Clients with recent surgery should receive appropriate professional or medical clearance before treatment. Do not position applicators over the head, neck, chest, heart, spine, reproductive organs, bones, joints, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual. Operating Precautions
Inspect the machine, applicators, cables, straps, and accessories before use. Check the air-and-water cooling system before operation. Remove metal objects from each treatment area. Select the correct straight or curved applicator. Confirm correct applicator placement before activation. Secure all handles according to the supplied instructions. Begin with conservative energy levels. Increase intensity progressively according to client comfort. Monitor muscle response and client condition throughout treatment. Do not position applicators over prohibited anatomical areas. Record applicator type, treatment area, duration, and energy settings. Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client. Follow the supplied maintenance schedule. Stop treatment if unexpected pain or discomfort occurs. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in: Premium body-sculpting clinics Medical spas Slimming centers Aesthetic salons Fitness facilities Gyms Wellness centers Professional body-contouring studios Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering EMShape or HI-EMT treatments. Why Choose the Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine? Straight and Curved Applicators
Two straight and two curved handles support customized placement across different body shapes and treatment areas. Professional EMShape Technology
The system provides approximately 20,000 electromagnetic muscle contractions during a professional treatment session. Multiple Treatment Areas
One machine supports customized programs for the abdomen, thighs, arms, buttocks, waistline, love handles, and calves. Professional Cooling and Controls
The 15-inch touchscreen and combined air-and-water cooling system support efficient professional operation. Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, straight- and curved-handle guidance, treatment protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine?
It is a professional electromagnetic body-sculpting system with two straight and two curved applicators. What is EMShape technology?
EMShape is the supplied electromagnetic muscle-stimulation technology used by this system to produce repeated involuntary muscle contractions. What is different about the curved handles?
The curved applicators are designed to improve placement and contact across suitable contoured body areas. Correct selection depends on the client’s anatomy and treatment area. Do curved handles guarantee deeper muscle engagement?
No. Treatment depth and response depend on the electromagnetic output, applicator position, client anatomy, settings, and individual response. How many applicators are included?
The package includes four handles: two straight applicators and two curved applicators. Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the abdomen, thighs, arms, buttocks, waistline, love handles, and calves. Can all four handles be used simultaneously?
The four-handle system supports suitable multi-area operation according to the selected protocol and machine configuration. How long does one session take?
A standard treatment takes approximately 20–30 minutes. How many sessions are recommended?
The supplied protocol recommends six to eight sessions, commonly scheduled twice weekly with appropriate recovery time between treatments. What does the treatment feel like?
Clients experience strong, repeated muscle contractions. Energy levels can be increased progressively according to individual comfort and muscle response. Is there downtime?
Clients can generally continue normal daily activities after treatment. Temporary muscle fatigue or soreness similar to that experienced after exercise may occur. Can EMShape replace regular exercise?
EMShape treatments should complement rather than replace regular exercise, balanced nutrition, and healthy lifestyle habits. When may clients notice changes?
Some clients may notice increased muscle activation during the initial sessions. Visible changes vary and may develop progressively during and after the treatment course. What performance figures are supplied?
The supplied information lists muscle-definition improvement of up to 30% and fat reduction of up to 20%. These figures are not guaranteed outcomes. How long can results last?
Results may last six to twelve months with maintenance and healthy lifestyle habits. Individual longevity varies. Are results guaranteed?
No. Results vary according to baseline muscle condition, body composition, applicator selection, treatment consistency, energy settings, diet, exercise, and individual response. What cooling system does the machine use?
The machine uses combined air-and-water circulation cooling to support continuous professional operation. What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates. What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues. Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, straight- and curved-handle placement, energy adjustment, treatment protocols, safety, cooling-system maintenance, and troubleshooting. Add Curved-Handle EMShape Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine enables body-sculpting clinics, medical spas, and wellness professionals to provide customized electromagnetic muscle-conditioning treatments using straight and curved applicators. Five key benefits: Professional EMShape electromagnetic technology Two straight and two curved ergonomic applicators Approximately 20,000 contractions per session A 15-inch touchscreen with air-and-water cooling CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, applicator details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support. Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Setting
Available Configuration
Professional Purpose
Technology
EMShape electromagnetic stimulation
Muscle-conditioning treatments
Treatment Handles
Four
Multi-area treatment capability
Straight Handles
Two
Conventional and precise placement
Curved Handles
Two
Contoured and ergonomic placement
Contractions per Session
Approximately 20,000
Intensive muscle activation
Session Duration
Approximately 20–30 minutes
Efficient treatment scheduling
Treatment Course
Six to eight sessions
Structured body-sculpting program
Energy Intensity
Adjustable
Personalized client comfort
Cooling System
Air and water circulation
Supports continuous operation
Treatment Area
Primary Objective
Recommended Applicator Configuration
Abdomen
Muscle conditioning and midsection definition
Straight or curved handles
Waistline
Contouring and core-area stimulation
Curved-handle placement
Love Handles
Side-body conditioning
Curved-handle placement
Buttocks
Toning and shape-enhancement support
Bilateral curved or straight handles
Inner and Outer Thighs
Lower-body conditioning
Suitable bilateral placement
Upper Arms
Arm muscle stimulation and definition
Straight handles
Calves
Lower-leg muscle conditioning
Suitable straight or curved handles
Multiple Areas
Comprehensive body-sculpting program
Up to four handles
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine
Machine Power
7500W
Magnetic Field Strength
15 Tesla
RF Function
Yes, built-in radiofrequency
Net Weight
Approximately 88 kg
Machine Dimensions
72 × 72 × 120 cm
Display
15-inch intelligent touchscreen
Technology
HI-EMT with EMShape technology
Design
Vertical tower
Treatment Handles
Four ergonomic applicators
Straight Handles
Two
Curved Handles
Two
Contractions per Session
Approximately 20,000
Primary Functions
Muscle conditioning and body contouring
Supplied Performance Figures
Up to 30% increased muscle definition and 20% fat reduction
Treatment Areas
Abdomen, thighs, arms, buttocks, waistline, love handles, and calves
Treatment Configuration
Focused, bilateral, or multi-area
Session Duration
Approximately 20–30 minutes
Recommended Course
Six to eight sessions
Recommended Frequency
Commonly twice weekly
Energy Intensity
Adjustable
Cooling System
Air and water circulation
Power Supply
110V or 220V
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
Support
Professional training and ongoing technical assistance
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
$2,599.00
Professional Four-Handle HIEMT PRO Body-Sculpting System
Dual-Client Electromagnetic Technology for Muscle Conditioning and Multi-Area Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO is a professional body-sculpting system developed for simultaneous muscle conditioning, body contouring, and improved definition across multiple treatment areas.
Advanced High-Intensity Electromagnetic Technology produces approximately 30,000 supramaximal muscle contractions during a 20–30-minute session. Its four-handle configuration supports multi-area treatment for one client or simultaneous treatment for two suitable clients.
With adjustable energy settings, an 8-inch intelligent touchscreen, dual-client operation, and combined air-and-water cooling, the PRO system is designed for premium clinics, medical spas, body-sculpting studios, fitness centers, resort spas, and high-volume wellness facilities.
Advanced HIEMT | Four ergonomic handles | Dual-client operation | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform
High-Intensity Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation
HIEMT technology delivers focused electromagnetic energy to targeted muscle groups, producing powerful involuntary contractions throughout the treatment program.
Common applications include:
-
Abdominal muscle conditioning
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Thigh muscle conditioning
-
Upper-arm toning
-
Waistline definition
-
Professional fitness treatments
Multi-Area Body Contouring
Four applicators can be positioned across suitable muscle groups according to the client’s anatomy, treatment objectives, and selected protocol.
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen and thigh treatments
-
Arms and abdomen treatments
-
Buttocks and thighs
-
Waistline and abdomen
-
Bilateral muscle stimulation
-
Customized four-area programs
Dual-Client Operation
The four-handle configuration can be arranged to treat one client across multiple areas or two suitable clients simultaneously.
Common benefits include:
-
Single-client multi-area treatments
-
Simultaneous dual-client sessions
-
Flexible applicator allocation
-
Improved treatment-room efficiency
-
Customized treatment programs
-
High-volume clinic operation
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Abdominal-Conditioning Program
Uses suitable applicator placement to stimulate the abdominal muscles and support improved midsection definition.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdominal muscle conditioning
-
Core-area stimulation
-
Midsection definition
-
Waistline sculpting
-
General abdominal programs
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved abdominal tone
-
Fitness clients wanting additional muscle stimulation
-
Clients following healthy lifestyle programs
Buttock and Thigh Program
Positions multiple applicators over suitable buttock and thigh muscle areas for bilateral lower-body treatment.
Recommended applications:
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning
-
Bilateral lower-body treatments
-
Shape-enhancement programs
-
Lower-body definition
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved buttock or thigh tone
-
Clients combining treatment with exercise
-
Clients receiving comprehensive lower-body programs
Multi-Area Body Program
Uses all four applicators for one client across multiple suitable treatment areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdomen and thighs
-
Abdomen and arms
-
Buttocks and thighs
-
Waistline and abdomen
-
Customized four-area treatment
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking comprehensive body conditioning
-
Clients with multiple treatment objectives
-
Premium body-sculpting clients
Dual-Client Program
Divides the four applicators between two appropriately screened clients.
Recommended applications:
-
Two-client abdomen programs
-
Simultaneous lower-body treatments
-
Independent client protocols
-
High-volume treatment scheduling
-
Professional dual-client services
Recommended for:
-
Clinics with appropriate staffing
-
High-volume body-sculpting facilities
-
Premium spas and wellness centers
Each client must receive an individual consultation, screening, treatment plan, applicator placement, and continuous professional monitoring.
Adjustable Energy and Treatment Settings
The Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO allows practitioners to customize treatments according to the selected body areas, client tolerance, and professional protocol.
| Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Technology | Advanced HIEMT | Focused electromagnetic muscle stimulation |
| Treatment Handles | Four | Multi-area or dual-client treatments |
| Contractions per Session | Approximately 30,000 | Intensive muscle activation |
| Treatment Capacity | One or two suitable clients | Flexible professional operation |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–30 minutes | Efficient treatment scheduling |
| Treatment Course | Four to six sessions | Structured body-sculpting program |
| Treatment Frequency | Commonly twice weekly | Progressive muscle conditioning |
| Energy Intensity | Adjustable | Personalized client comfort |
| Cooling System | Air and water circulation | Supports continuous operation |
Settings should be increased progressively according to client comfort, muscle response, treatment objectives, and the supplied operating protocols.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Abdomen and Waistline
Multiple handles can be positioned over suitable abdominal and waist muscle groups for focused or combined midsection treatments.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Abdominal muscle activation
-
Core-area conditioning
-
Waistline definition
-
Improved abdominal tone
-
Multi-zone midsection treatment
Buttocks and Thighs
The applicators support balanced lower-body treatments across suitable buttock and thigh muscle groups.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning
-
Bilateral lower-body treatments
-
Improved-looking definition
-
Lower-body sculpting
Arms and Multiple Body Areas
Four handles allow professionals to create customized upper- and lower-body treatment combinations.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Upper-arm muscle stimulation
-
Arm definition
-
Simultaneous arm and abdomen treatment
-
Simultaneous thigh and buttock treatment
-
Customized multi-area programs
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Area | Primary Objective | Recommended Configuration |
|---|---|---|
| Abdomen | Muscle conditioning and midsection definition | Two or more handles |
| Waistline | Contouring and core-area stimulation | Targeted or combined placement |
| Buttocks | Toning and shape-enhancement support | Bilateral handle placement |
| Inner Thighs | Lower-body conditioning | Bilateral treatment |
| Outer Thighs | Thigh definition and muscle stimulation | Bilateral treatment |
| Upper Arms | Arm muscle stimulation and definition | Bilateral treatment |
| Multiple Areas | Comprehensive body-sculpting program | Up to four handles |
| Dual Clients | Simultaneous independent treatment programs | Handles divided between two clients |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review each client’s health history, fitness level, target areas, body-sculpting objectives, previous procedures, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment sensation and establish realistic expectations.
Step 2: Applicator Placement
Select the treatment areas and position the applicators securely over suitable muscle groups. During dual-client operation, each client must receive individually assessed applicator placement.
Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Choose the appropriate treatment program and begin with conservative energy levels. Adjust the settings according to the body area, client comfort, and muscle response.
Step 4: HIEMT Treatment
The system delivers focused electromagnetic energy for approximately 20–30 minutes. Monitor every client’s comfort, muscle response, and applicator position throughout the session.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
Stop the program, remove the applicators, inspect the treatment areas, document the selected settings, and provide suitable hydration, recovery, or lifestyle recommendations.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO combines multi-area and dual-client performance with professional controls and continuous-operation cooling.
Key advantages include:
-
Advanced HIEMT technology
-
Four ergonomic treatment handles
-
Approximately 30,000 contractions per session
-
Single-client multi-area capability
-
Simultaneous dual-client capability
-
Focused and bilateral treatment configurations
-
Treatments for the abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline
-
Adjustable energy intensity
-
8-inch intelligent touchscreen
-
Air-and-water circulation cooling
-
Approximately 20–30-minute sessions
-
Four- to six-session treatment programs
-
110V and 220V compatibility
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year professional warranty
-
Professional training and ongoing support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO |
| Machine Power | 6500W |
| Magnetic Field Strength | 14 Tesla |
| RF Function | Yes, built-in radiofrequency |
| Net Weight | Approximately 57 kg |
| Machine Dimensions | 60 × 40 × 65 cm |
| Display | 8-inch intelligent touchscreen |
| Designation | PRO professional configuration |
| Technology | High-Intensity Electromagnetic Technology |
| Treatment Handles | Four ergonomic applicators |
| Contractions per Session | Approximately 30,000 |
| Treatment Capacity | One client across multiple areas or two suitable clients |
| Supplied Performance Figures | Up to 15–20% muscle growth and 20–25% fat reduction |
| Treatment Areas | Abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline |
| Treatment Configuration | Focused, simultaneous, bilateral, or dual-client |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–30 minutes |
| Recommended Course | Four to six sessions |
| Recommended Frequency | Commonly twice weekly |
| Results Timeline | Supplied estimate: visible changes in 2–4 weeks and progressive changes over 6–12 weeks |
| Energy Intensity | Adjustable |
| Cooling System | Air and water circulation |
| Power Supply | 110V or 220V |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| Support | Professional training and ongoing technical assistance |
Performance figures and timelines are supplied product claims and should not be presented as guaranteed outcomes. Individual results vary.
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO main unit
-
4 × Ergonomic HIEMT treatment applicators
-
Applicator connection cables
-
Applicator-positioning accessories
-
8-inch intelligent touchscreen control system
-
Adjustable energy controls
-
Air-and-water circulation cooling system
-
1 × Region-compatible power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
-
Warranty card
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety and maintenance instructions
-
Applicator-placement guidance
-
Energy-adjustment guidance
-
Single-client multi-area protocols
-
Dual-client treatment guidance
-
Abdominal treatment protocols
-
Arm-treatment protocols
-
Buttock-treatment protocols
-
Thigh-treatment protocols
-
Client-consultation materials
-
Post-treatment guidance
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Treatment-area assessment
-
Correct applicator placement
-
Single-client multi-area operation
-
Dual-client treatment setup
-
Energy-level adjustment
-
Abdominal and waistline protocols
-
Arm-treatment protocols
-
Buttock-treatment protocols
-
Thigh-treatment protocols
-
Multi-client monitoring
-
Post-treatment guidance
-
Cooling-system maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Applicator covers, straps, cables, connectors, cooling-system fluids, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper cooling-system maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and health-history review must be completed for every client before treatment. The system should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants within or near the treatment area
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Cardiac rhythm disorders
-
Epilepsy or seizure disorders
-
Active muscle injury
-
Severe inflammation
-
Open wounds within the treatment area
-
Recent surgery within the treatment area
-
Serious neurological or muscular conditions
-
Reduced or impaired sensation
-
Medical conditions requiring physician supervision
Clients with recent surgery should receive appropriate professional or medical clearance before treatment.
Do not position applicators over the head, neck, chest, heart, spine, reproductive organs, bones, joints, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual.
Operating Precautions
-
Inspect the machine, applicators, cables, straps, and accessories before use.
-
Check the air-and-water cooling system before operation.
-
Complete separate screening for every client.
-
Remove metal objects from each treatment area.
-
Confirm correct applicator placement before activation.
-
Secure all handles according to the supplied instructions.
-
Begin with conservative energy levels.
-
Increase intensity progressively according to client comfort.
-
Continuously monitor every client during dual-client operation.
-
Do not position applicators over prohibited anatomical areas.
-
Record treatment areas, duration, and energy settings.
-
Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client.
-
Follow the supplied maintenance schedule.
-
Stop treatment if unexpected pain or discomfort occurs.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in:
-
Premium body-sculpting clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Luxury wellness facilities
-
Resort spas
-
Aesthetic salons
-
Fitness centers
-
Slimming centers
-
High-volume treatment facilities
Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, staffing, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering HIEMT or dual-client treatments.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO?
Advanced HIEMT Technology
The system provides approximately 30,000 electromagnetic muscle contractions during a professional treatment session.
Four Ergonomic Applicators
Four handles support focused, bilateral, multi-area, and suitable dual-client treatment programs.
Flexible Dual-Client Operation
The applicators can be divided between two appropriately screened clients, providing additional scheduling flexibility for high-volume facilities.
Professional Cooling and Controls
The 8-inch touchscreen and combined air-and-water cooling system support efficient professional operation.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes machine training, dual-client guidance, applicator-placement protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO?
It is a professional HIEMT body-sculpting system developed for electromagnetic muscle stimulation, multi-area body conditioning, and suitable dual-client operation.
What does the PRO designation mean?
PRO identifies this product as the supplied advanced four-handle configuration with approximately 30,000 contractions, an 8-inch touchscreen, dual-client capability, and air-and-water cooling.
How many applicators are included?
The package includes four ergonomic HIEMT treatment handles.
Can all four handles be used on one client?
Yes. All four handles can be positioned across suitable treatment areas according to the client’s individual treatment plan.
Can two clients be treated simultaneously?
Yes. The four handles can be divided between two suitable clients. Each client requires individual screening, settings, applicator placement, documentation, and continuous monitoring.
Which areas can be treated?
Common treatment areas include the abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline.
How long does one session take?
A standard session takes approximately 20–30 minutes.
How many sessions are recommended?
The supplied protocol recommends four to six sessions, commonly scheduled twice weekly with appropriate recovery time between treatments.
What does the treatment feel like?
Clients experience strong, repeated muscle contractions. Energy levels can be increased progressively according to individual comfort and muscle response.
Is there downtime?
Clients can generally continue normal daily activities after treatment. Temporary muscle fatigue or soreness similar to that experienced after exercise may occur.
Can HIEMT replace regular exercise?
HIEMT treatments should complement rather than replace regular exercise, balanced nutrition, and healthy lifestyle habits.
When may clients notice changes?
The supplied information indicates that visible changes may begin within two to four weeks and continue developing over six to twelve weeks. Individual results vary.
What performance figures are supplied?
The supplied product information lists potential muscle-growth figures of 15–20% and fat-reduction figures of 20–25%. These figures are not guaranteed outcomes.
How long can results last?
The supplied information indicates a possible duration of six to twelve months with maintenance and healthy lifestyle habits. Individual longevity varies.
Are results guaranteed?
No. Results vary according to baseline muscle condition, body composition, treatment consistency, energy settings, diet, exercise, and individual response.
What cooling system does the machine use?
The system uses combined air-and-water circulation cooling to support continuous professional operation.
What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, multi-handle placement, dual-client protocols, energy adjustment, safety, cooling-system maintenance, and troubleshooting.
Add Advanced Dual-Client HIEMT Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO enables premium clinics, resort spas, wellness centers, and body-sculpting professionals to provide multi-area or simultaneous dual-client muscle-conditioning treatments.
Five key benefits:
-
Advanced HIEMT with approximately 30,000 contractions per session
-
Four ergonomic handles for multi-area treatment
-
Flexible single-client or dual-client operation
-
An 8-inch touchscreen with air-and-water cooling
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, package details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model.
Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
Professional Portable 7D HIFU System
Dual-Handle Technology for Facial Lifting and Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine is a professional dual-handle system designed for non-surgical facial treatments, skin firming and body-contouring applications.
A dedicated Face Handle and Body Handle provide seven cartridge depths ranging from 1.5 mm to 13 mm. This allows trained operators to select an appropriate treatment depth for the face, neck or larger body areas.
Its 15-inch touchscreen, universal voltage and portable desktop design make the system suitable for beauty salons, med spas, aesthetic clinics and qualified independent practitioners.
Two dedicated handles | Seven cartridge depths | 15-inch touchscreen | Three-year warranty
One Portable System for Face and Body Treatments Face Handle
The Face Handle is supplied with four treatment depths for professional facial and neck applications: 1.5 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm 4.5 mm The available cartridges allow trained operators to develop treatment protocols for different facial areas and tissue depths. Common applications include: Facial skin firming Jawline definition Neck treatments Brow-area lifting Improvement in the appearance of fine lines Facial contour refinement Body Handle
The Body Handle uses deeper cartridges for professional body-contouring and skin-firming applications: 6.0 mm 9.0 mm 13.0 mm These depths are intended for larger treatment areas such as: Abdomen Waist and flanks Upper and lower back Upper arms Thighs Hips Buttocks Cartridge selection and energy parameters must be determined by a trained operator after completing a client consultation. Dedicated 5.5 MHz Eye-Area Cartridge
The 2.0 mm cartridge operates at 5.5 MHz and is designed for precise treatments around appropriate areas near the eyes. It may be incorporated into professional protocols focused on: Appearance of crow’s feet Fine lines around the eye area Localized skin firming Delicate facial areas requiring precise energy placement Treatments near the eyes require advanced knowledge of facial anatomy, correct cartridge positioning and strict adherence to the manufacturer’s safety instructions. The cartridge must never be applied directly over the eye, eyelid or any area prohibited by the operating manual. Seven Treatment Depths for Greater Flexibility The table provides general positioning information only. Treatment depth must be selected according to the client’s anatomy, tissue thickness, treatment area and professional protocol. How 7D HIFU Technology Works
The system delivers focused ultrasound energy at a selected treatment depth without creating a surgical incision. When applied correctly, controlled energy is directed below the skin’s surface to support the body’s natural tissue-remodeling response. Professional HIFU treatments are commonly incorporated into aesthetic programs focused on skin firming, lifting and contour refinement. The dual-handle design separates facial and body applications, helping operators select the correct handpiece and cartridge for each treatment area. Individual responses and outcomes vary. Results depend on factors such as age, skin condition, tissue thickness, treatment settings and the protocol used. Professional Treatment Applications
Treatment suitability should be confirmed through a complete consultation and contraindication assessment. Build a Complete Face and Body Service Menu
Facial HIFU Treatments
Use the 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges to develop professional facial treatment protocols at different depths. Precision Eye-Area Treatments
The specialized 2.0 mm, 5.5 MHz cartridge provides an additional service option for suitable areas around the eyes. Jawline and Neck Contouring
Selectable facial cartridge depths support structured treatments for the lower face, jawline and neck. Body-Contouring Treatments
The 6.0 mm, 9.0 mm and 13.0 mm body cartridges allow operators to work with different body areas and tissue depths. Combination Treatment Plans
Qualified professionals may incorporate face and body services into structured treatment plans. Each area must be assessed and treated according to its individual requirements. Portable Design for Flexible Treatment Spaces
At approximately 17 kg net weight, the system provides the functionality of a dual-handle face and body platform in a portable desktop format. This makes it suitable for: Clinics with limited treatment-room space Beauty salons offering multiple services Practitioners working across different rooms Med spas seeking a compact HIFU system Qualified mobile practitioners with appropriate transport procedures Portable does not mean handheld or suitable for casual transportation. The machine should be moved, packed and installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Professional Operating Controls
The machine provides a large touchscreen interface and adjustable treatment parameters for controlled professional operation. Key operating features include: 15-inch color touchscreen Dedicated Face and Body Handles Continuous and single-shot modes Adjustable energy output Adjustable dot spacing Seven treatment depths Cartridge capacity of 10,000–20,000 shots Universal AC 100–240 V input 200 W rated power All parameters should be selected according to the treatment area, cartridge depth, client condition and recommended professional protocol. How a Professional Treatment Session Works 1. Consultation and Assessment
The operator reviews the client’s treatment goals, medical history, skin condition, tissue thickness and contraindications. 2. Handle and Cartridge Selection
The Face or Body Handle is selected, followed by the cartridge depth appropriate for the treatment area. 3. Skin Preparation
The treatment area is cleansed, marked where required and prepared using the recommended coupling medium. 4. Parameter Selection
The operator selects the energy, dot spacing and single-shot or continuous mode according to the approved protocol. 5. Controlled Energy Delivery
The treatment is performed using correct positioning and technique. Client comfort and skin response should be monitored throughout the session. 6. Post-Treatment Care
The treatment area is cleaned and the client receives appropriate aftercare guidance. Temporary redness, sensitivity, swelling, tenderness or tingling may occur. Recovery experience varies according to the area treated, energy settings and individual response. Technical Specifications
Specifications may be updated or vary according to the production configuration. Request the current technical datasheet before ordering. What Is Included? Main Equipment
One portable 7D HIFU touchscreen console One Face Handle One Body Handle Power cable suitable for the selected market Face Cartridges
One 1.5 mm cartridge One 2.0 mm, 5.5 MHz cartridge One 3.0 mm cartridge One 4.5 mm cartridge Body Cartridges
One 6.0 mm cartridge One 9.0 mm cartridge One 13.0 mm cartridge Documentation and Support
English user manual Setup guidance Treatment-protocol guidance Cleaning and maintenance instructions Basic troubleshooting assistance Final package contents and cartridge shot capacity should be confirmed on the quotation before payment. Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote guidance to help buyers understand: Equipment installation Touchscreen navigation Handle and cartridge installation Cartridge-depth selection Basic parameter adjustment Facial and body treatment protocols Eye-area safety considerations Cleaning and routine maintenance Basic troubleshooting Training materials support equipment familiarization but do not replace any professional qualification, anatomy training or license required in the operator’s jurisdiction. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine is supported by a three-year limited warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty conditions, coverage may include eligible manufacturing defects involving: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Touchscreen and control system Original Face and Body Handles Handle connectors Other eligible original machine components Cartridges are limited-use components and may have separate warranty or replacement conditions. Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with: Remote technical assessment Guided diagnostic testing Identification of the affected component Confirmation of warranty eligibility Replacement-part assistance where applicable Remote installation guidance Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Misuse or incorrect operation Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or transportation Normal cartridge depletion Damage caused by dropping a handle Blocked, damaged or incorrectly installed cartridges Failure to follow the operating manual Order information, the machine serial number, photographs and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting warranty service. All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional aesthetic equipment and must only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be performed before every treatment. HIFU treatment may not be appropriate for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Implanted electronic devices Metallic implants in or near the treatment area Active cancer Serious cardiovascular conditions Blood-clotting disorders Uncontrolled medical conditions Active infections or inflammation Open wounds in the treatment area Severe skin disorders Conditions affecting normal healing Recent surgery or injectable treatment in the area Other contraindications identified in the operating manual Energy must not be applied over the eyes, thyroid, major nerves, blood vessels, bones or other prohibited anatomical structures. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the supplied manual, professional training requirements and applicable local regulations. Medical guidance should be obtained whenever treatment suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
The portable 7D HIFU system is suitable for: Beauty salons Aesthetic clinics Medical spas Skin-rejuvenation studios Body-contouring centers Qualified independent practitioners Appropriately equipped mobile aesthetic professionals The machine is not designed for casual or unsupervised home use. Why Choose the Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine?
Dedicated Face and Body Handles
Separate handles help operators select the correct equipment for facial and deeper body applications. Seven Cartridge Depths
A complete 1.5–13 mm cartridge range supports multiple face, neck and body treatment areas. Specialized Eye-Area Option
The 2.0 mm, 5.5 MHz cartridge provides an additional precision option for appropriately selected areas around the eyes. High Cartridge Capacity
Cartridges are rated for approximately 10,000–20,000 shots, depending on the cartridge and production configuration. Portable Professional Design
The 17 kg desktop format can be repositioned more easily than a large floor-standing system. Long-Term Equipment Support
Remote training, technical assistance and a three-year limited warranty are included. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the difference between the Face Handle and Body Handle?
The Face Handle uses 1.5 mm, 2.0 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges for facial and neck applications. The Body Handle uses deeper 6.0 mm, 9.0 mm and 13.0 mm cartridges for professional body-contouring treatments. What is special about the 2.0 mm cartridge?
The 2.0 mm cartridge operates at 5.5 MHz and is intended for precise treatment of suitable areas around the eyes. It must only be used by a trained operator with appropriate knowledge of facial anatomy. How many shots does each cartridge provide?
The supplied specifications indicate approximately 10,000–20,000 shots per cartridge. Confirm the capacity of each cartridge before ordering. Is treatment painful?
Client experience varies according to the treatment area, energy setting and individual sensitivity. Clients may experience warmth, tingling or temporary discomfort. Treatment should not be described as completely painless. Is there any downtime?
Recovery experience varies. Some clients may resume normal activities shortly after treatment, while temporary redness, swelling, tenderness or sensitivity may occur. When can clients expect results?
Some clients may notice early changes, while tissue-remodeling responses can continue over the following weeks or months. Results and timelines cannot be guaranteed. Is this machine suitable for mobile practitioners?
Its portable design may suit qualified mobile professionals. Safe transportation, stable installation, hygiene control, insurance and compliance with local regulations remain essential. Does the machine work with international power supplies?
The system is specified for AC 100–240 V, 50/60 Hz. The correct regional plug and electrical configuration should be confirmed before ordering. Is training included?
Remote setup and operating guidance are included. Operators must still meet all professional qualification and licensing requirements applicable in their market. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects in approved machine components. Cartridges, normal wear, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the machine include CE and RoHS documentation?
Yes. The Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine comes with CE and RoHS certificates. Expand Your Services with Portable Face and Body HIFU
The Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine combines two dedicated handles and seven treatment depths within one compact professional platform. Use it to develop treatment services for: Facial lifting and firming Precision eye-area treatments Jawline and neck contouring Professional body contouring Contact Wikbeauty for current pricing, the complete technical datasheet, cartridge information and purchasing guidance. Request Pricing and Product Consultation Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Cartridge depth
Handle
Intended area
1.5 mm
Face Handle
Superficial facial applications
2.0 mm
Face Handle
Precision and eye-area protocols
3.0 mm
Face Handle
Facial and neck treatments
4.5 mm
Face Handle
Deeper facial and jawline protocols
6.0 mm
Body Handle
Shallow body-treatment areas
9.0 mm
Body Handle
Medium-depth body applications
13.0 mm
Body Handle
Deeper body-contouring protocols
Treatment category
Common areas
Intended aesthetic application
Facial rejuvenation
Forehead, cheeks and lower face
Skin firming and contour refinement
Eye-area treatments
Suitable areas around the eyes
Fine-line appearance and localized firming
Jawline contouring
Lower face and jawline
Definition and tightening
Neck treatments
Neck and submental area
Firming and contour refinement
Body contouring
Abdomen, waist and back
Non-invasive contouring programs
Body firming
Arms, thighs, hips and buttocks
Skin-firming treatments
Specification
Details
Product type
Professional portable 7D HIFU machine
Technology
Focused ultrasound for face and body applications
Treatment handles
One Face Handle and one Body Handle
Total cartridges
Seven
Face cartridges
1.5 mm, 2.0 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm
Eye-area cartridge
2.0 mm depth at 5.5 MHz
Body cartridges
6.0 mm, 9.0 mm and 13.0 mm
Standard frequencies
4 MHz and 7 MHz
Adjustable energy
1.0–3.0 J maximum
Cartridge capacity
Approximately 10,000–20,000 shots
Dot spacing
1–2 mm, adjustable in 0.1 mm increments
Operating modes
Continuous and single-shot
Display
15-inch touchscreen
Rated power
200 W
Input voltage
AC 100–240 V, 50/60 Hz
Net weight
Approximately 17 kg
Packaged weight
Approximately 20 kg
Package dimensions
58 × 36 × 52 cm
Warranty
Three-year limited warranty
Declared compliance
CE and RoHS documentation available according to the ordered model
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
Professional 3-in-1 7D, 8D and Thermal Shaping System
Three Dedicated Handles for Facial Lifting and Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty 7D, 8D and Thermal Shaping 3-in-1 Machine combines three professional treatment handles within one floor-standing touchscreen system.
The 7D and 8D handles provide focused ultrasound options for facial lifting, skin firming and contour refinement. The Thermal Shaping handle adds deeper body-contouring applications for areas such as the abdomen, waist, arms and thighs.
With seven included cartridges across five distinct treatment depths, the system gives trained operators the flexibility to develop professional face and body treatment protocols from one platform.
Three dedicated handles | Seven cartridges | Face and body applications | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Technologies in One System 7D HIFU Handle
The 7D handle is supplied with three cartridge depths for professional facial and neck treatments: 1.5 mm 3.0 mm 4.5 mm These cartridges allow trained operators to select an appropriate treatment depth for different facial areas and tissue layers. Common applications include: Facial skin firming Improvement in the appearance of fine lines Brow-area lifting Cheek contouring Jawline definition Neck treatments 8D HIFU Handle
The 8D handle includes 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges for focused facial lifting and contour-refinement protocols. It can be incorporated into treatments focused on: Lower-face firming Cheek lifting Jawline contouring Neck tightening Deeper facial treatment protocols The 7D and 8D handles provide different delivery formats. The appropriate handle should be selected according to the treatment area, client condition and professional protocol. Thermal Shaping Handle
The Thermal Shaping handle extends the system’s applications from facial treatments to professional body contouring. It includes: 0.8 mm cartridge 13 mm cartridge The deeper cartridge is designed for body areas with suitable subcutaneous tissue, while the shallower cartridge supports more targeted treatment protocols. Common treatment areas include: Abdomen Waist and flanks Upper and lower back Upper arms Thighs Hips Buttocks Seven Cartridges Across Five Treatment Depths
The system includes seven cartridges in total. Some depths appear on both the 7D and 8D handles. The five distinct depths are: 0.8 mm · 1.5 mm · 3.0 mm · 4.5 mm · 13 mm Cartridge selection must be based on client anatomy, tissue thickness, treatment area and professional training. How the System Works
The machine delivers controlled focused energy through the selected handle and cartridge. For facial applications, the 7D and 8D handles direct energy to a defined depth below the skin’s surface. When used correctly, this controlled energy supports the body’s natural tissue-remodeling and collagen-response processes. For body applications, the Thermal Shaping handle provides deeper treatment options for appropriately selected areas with localized tissue concerns. The touchscreen interface allows the operator to select the applicable handle, cartridge and treatment parameters. Individual outcomes vary according to age, skin condition, tissue thickness, treatment settings and biological response. Professional Face and Body Applications Treatment suitability should be confirmed through a complete consultation and contraindication assessment. Build a Focused Treatment Menu Facial Firming Treatments
Use the 7D handle with 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges to develop professional facial protocols at multiple depths. Focused Lifting Treatments
The 8D handle provides an additional treatment format for the cheeks, jawline, lower face and neck. Jawline and Neck Contouring
Both facial handles can support structured protocols for clients concerned with lower-face definition and skin laxity. Professional Body Contouring
The Thermal Shaping handle expands the service menu to include suitable areas of the abdomen, waist, back, arms and thighs. Combination Treatment Planning
Qualified operators may build structured treatment plans using different handles. Each area must be assessed independently, and the technologies should only be combined when appropriate. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The black-and-white floor-standing console combines three treatment technologies in one organized system. Key design features include: Integrated touchscreen control Three dedicated treatment handles Side-mounted handle storage Seven included cartridges Facial and body treatment capabilities 110 V and 230 V power options Stable floor-standing construction Centralized operation from one console At 47 kg, the machine is intended to remain stable during daily professional use while still allowing planned repositioning within a treatment environment. How a Professional Treatment Session Works 1. Consultation and Assessment
The operator reviews the client’s treatment goals, medical history, skin condition, tissue thickness and contraindications. 2. Handle Selection
The 7D, 8D or Thermal Shaping handle is selected according to whether the treatment is focused on facial lifting, skin firming or body contouring. 3. Cartridge Selection
The appropriate cartridge depth is selected according to the treatment area and client anatomy. 4. Treatment Preparation
The treatment area is cleansed and marked where necessary. Conductive gel or the recommended coupling medium is applied according to the operating instructions. 5. Parameter Selection
The operator adjusts the available settings according to the selected handle, cartridge, treatment area and client tolerance. 6. Controlled Treatment
Energy is delivered using the recommended positioning and technique. The operator monitors the client’s comfort and tissue response throughout the session. 7. Post-Treatment Care
The treatment area is cleaned and the client receives suitable aftercare guidance. Temporary redness, swelling, tenderness, tingling or sensitivity may occur. Recovery experience varies by technology, treatment intensity and individual response. Technical Specifications
Specifications may be updated according to the final production configuration. What Is Included? Main Equipment
One 3-in-1 floor-standing touchscreen console One 7D HIFU handle One 8D HIFU handle One Thermal Shaping handle Power cable suitable for the selected voltage Starter conductive gel, where applicable 7D HIFU Cartridges
One 1.5 mm cartridge One 3.0 mm cartridge One 4.5 mm cartridge 8D HIFU Cartridges
One 3.0 mm cartridge One 4.5 mm cartridge Thermal Shaping Cartridges
One 0.8 mm cartridge One 13 mm cartridge Documentation and Certification
English user manual CE certificate RoHS certificate Setup guidance Treatment-protocol guidance Cleaning and maintenance instructions Basic troubleshooting assistance Final package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation. CE and RoHS Certified
The Wikbeauty 7D, 8D and Thermal Shaping 3-in-1 Machine comes with: CE Certificate RoHS Certificate These certificates are included with the machine and support its professional positioning and international distribution. Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote guidance covering: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen operation Handle installation Cartridge installation and selection Basic treatment-parameter adjustment Facial treatment protocols Body-contouring protocols Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic troubleshooting Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty 3-in-1 HIFU and Thermal Shaping Machine is supported by a three-year limited warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty conditions, eligible manufacturing defects may be covered for: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Touchscreen and control system Original 7D HIFU handle Original 8D HIFU handle Original Thermal Shaping handle Handle connectors Other eligible original machine components Cartridges and other limited-use or consumable components may have separate warranty conditions. Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with: Remote technical assessment Guided diagnostic testing Identification of the affected component Confirmation of warranty eligibility Replacement-part assistance where applicable Remote installation guidance Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Incorrect operation or misuse Unauthorized repair or modification Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning or storage Damage caused by dropping a handle Normal cartridge depletion Incorrect cartridge installation Unauthorized transportation damage Failure to follow the operating manual The order number, machine serial number, photographs and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting warranty support. All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional aesthetic equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be performed before every treatment. Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Implanted electronic devices Metallic implants in or near the treatment area Active cancer Serious cardiovascular conditions Blood-clotting disorders Uncontrolled medical conditions Active infection or inflammation Open wounds in the treatment area Severe skin conditions Conditions affecting normal healing Recent surgery in the proposed treatment area Recent injectable treatments in the area Other contraindications listed in the operating manual Energy must not be applied over the eyes, thyroid, major nerves, large blood vessels, bones or other prohibited anatomical structures. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the supplied manual, professional training requirements and applicable local regulations. Medical guidance should be obtained whenever treatment suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
This 3-in-1 system is suitable for: Beauty salons Aesthetic clinics Medical spas Facial-rejuvenation studios Body-contouring centers Qualified independent practitioners Businesses expanding their face and body services The machine is not designed for casual or unsupervised home use. Why Choose This 3-in-1 System?
Three Dedicated Treatment Handles
The 7D, 8D and Thermal Shaping technologies each have a dedicated handle for their intended applications. Complete Face and Body Coverage
Offer professional facial lifting, skin firming and body-contouring services from one platform. Multiple Treatment Depths
Seven included cartridges provide five distinct depths ranging from 0.8 mm to 13 mm. Efficient Use of Treatment-Room Space
A single console replaces the need for separate facial HIFU and body-contouring control units. Professional Certifications
The machine comes with CE and RoHS certificates. Long-Term Equipment Support
Remote training, technical assistance and a three-year limited warranty are included. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the difference between the 7D and 8D handles?
The 7D handle includes 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges. The 8D handle includes 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges and provides an additional delivery format for focused lifting protocols. The appropriate handle should be selected according to the treatment area and professional protocol rather than describing one handle simply as stronger than the other. What is the Thermal Shaping handle used for?
The Thermal Shaping handle includes 0.8 mm and 13 mm cartridges for professional body-contouring and firming treatments on appropriately selected areas. How many cartridges are included?
Seven cartridges are included across the three handles. Because the 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm depths are included with both facial handles, the system has five distinct depth options. Is treatment painful?
Client experience varies according to the handle, cartridge, energy level and individual sensitivity. Warmth, tingling, tenderness or temporary discomfort may occur. Is there any downtime?
Recovery experience varies. Some clients may resume normal activities shortly after treatment, while temporary redness, swelling, tenderness or sensitivity may occur. How many treatments will a client need?
Treatment frequency depends on the technology, treatment area, client condition and professional protocol. A fixed number of sessions or guaranteed outcome should not be promised. What are the dimensions and weight?
The machine measures approximately 110 × 67 × 76 cm and has a net weight of approximately 47 kg. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components. Cartridges, normal wear, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the machine come with CE and RoHS certificates?
Yes. The Wikbeauty 3-in-1 Machine comes with CE and RoHS certificates. Expand Your Face and Body Treatment Services
The Wikbeauty 7D, 8D and Thermal Shaping 3-in-1 Machine combines three dedicated technologies within one professional platform: 7D HIFU for facial firming 8D HIFU for focused lifting protocols Thermal Shaping for body contouring Choose the appropriate voltage and contact Wikbeauty for current pricing, purchasing assistance and delivery information. Request Pricing and Product Consultation Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Handle
Included cartridges
Intended application
7D HIFU
1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm
Facial lifting and skin firming
8D HIFU
3.0 mm and 4.5 mm
Focused facial and neck treatments
Thermal Shaping
0.8 mm and 13 mm
Targeted and deeper body-contouring protocols
Treatment category
Applicable handle
Common treatment areas
Facial skin firming
7D HIFU
Forehead, cheeks and lower face
Focused facial lifting
8D HIFU
Cheeks, jawline and neck
Fine-line treatments
7D HIFU
Suitable facial areas
Jawline contouring
7D or 8D HIFU
Lower face and jawline
Neck firming
7D or 8D HIFU
Neck and submental area
Body contouring
Thermal Shaping
Abdomen, waist and back
Body firming
Thermal Shaping
Arms, thighs, hips and buttocks
Specification
Details
Product type
Professional 3-in-1 HIFU and Thermal Shaping system
Included technologies
7D HIFU, 8D HIFU and Thermal Shaping
Machine design
Black-and-white floor-standing console
Control interface
Touchscreen
Treatment handles
Three dedicated handles
7D cartridges
1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm
8D cartridges
3.0 mm and 4.5 mm
Thermal Shaping cartridges
0.8 mm and 13 mm
Total included cartridges
Seven
Distinct treatment depths
Five
Machine dimensions
110 × 67 × 76 cm
Net weight
Approximately 47 kg
Power options
110 V or 230 V
Certifications
CE and RoHS certified
Warranty
Three-year limited warranty
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
Professional Standing SMAS HIFU System
Blade Tip and Cannon Head Technology for Face and Body Treatments
The Wikbeauty Standing SMAS HIFU Machine is a professional face and body treatment platform combining two Blade Tip handles with one Cannon Head handle.
Seven Blade Tip cartridge depths, ranging from 1.5 mm to 13 mm, support facial skin firming, SMAS-focused lifting and deeper body-contouring protocols. The Cannon Head handle provides precise fixed-point energy delivery through 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges.
Its freestanding trolley design keeps the machine, handles and cables organized while allowing convenient movement within the treatment environment.
Three treatment handles | 1.5–13 mm depth range | Face and body applications | Three-year warranty
Two Complementary HIFU Handle Systems Blade Tip Handles
The machine includes two Blade Tip handles for professional face and body HIFU treatments. Available cartridge depths include: 1.5 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm 4.5 mm 6.0 mm 9.0 mm 13.0 mm The broad depth range allows trained operators to select an appropriate cartridge for facial, neck or body applications. Shallower cartridges support facial skin-firming protocols, while the deeper 6.0 mm, 9.0 mm and 13.0 mm cartridges are designed for appropriately selected body areas. Cannon Head Handle
The Cannon Head handle provides fixed-point focused ultrasound delivery for more targeted facial treatments. It includes: 1.5 mm cartridge 3.0 mm cartridge 4.5 mm cartridge This handle is designed for controlled work on suitable areas of the face, jawline and neck where precise energy placement is required. Seven Depth Options from 1.5 mm to 13 mm
Different facial and body areas require different treatment depths. This table provides general application guidance. Cartridge depth must be selected according to client anatomy, tissue thickness, treatment area and professional training. How SMAS HIFU Technology Works
HIFU stands for High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound. The system delivers controlled ultrasound energy to a selected depth below the skin’s surface without creating a surgical incision. When correctly applied, the energy produces focused thermal points within the targeted tissue. This controlled response supports the body’s natural collagen-remodeling process and may be incorporated into professional treatments focused on lifting, firming and contour refinement. HIFU is an ultrasound-based technology and should not be described as a laser treatment. Individual results vary according to age, skin condition, tissue thickness, treatment parameters and biological response. Professional Face and Body Applications
A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be performed before treatment. Precision Face and Body Treatment Planning Facial Skin Firming
The 1.5 mm, 2.0 mm and 3.0 mm cartridges support professional protocols for suitable superficial and mid-depth facial areas. SMAS-Focused Lifting
The 4.5 mm cartridge is commonly incorporated into professional lifting protocols for appropriately selected areas of the lower face and neck. Fixed-Point Facial Treatments
The Cannon Head handle provides controlled energy placement for detailed facial work using 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges. Professional Body Contouring
The deeper 6.0 mm, 9.0 mm and 13.0 mm Blade Tip cartridges extend treatment possibilities to suitable areas of the abdomen, waist, arms and thighs. Structured Treatment Programs
Qualified operators may create individual face or body treatment plans using the appropriate handle and cartridge. Each area must be assessed separately. Freestanding Trolley Design
The integrated trolley configuration is designed for organized daily operation in a professional treatment environment. Key design advantages include: Stable floor-standing construction Integrated rolling base Three dedicated handle positions Organized cable management Central digital control interface Convenient repositioning between treatment rooms Professional black-and-white appearance Compact all-in-one equipment arrangement The machine weighs approximately 50 kg and should be moved carefully on level indoor surfaces. How a Professional Treatment Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s concerns, treatment goals, medical history, skin condition and contraindications. 2. Treatment Planning
The operator selects the Blade Tip or Cannon Head handle and chooses a suitable cartridge depth according to the treatment area. 3. Skin Preparation
The skin is cleansed and marked where required. Conductive gel or the recommended ultrasound coupling medium is applied. 4. Parameter Selection
The machine settings are adjusted according to the cartridge depth, treatment area, client condition and recommended protocol. 5. Controlled Energy Delivery
The selected handle is positioned correctly and focused ultrasound energy is delivered using the approved technique. 6. Client Monitoring
The operator monitors client comfort and tissue response throughout the session. Energy settings should be adjusted when necessary. 7. Post-Treatment Care
The treatment area is cleaned and the client receives appropriate aftercare guidance. Temporary redness, swelling, sensitivity, tenderness, tingling or numbness may occur. Recovery experience varies between clients. Technical Specifications
Electrical specifications should be confirmed according to the voltage selected for the final order. What Is Included? Main Equipment
One standing SMAS HIFU trolley unit Two Blade Tip handles One Cannon Head handle Power cable suitable for the selected market Starter conductive gel Blade Tip Cartridges
1.5 mm cartridge 2.0 mm cartridge 3.0 mm cartridge 4.5 mm cartridge 6.0 mm cartridge 9.0 mm cartridge 13.0 mm cartridge Cannon Head Cartridges
1.5 mm cartridge 3.0 mm cartridge 4.5 mm cartridge Documentation and Certification
English user manual CE certificate RoHS certificate Installation guidance Treatment-protocol guidance Cleaning and maintenance instructions Basic troubleshooting assistance Final cartridge quantities and package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation. CE and RoHS Certified
The Wikbeauty Standing SMAS HIFU Machine comes with: CE Certificate RoHS Certificate These certificates are included with the machine and support its professional positioning and international distribution. Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote training and operating guidance covering: Machine installation and setup Control-interface operation Blade Tip handle operation Cannon Head handle operation Cartridge installation and selection Basic parameter adjustment Facial and body treatment protocols Cleaning and routine maintenance HIFU safety procedures Basic troubleshooting Training materials support equipment familiarization but do not replace professional anatomy training, qualifications or licenses required in the operator’s jurisdiction. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Standing SMAS HIFU Machine is supported by a three-year limited warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty conditions, eligible manufacturing defects may be covered for: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Digital control system Original Blade Tip handles Original Cannon Head handle Handle connectors Other eligible original machine components Cartridges and other limited-use components may have separate warranty conditions. Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with: Remote technical assessment Guided diagnostic testing Identification of the affected component Confirmation of warranty eligibility Replacement-part assistance where applicable Remote installation guidance Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Incorrect operation or misuse Unauthorized repair or modification Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning or storage Damage caused by dropping a handle Normal cartridge depletion Incorrect cartridge installation Unauthorized transportation damage Failure to follow the operating manual The order number, serial number, photographs and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting warranty service. All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional aesthetic equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be completed before every treatment. HIFU treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Implanted electronic devices Metallic implants in or near the treatment area Active cancer Serious cardiovascular conditions Blood-clotting disorders Uncontrolled medical conditions Active infection or inflammation Open wounds in the treatment area Severe skin conditions Conditions affecting normal healing Recent surgery in the proposed treatment area Recent injectable treatments in the area Other contraindications listed in the user manual Focused energy must not be applied over the eyes, thyroid, major nerves, large blood vessels, bones or other prohibited anatomical structures. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the supplied manual, professional training requirements and applicable local regulations. Medical guidance should be obtained when treatment suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
The Standing SMAS HIFU Machine is suitable for: Beauty salons Aesthetic clinics Medical spas Facial-rejuvenation studios Body-contouring centers Qualified independent practitioners Businesses expanding their face and body services The system is not designed for casual or unsupervised home use. Why Choose This Standing SMAS HIFU Machine?
Two Complementary Handle Designs
Blade Tip handles provide a wide facial and body depth range, while the Cannon Head handle supports precise fixed-point facial treatments. Complete 1.5–13 mm Depth Range
Seven Blade Tip cartridge depths support professional treatments from superficial facial applications to deeper body-contouring protocols. Three Dedicated Handles
Two Blade Tip handles and one Cannon Head handle provide greater operational flexibility. Face and Body Applications
Offer facial lifting, skin firming, jawline contouring and professional body-contouring services from one platform. Freestanding Professional Design
The integrated trolley keeps the console, handles and cabling organized while allowing convenient repositioning. Professional Certifications
The machine comes with CE and RoHS certificates. Long-Term Equipment Support
Remote training, technical assistance and a three-year limited warranty are included. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the difference between the Blade Tip and Cannon Head handles?
The Blade Tip handles support cartridge depths from 1.5 mm to 13 mm for facial and body applications. The Cannon Head handle uses 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges for precise fixed-point facial treatments. What do the different cartridge depths do?
Shallower cartridges support suitable facial applications. The 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges are used in professional facial and SMAS-focused protocols. The deeper 6.0 mm, 9.0 mm and 13.0 mm cartridges are designed for appropriately selected body areas. Is HIFU a laser treatment?
No. HIFU uses focused ultrasound energy. It is not a laser technology. Is treatment painful?
Client experience varies according to the treatment area, cartridge depth, energy setting and individual sensitivity. Warmth, tingling or temporary discomfort may occur. Is there any downtime?
Recovery experience varies. Some clients may return to normal activities shortly after treatment, while temporary redness, swelling, tenderness, tingling or sensitivity may occur. How many treatments will a client need?
Treatment frequency depends on the area, client condition and professional protocol. A fixed number of sessions or guaranteed result should not be promised. How often can treatment be repeated?
Treatment intervals depend on the area treated, energy settings, client response and professional protocol. Sufficient time should be allowed for the tissue response before repeating treatment. What are the machine’s dimensions and weight?
The machine measures approximately 59 × 70 × 152 cm and weighs approximately 50 kg. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components. Cartridges, normal wear, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the machine come with CE and RoHS certificates?
Yes. The Wikbeauty Standing SMAS HIFU Machine comes with CE and RoHS certificates. Expand Your Professional HIFU Services
The Wikbeauty Standing SMAS HIFU Machine combines: Two Blade Tip handles for face and body applications One Cannon Head handle for precise facial treatments Seven Blade Tip cartridge depths from 1.5 mm to 13 mm Contact Wikbeauty for current pricing, available voltage options, delivery information and purchasing assistance. Request Pricing and Product Consultation Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Cartridge depth
Handle
Intended professional application
1.5 mm
Blade Tip or Cannon Head
Superficial facial protocols
2.0 mm
Blade Tip
Precision facial treatments
3.0 mm
Blade Tip or Cannon Head
Facial and neck applications
4.5 mm
Blade Tip or Cannon Head
Deeper facial and SMAS-focused protocols
6.0 mm
Blade Tip
Shallow body applications
9.0 mm
Blade Tip
Medium-depth body treatments
13.0 mm
Blade Tip
Deeper body-contouring protocols
Treatment category
Common areas
Intended aesthetic application
Upper-face treatments
Forehead and brow area
Firming and lifting protocols
Facial contouring
Cheeks and lower face
Contour refinement
Jawline treatments
Jawline and submental area
Definition and firming
Neck treatments
Neck and suitable décolletage areas
Skin-firming protocols
Body contouring
Abdomen, waist and back
Non-invasive contour refinement
Body firming
Arms, thighs, hips and buttocks
Skin-firming treatments
Specification
Details
Product type
Professional standing SMAS HIFU machine
Technology
High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound
Equipment design
Freestanding trolley with rolling base
Treatment handles
Two Blade Tip handles and one Cannon Head handle
Blade Tip cartridges
1.5 mm, 2.0 mm, 3.0 mm, 4.5 mm, 6.0 mm, 9.0 mm and 13.0 mm
Cannon Head cartridges
1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm
Total depth range
1.5–13.0 mm
Machine dimensions
59 × 70 × 152 cm
Net weight
Approximately 50 kg
Certifications
CE and RoHS certified
Warranty
Three-year limited warranty
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
Professional Gold 4D HIFU 4-in-1 System
Four Dedicated Technologies for Facial Lifting, Skin Refinement and Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty Gold 4D HIFU 4-in-1 Machine combines four professional aesthetic treatment handles within one premium desktop platform.
The system includes a multi-line 4D HIFU handle, a Single-Point HIFU and RF handle, a Skin Knife handle and a Thermal Shaping handle. Together, they support professional services focused on facial lifting, skin firming, contour refinement and non-invasive body treatments.
A 15-inch intelligent touchscreen, multiple cartridge depths and pre-programmed protocols provide trained operators with greater treatment flexibility from one compact system.
Four dedicated handles | 1.5–13 mm depth range | 15-inch touchscreen | Three-year warranty
Four Professional Technologies in One Machine Multi-Line 4D HIFU Handle
The 4D HIFU handle delivers multiple treatment lines with each activation, supporting more efficient coverage than a conventional single-line HIFU system. It includes facial and body cartridges ranging from 1.5 mm to 9.0 mm. Facial cartridges: 1.5 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm 4.5 mm Body cartridges: 6.0 mm 9.0 mm The available depths allow trained operators to create protocols for facial skin firming, jawline definition, neck treatments and suitable body areas. Single-Point HIFU and RF Handle
The Single-Point handle combines focused ultrasound and radiofrequency delivery within a targeted treatment format. Available cartridge depths include: 1.5 mm 3.0 mm 4.5 mm 9.0 mm This handle is designed for controlled energy placement on appropriately selected facial or body areas. The exact HIFU and RF parameters must be selected according to professional training, the treatment area and client suitability. Skin Knife Handle
The Skin Knife handle uses blade-style cartridges designed to distribute energy across broader treatment areas. Available depths include: 1.5 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm 4.5 mm It can be incorporated into professional programs focused on skin firming, texture refinement and overall facial rejuvenation. Despite its name, the Skin Knife handle is not a surgical blade and does not cut the skin. Thermal Shaping Handle
The Thermal Shaping handle extends the machine’s applications to professional body-contouring treatments. Available cartridge depths include: 8.0 mm 13.0 mm These deeper cartridges are intended for appropriately selected areas with sufficient tissue depth, including the abdomen, waist, back, arms and thighs. Multiple Delivery Formats for Customized Treatments Each handle provides a different method of energy delivery. Handle and cartridge selection must be based on client anatomy, tissue thickness, treatment goals and professional training. Multi-Line HIFU for Efficient Coverage
The 4D HIFU handle is designed to deliver up to 12 treatment lines per activation, depending on the selected settings and cartridge. Compared with a conventional single-line system, multi-line delivery may provide: More efficient treatment-area coverage More consistent line distribution Reduced repetitive handle repositioning Greater flexibility for larger facial areas More streamlined professional workflows The supplied specifications indicate a cartridge capacity of up to 10,000 shots. Actual capacity depends on the cartridge and operating configuration. Higher line output does not remove the need for correct spacing, safe energy selection and knowledge of facial anatomy. Treatment Depths from 1.5 mm to 13 mm
This table provides general positioning information. The correct depth must be selected according to the treatment area, tissue thickness and approved professional protocol. Professional Face and Body Applications A complete client consultation and contraindication assessment must be performed before treatment. How HIFU and RF Technologies Work HIFU stands for High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound. HIFU delivers controlled ultrasound energy to a defined depth below the skin’s surface. When applied correctly, the focused thermal points support the body’s natural tissue-remodeling and collagen-response processes. Radiofrequency uses controlled electrical energy to generate heat within suitable tissue layers. The Single-Point handle combines HIFU and RF delivery for targeted professional protocols. The Thermal Shaping handle uses deeper cartridge options for appropriately selected body areas. Individual outcomes vary according to age, skin condition, tissue thickness, treatment settings and biological response. Build a Complete Professional Service Menu
Multi-Line Facial HIFU
Use the 4D HIFU handle for structured facial lifting and firming treatments with efficient multi-line coverage. Targeted HIFU and RF Treatments
The Single-Point handle supports focused protocols for suitable areas requiring precise energy placement. Skin-Firming and Refinement Services
The Skin Knife handle provides broader energy delivery for professional skin-firming and texture-focused treatments. Body-Contouring Services
The Thermal Shaping handle adds professional body treatments for appropriately selected areas such as the abdomen, waist, arms and thighs. Combination Treatment Plans
Qualified operators may develop treatment plans using more than one handle when appropriate. Compatibility, sequence and treatment intervals must follow professional training and manufacturer protocols. Premium Desktop Design
The gold desktop housing combines four technologies within a compact professional format. Key design features include: Gold professional housing 15-inch intelligent color touchscreen Four dedicated treatment handles Multiple facial and body cartridges Pre-programmed operating protocols Adjustable energy and depth controls Automatic shut-off function AC 110–220 V compatibility Approximately 21 kg net weight The machine should be installed on a stable, level treatment trolley or work surface with sufficient ventilation. How a Professional Treatment Session Works 1. Consultation and Assessment
The operator reviews the client’s concerns, treatment goals, medical history, skin condition, tissue thickness and contraindications. 2. Handle Selection
The appropriate treatment handle is selected according to whether the protocol focuses on lifting, targeted energy delivery, skin refinement or body contouring. 3. Cartridge Selection
The cartridge depth is selected according to the treatment area and client anatomy. 4. Treatment Preparation
The treatment area is cleansed and marked where required. Conductive gel or the recommended coupling material is applied. 5. Parameter Selection
Energy, depth, delivery mode and other available settings are adjusted according to the selected protocol. 6. Controlled Treatment
The operator delivers energy using the correct technique while monitoring client comfort and tissue response. 7. Post-Treatment Care
The area is cleaned and the client receives appropriate aftercare instructions. Temporary redness, swelling, sensitivity, tenderness, tingling or numbness may occur. Recovery experience varies according to the technology and individual response. Technical Specifications
Specifications may be updated according to the final production configuration. What Is Included? Main Equipment
One Gold 4D HIFU 4-in-1 touchscreen console One Multi-Line 4D HIFU handle One Single-Point HIFU and RF handle One Skin Knife handle One Thermal Shaping handle Power cable suitable for the selected market Starter conductive gel Multi-Line 4D HIFU Cartridges
1.5 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm 4.5 mm 6.0 mm 9.0 mm Single-Point HIFU and RF Cartridges
1.5 mm 3.0 mm 4.5 mm 9.0 mm Skin Knife Cartridges
1.5 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm 4.5 mm Thermal Shaping Cartridges
8.0 mm 13.0 mm Documentation and Certification
English user manual CE certificate RoHS certificate Setup guidance Treatment-protocol guidance Cleaning and maintenance instructions Basic troubleshooting assistance Final cartridge quantities and package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation. CE and RoHS Certified
The Wikbeauty Gold 4D HIFU 4-in-1 Machine comes with: CE Certificate RoHS Certificate These certificates are included with the machine and support its professional positioning and international distribution. Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote training and operating guidance covering: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen operation Handle and cartridge installation Multi-Line HIFU operation Single-Point HIFU and RF operation Skin Knife operation Thermal Shaping operation Basic treatment-parameter selection Facial and body protocols Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic troubleshooting Training materials support equipment familiarization but do not replace anatomy training, professional qualifications or licenses required in the operator’s jurisdiction. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Gold 4D HIFU 4-in-1 Machine is supported by a three-year limited warranty covering eligible parts and labor. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty conditions, coverage may include eligible manufacturing defects affecting: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Touchscreen and control system Original treatment handles Handle connectors Other eligible original machine components Eligible repair labor during the warranty period Cartridges and other limited-use components may have separate warranty conditions. Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with: Remote technical assessment Guided diagnostic testing Identification of the affected component Confirmation of warranty eligibility Replacement-part or repair assistance where applicable Remote installation guidance Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Incorrect operation or misuse Unauthorized repair or modification Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning or storage Damage caused by dropping a handle Normal cartridge depletion Incorrect cartridge installation Unauthorized transportation damage Failure to follow the operating manual Order information, the machine serial number, photographs and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting warranty service. All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional aesthetic equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be completed before every treatment. Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Implanted electronic devices Metallic implants in or near the treatment area Active cancer Serious cardiovascular conditions Blood-clotting disorders Uncontrolled medical conditions Active infection or inflammation Open wounds in the treatment area Severe skin disorders Conditions affecting normal healing Recent surgery in the treatment area Recent injectable treatments Other contraindications listed in the operating manual Energy must not be applied over the eyes, thyroid, major nerves, large blood vessels, bones or other prohibited anatomical structures. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the supplied manual, professional training requirements and applicable local regulations. Medical guidance should be obtained when treatment suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
The Gold 4D HIFU 4-in-1 Machine is suitable for: Beauty salons Aesthetic clinics Medical spas Facial-rejuvenation studios Body-contouring centers Qualified independent practitioners Businesses expanding their face and body services The system is not intended for casual or unsupervised home use. Why Choose the Gold 4D HIFU 4-in-1 Machine?
Four Dedicated Technologies
Combine multi-line HIFU, targeted HIFU and RF, Skin Knife treatments and Thermal Shaping within one professional platform. Efficient Multi-Line Delivery
The 4D HIFU handle can deliver up to 12 treatment lines per activation for more efficient coverage. Complete Face and Body Depth Range
Cartridge options extend from 1.5 mm for superficial facial applications to 13 mm for deeper body protocols. Premium Desktop Design
The gold housing and 15-inch touchscreen create a refined presentation in a professional treatment room. Professional Certifications
The machine comes with CE and RoHS certificates. Long-Term Equipment Support
Remote training, technical assistance and a three-year limited warranty covering eligible parts and labor are included. Frequently Asked Questions
What does “4-in-1” mean?
The system combines four dedicated technologies: Multi-Line 4D HIFU, Single-Point HIFU and RF, Skin Knife and Thermal Shaping. How is 4D HIFU different from conventional single-line HIFU?
The 4D handle can deliver multiple treatment lines per activation. This provides more efficient coverage than repeatedly delivering one line at a time. What does the Single-Point HIFU and RF handle do?
It combines targeted focused ultrasound and radiofrequency delivery for precise professional protocols. Settings and treatment placement must follow the supplied training. Does the Skin Knife cut the skin?
No. “Skin Knife” is the name used for its blade-style treatment cartridge. It is not a surgical blade and does not cut the skin. What is the Thermal Shaping handle used for?
The Thermal Shaping handle includes 8.0 mm and 13.0 mm cartridges for professional body-contouring treatments on appropriately selected areas. Is treatment painful?
Client experience varies according to the technology, area, cartridge depth and energy setting. Warmth, tingling, tenderness or temporary discomfort may occur. Is there any downtime?
Recovery experience varies. Some clients may return to normal activities shortly after treatment, while temporary redness, swelling, tenderness or sensitivity may occur. How many sessions will a client need?
Treatment frequency depends on the technology, treatment area, client condition and professional protocol. A fixed number of sessions or guaranteed outcome should not be promised. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components and eligible repair labor. Cartridges, normal wear, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the machine come with CE and RoHS certificates?
Yes. The Wikbeauty Gold 4D HIFU 4-in-1 Machine comes with CE and RoHS certificates. Expand Your Face and Body Treatment Services
The Wikbeauty Gold 4D HIFU 4-in-1 Machine brings four complementary treatment technologies into one premium desktop platform: Multi-Line 4D HIFU Single-Point HIFU and RF Skin Knife Thermal Shaping Contact Wikbeauty for current pricing, voltage selection, delivery information and purchasing assistance. Request Pricing and Product Consultation Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Handle
Delivery format
Primary application
Multi-Line 4D HIFU
Multiple treatment lines per activation
Facial lifting and efficient area coverage
Single-Point HIFU and RF
Targeted point delivery
Precise facial and body protocols
Skin Knife
Broader blade-style delivery
Skin firming and texture refinement
Thermal Shaping
Deeper body-treatment delivery
Professional body contouring
Cartridge depth
Compatible handle
Intended professional application
1.5 mm
4D HIFU, Single-Point, Skin Knife
Superficial facial protocols
2.0 mm
4D HIFU, Skin Knife
Precision facial applications
3.0 mm
4D HIFU, Single-Point, Skin Knife
Facial and neck treatments
4.5 mm
4D HIFU, Single-Point, Skin Knife
Deeper facial and SMAS-focused protocols
6.0 mm
4D HIFU
Shallow body applications
8.0 mm
Thermal Shaping
Medium-depth body treatments
9.0 mm
4D HIFU or Single-Point
Body-contouring protocols
13.0 mm
Thermal Shaping
Deeper body applications
Treatment category
Common areas
Applicable technology
Facial skin firming
Forehead, cheeks and lower face
4D HIFU or Skin Knife
Fine-line treatments
Suitable facial areas
Skin Knife or Single-Point
Jawline contouring
Lower face and jawline
4D HIFU or Single-Point
Neck firming
Neck and submental area
4D HIFU
Skin-texture refinement
Face and suitable neck areas
Skin Knife
Body contouring
Abdomen, waist and back
Thermal Shaping
Body firming
Arms, thighs, hips and buttocks
Thermal Shaping or body HIFU
Specification
Details
Product type
Professional 4-in-1 HIFU and body-contouring system
Machine design
Gold desktop housing
Control interface
15-inch intelligent color touchscreen
Treatment handles
Four
Included technologies
Multi-Line 4D HIFU, Single-Point HIFU and RF, Skin Knife and Thermal Shaping
4D HIFU facial cartridges
1.5 mm, 2.0 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm
4D HIFU body cartridges
6.0 mm and 9.0 mm
Single-Point cartridges
1.5 mm, 3.0 mm, 4.5 mm and 9.0 mm
Skin Knife cartridges
1.5 mm, 2.0 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm
Thermal Shaping cartridges
8.0 mm and 13.0 mm
Multi-line output
Up to 12 lines per activation
Cartridge capacity
Up to 10,000 shots, depending on cartridge
Rated power
200 W
Input voltage
AC 110–220 V
Machine dimensions
54 × 45 × 52 cm
Net weight
Approximately 21 kg
Safety functions
Automatic shut-off and adjustable operating limits
Certifications
CE and RoHS certified
Warranty
Three-year limited warranty covering eligible parts and labor
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
Professional Vertical 3-in-1 RF Microneedling and Ultrasound System
Three Dedicated Technologies for Face, Body and Intimate-Care Applications
The Wikbeauty Vertical 3-in-1 Gold RF Microneedling and 7D Ultrasound Machine combines three professional aesthetic technologies within one floor-standing system.
It includes a Gold RF Microneedling handle, a 7D Focused Ultrasound handle and a 360° Intimate Ultrasound handle. Together, these technologies support professional treatment programs focused on facial rejuvenation, skin-texture refinement, lifting, body contouring and intimate care.
The vertical design provides organized handle storage and a compact professional footprint for beauty salons, med spas and aesthetic clinics.
Three dedicated technologies | Face, body and intimate care | Adjustable treatment depths | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Technologies in One System Gold RF Microneedling
The Gold RF Microneedling handle combines adjustable microneedle penetration with controlled bipolar radiofrequency energy. The needles enter the skin at a selected depth while RF energy is delivered to the targeted tissue. This controlled process can be incorporated into professional treatments focused on collagen remodeling and skin rejuvenation. The microneedling depth is adjustable from 0.5 mm to 3.5 mm. Common applications include: Improvement in skin texture Appearance of enlarged pores Fine-line treatments Uneven-looking skin tone Acne-scar appearance Facial and body skin firming General skin-rejuvenation programs RF microneedling is a minimally invasive treatment and requires appropriate hygiene, infection-control and aftercare procedures. 7D Focused Ultrasound
The 7D handle delivers focused ultrasound energy at selectable depths for professional face and body treatments. It includes four cartridge depths: 1.5 mm 3.0 mm 4.5 mm 9.0 mm The shallower cartridges support facial skin-firming and lifting protocols, while the 9.0 mm cartridge is intended for appropriately selected body areas. 360° Intimate Ultrasound
The dedicated Intimate Ultrasound handle delivers focused ultrasound energy in a 360° treatment pattern. It includes: 3.0 mm cartridge 4.5 mm cartridge The handle is designed for specialized professional intimate-care protocols where legally permitted. Intimate treatments must only be performed by appropriately qualified professionals following strict consultation, informed-consent, privacy, hygiene and safety procedures. Four RF Microneedling Tip Options
The RF Microneedling handle includes four tip configurations for different treatment areas and professional protocols. The Nano tip does not penetrate the skin in the same way as the microneedle cartridges. The 10-pin, 25-pin and 64-pin tips contain needles and must follow professional infection-control requirements. Tip selection should be based on the treatment area, client condition and intended protocol. Vacuum-Assisted RF Microneedling Operation The RF Microneedling handle includes a vacuum-assisted contact system designed to support stable placement during treatment. Professional operating features include: Adjustable needle depth from 0.5–3.5 mm Manual operating mode Automatic operating mode Vacuum-assisted skin contact Automatic needle-release function Interchangeable treatment tips Adjustable RF treatment parameters The vacuum feature supports consistent contact but does not replace correct handpiece positioning, professional judgment or client monitoring. Face, Body and Intimate-Care Applications
Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be performed before treatment. How the Technologies Work Radiofrequency Microneedling
Insulated microneedles penetrate to a controlled depth and deliver RF energy within the selected tissue layer. This creates a controlled treatment response intended to support collagen remodeling and improvement in the appearance of skin texture. Focused Ultrasound
The 7D and Intimate Care handles deliver focused ultrasound energy at a selected depth below the surface. When applied correctly, focused thermal points support the body’s natural tissue-remodeling response without creating a surgical incision. Individual results vary according to age, skin condition, tissue thickness, treatment parameters and biological response. Build a Complete Professional Treatment Menu
Facial Lifting and Firming
The 7D Ultrasound handle supports professional protocols for the face, jawline and neck using 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges. Advanced Skin Rejuvenation
The RF Microneedling handle supports customizable treatments focused on texture, pores, fine lines and general skin quality. Body Firming and Contouring
The 9.0 mm 7D cartridge and suitable RF Microneedling tips expand the treatment menu to appropriately selected body areas. Intimate Wellness Services
The 360° Intimate Ultrasound handle enables qualified operators to add specialized intimate-care services where legally permitted. Combination Treatment Planning
Qualified professionals may develop treatment plans using more than one technology where appropriate. Treatment sequence, intervals and compatibility must follow professional training and manufacturer protocols. How a Professional Treatment Session Works 1. Consultation and Assessment
The operator reviews the client’s concerns, treatment goals, medical history, skin condition and contraindications. Additional informed-consent and privacy procedures are required for intimate treatments. 2. Technology Selection
The RF Microneedling, 7D Ultrasound or Intimate Ultrasound handle is selected according to the intended treatment. 3. Tip or Cartridge Selection
The operator selects the appropriate needle tip, Nano tip or ultrasound cartridge. 4. Treatment Preparation
The treatment area is cleansed and prepared according to the selected technology. Appropriate disinfection and sterile supplies are required for microneedling. 5. Parameter Selection
Needle depth, RF energy, ultrasound depth and other available settings are adjusted according to the professional protocol. 6. Controlled Treatment
The treatment is performed using correct positioning and technique. Client comfort and tissue response are monitored throughout the procedure. 7. Post-Treatment Care
The area is cleaned and suitable aftercare instructions are provided. RF microneedling may cause temporary redness, swelling, sensitivity, pinpoint bleeding or mild crusting. Ultrasound treatments may cause temporary redness, tenderness, tingling or swelling. Recovery experience varies between clients. Technical Specifications
Specifications may be updated according to the final production configuration. What Is Included? Main Equipment
One vertical 3-in-1 control unit One Gold RF Microneedling handle One 7D Focused Ultrasound handle One 360° Intimate Ultrasound handle Power cable suitable for the selected market 7D Ultrasound Cartridges
1.5 mm 3.0 mm 4.5 mm 9.0 mm Intimate Ultrasound Cartridges
3.0 mm 4.5 mm RF Microneedling Tips
Nano tip 10-pin tip 25-pin tip 64-pin tip Documentation and Certification
English user manual CE certificate RoHS certificate Installation and setup guidance Treatment-protocol guidance Cleaning and maintenance instructions Basic troubleshooting assistance Final tip quantities and package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation. CE and RoHS Certified
The Wikbeauty Vertical 3-in-1 RF Microneedling and Ultrasound Machine comes with: CE Certificate RoHS Certificate These certificates are included with the machine and support its professional positioning and international distribution. Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote training and operating guidance covering: Machine installation and setup Digital control operation RF Microneedling handle operation 7D Ultrasound handle operation Intimate Ultrasound handle operation Needle-tip and cartridge installation Basic treatment-parameter selection Hygiene and infection-control procedures Facial, body and intimate-care protocols Cleaning and routine maintenance Basic troubleshooting Training materials support equipment familiarization but do not replace professional qualifications, anatomy training, intimate-care training or licenses required in the operator’s jurisdiction. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Vertical 3-in-1 System is supported by a three-year limited warranty covering eligible parts and labor. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty conditions, coverage may include eligible manufacturing defects affecting: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Digital display and control system Original treatment handles Vacuum system Handle connectors Other eligible original components Eligible repair labor during the warranty period Microneedling tips, ultrasound cartridges and other limited-use components may have separate warranty conditions. Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with: Remote technical assessment Guided diagnostic testing Identification of the affected component Confirmation of warranty eligibility Replacement-part or repair assistance where applicable Remote installation guidance Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Incorrect operation or misuse Unauthorized repair or modification Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, disinfection or storage Damage caused by dropping a handle Normal depletion of cartridges or tips Reuse of single-use microneedling components Unauthorized transportation damage Failure to follow the operating manual Order information, the machine serial number, photographs and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting warranty service. All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional aesthetic equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete consultation, informed-consent process and contraindication assessment must be completed before every treatment. Depending on the selected technology, treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Implanted electronic devices Metallic implants in or near the treatment area Active cancer Serious cardiovascular conditions Blood-clotting disorders Uncontrolled medical conditions Active infection or inflammation Open wounds Severe skin conditions Conditions affecting normal healing Recent surgery in the treatment area Recent injectable treatments Use of medications that affect healing or bleeding Other contraindications listed in the operating manual RF Microneedling Safety
RF microneedling must be performed using appropriate hygiene and infection-control procedures. Single-use needle tips must not be reused. Intimate-Care Safety
Intimate treatments require appropriate professional training, privacy safeguards, informed consent and strict hygiene controls. Operators must confirm that intimate treatment is permitted within their professional scope and applicable local regulations. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Medical guidance should be obtained whenever treatment suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
The Vertical 3-in-1 System is suitable for: Aesthetic clinics Medical spas Beauty salons Skin-rejuvenation studios Body-contouring centers Qualified intimate-care providers Appropriately trained independent practitioners The machine is not designed for casual or unsupervised home use. Why Choose This 3-in-1 System?
Three Complementary Technologies
Combine RF Microneedling, 7D Focused Ultrasound and 360° Intimate Ultrasound within one professional platform. Face, Body and Intimate-Care Applications
Develop multiple professional service categories without purchasing three separate control units. Adjustable RF Microneedling Depth
Select a needle depth from 0.5–3.5 mm according to the treatment area and professional protocol. Four Microneedling Tip Options
Nano, 10-pin, 25-pin and 64-pin options support different areas and treatment objectives. Vacuum-Assisted Operation
The vacuum sensor and automatic needle-release function support stable contact and controlled operation. Professional Certifications
The machine comes with CE and RoHS certificates. Long-Term Equipment Support
Remote training, technical assistance and a three-year limited warranty covering eligible parts and labor are included. Frequently Asked Questions
What does “3-in-1” mean?
The machine combines Gold RF Microneedling, 7D Focused Ultrasound and 360° Intimate Ultrasound. Each technology has its own dedicated treatment handle. Is RF microneedling non-invasive?
No. RF microneedling is minimally invasive because the needles penetrate the skin. Appropriate disinfection, single-use components and post-treatment care are required. What is the difference between the RF Microneedling tips?
The Nano tip supports superficial skin-contact protocols. The 10-pin tip provides precise treatment of smaller areas, while the 25-pin and 64-pin tips provide progressively broader coverage. What do the 7D Ultrasound cartridge depths treat?
The 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges support professional facial and neck protocols. The 9.0 mm cartridge is intended for appropriately selected body areas. What is the Intimate Ultrasound handle used for?
It is designed for specialized professional intimate-care protocols using 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges. It must only be operated by appropriately qualified professionals where legally permitted. Is intimate ultrasound safe?
Safety depends on client selection, operator training, correct parameters, hygiene and adherence to contraindications. It should not be described as risk-free or universally suitable. Is treatment painful?
Client experience varies. RF microneedling may cause discomfort, while ultrasound treatments may produce warmth, tingling or tenderness. Is there any downtime?
Recovery depends on the technology and individual response. RF microneedling may cause temporary redness, swelling or pinpoint crusting. Ultrasound treatments may cause temporary tenderness or swelling. How many sessions will a client need?
Treatment frequency depends on the technology, area, client condition and protocol. A fixed number of sessions or guaranteed outcome should not be promised. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components and eligible repair labor. Tips, cartridges, normal wear, accidental damage and misuse are excluded. Does the machine come with CE and RoHS certificates?
Yes. The Wikbeauty Vertical 3-in-1 Machine comes with CE and RoHS certificates. Expand Your Face, Body and Intimate-Care Services
The Wikbeauty Vertical 3-in-1 System combines three professional technologies within one floor-standing platform: Gold RF Microneedling 7D Focused Ultrasound 360° Intimate Ultrasound Contact Wikbeauty for current pricing, voltage selection, delivery information and purchasing assistance. Request Pricing and Product Consultation Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Tip
Intended professional application
Nano tip
Superficial, non-needle skin-contact protocols
10-pin tip
Precise treatment of smaller areas
25-pin tip
Medium-area facial treatments
64-pin tip
Broader face or body coverage
Treatment category
Technology
Common applications
Facial lifting
7D Focused Ultrasound
Face, lower face, jawline and neck
Skin rejuvenation
RF Microneedling
Texture, pores and fine-line appearance
Targeted facial treatments
RF Microneedling
Suitable areas around the mouth and face
Body firming
7D Ultrasound or RF Microneedling
Arms, legs and selected body areas
Body contouring
7D Focused Ultrasound
Appropriately selected areas
Intimate care
360° Intimate Ultrasound
Specialized professional protocols
Specification
Details
Product type
Professional vertical 3-in-1 aesthetic system
Included technologies
Gold RF Microneedling, 7D Focused Ultrasound and 360° Intimate Ultrasound
Machine design
Vertical floor-standing unit
Treatment handles
Three dedicated handles
7D Ultrasound cartridges
1.5 mm, 3.0 mm, 4.5 mm and 9.0 mm
Intimate Ultrasound cartridges
3.0 mm and 4.5 mm
RF Microneedling tips
Nano, 10-pin, 25-pin and 64-pin
Microneedling depth
Adjustable from 0.5–3.5 mm
Needle operating modes
Manual and automatic
Contact system
Vacuum-assisted skin contact
Safety features
Vacuum sensor, automatic needle release and adjustable depth controls
Control system
Digital display with treatment controls and status indicator
Machine dimensions
64 × 62 × 120 cm
Net weight
Approximately 43 kg
Power supply
Regional voltage and plug configurations available
Certifications
CE and RoHS certified
Warranty
Three-year limited warranty covering eligible parts and labor
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
Professional RF Thermal Face-Lifting System
Dual-Handle Technology with Three Treatment Depths
The Wikbeauty Thermal Face Lift Machine is a professional radiofrequency thermal-treatment system developed for facial firming, contour refinement and skin-rejuvenation services.
Two dedicated treatment handles—the Dual-Bo Blade and Cannon Head—provide different energy-delivery formats for detailed facial work and focused treatment applications.
Three interchangeable probes at 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm allow trained operators to select an appropriate treatment depth for different facial areas and professional protocols.
Its compact 19 kg desktop design is suitable for aesthetic clinics, medical spas, beauty salons and qualified independent practitioners.
Two professional handles | Three probe depths | 19 kg desktop design | Three-year warranty
Two Complementary Treatment Handles Dual-Bo Blade Handle
The Dual-Bo Blade handle is designed for controlled energy delivery across appropriate facial areas. Its blade-style treatment format supports professional protocols focused on: Facial skin firming Fine-line appearance Skin-texture refinement Lower-face contouring Suitable areas around the forehead and cheeks Despite its name, the Blade handle is not a surgical instrument and does not cut the skin. Cannon Head Handle
The Cannon Head handle provides focused-point energy placement for areas requiring a more targeted treatment approach. It may be incorporated into professional protocols for: Jawline definition Lower-face firming Neck contour refinement Targeted facial areas Deeper treatment protocols The correct handle should be selected according to the treatment area, tissue condition and operator training. Three Probe Depths for Customized Treatments P1.5 mm — Superficial Facial Protocols
The 1.5 mm probe is intended for controlled treatment of suitable superficial facial areas. Common applications include: Fine-line appearance Skin-texture refinement Appearance of enlarged pores Superficial skin-firming protocols Maintenance treatments Extra caution is required when working near delicate facial structures. Energy must not be applied directly over the eyes or eyelids. P3.0 mm — Mid-Depth Treatment
The 3.0 mm probe supports professional protocols targeting deeper facial tissue than the 1.5 mm option. Common applications include: Facial skin firming Appearance of moderate lines Cheek treatments Lower-face contour refinement General facial rejuvenation P4.5 mm — Deeper Facial Protocols
The 4.5 mm probe is designed for deeper treatment applications on appropriately selected areas. It may be incorporated into protocols focused on: Lower-face lifting Jawline definition Neck firming Contour refinement Suitable areas with sufficient tissue depth Probe depth must always be selected according to facial anatomy, tissue thickness and professional treatment guidelines. Professional Facial Applications Individual outcomes vary according to age, skin condition, tissue thickness, treatment settings and biological response. How RF Thermal Technology Works
Radiofrequency technology uses controlled electrical energy to generate heat within selected tissue layers. When applied correctly, this controlled thermal response supports collagen remodeling and may improve the appearance of skin firmness, texture and facial contours over time. The operator selects the treatment handle, probe depth and available parameters according to the treatment area and client assessment. The system is intended for aesthetic skin-firming and contour-refinement treatments. It should not be marketed as permanently removing wrinkles, eliminating fat or producing a surgical facelift. Manufacturer-Reported Evaluation Data
The supplied product information lists the following evaluation results: These figures should be described as manufacturer-reported evaluation data. Build a Professional Facial Treatment Menu Full-Face Firming
Combine appropriate probe depths to develop a structured treatment for suitable areas of the forehead, cheeks and lower face. Jawline and Lower-Face Contouring
Use the appropriate handle and deeper probe option for clients concerned with lower-face definition and visible skin laxity. Fine-Line and Texture Treatments
The shallower probe can support protocols focused on suitable superficial areas and overall skin-texture appearance. Neck-Firming Treatments
Develop targeted neck protocols following careful anatomical assessment and contraindication screening. Maintenance Treatments
Suitable clients may receive periodic treatments according to their individual response and professional treatment plan. Compact Professional Desktop Design
At approximately 19 kg, the machine combines professional operation with a relatively compact desktop format. Key design features include: Two dedicated thermal-treatment handles Three interchangeable probe depths Durable ABS machine housing Compact desktop installation Organized professional setup Suitable for dedicated treatment rooms Easier repositioning than a large floor-standing system The machine should be placed on a stable, level treatment trolley or work surface with adequate ventilation. How a Professional Treatment Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s concerns, medical history, skin condition, previous aesthetic procedures and contraindications. 2. Handle Selection
The Dual-Bo Blade or Cannon Head handle is selected according to the intended treatment technique. 3. Probe Selection
The 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm or 4.5 mm probe is selected according to the treatment area and tissue depth. 4. Skin Preparation
The treatment area is cleansed and marked where necessary. The recommended coupling medium is applied when required. 5. Parameter Selection
Energy and other available settings are adjusted according to the client’s condition, treatment area and professional protocol. 6. Controlled Treatment
The operator applies the selected handle using correct placement and technique while monitoring client comfort and tissue response. 7. Post-Treatment Care
The treatment area is cleaned and the client receives appropriate aftercare guidance. Temporary redness, warmth, swelling, tenderness or sensitivity may occur. Recovery experience varies between clients. Technical Specifications
Only certifications actually supplied with this exact model should be listed on the final product page. What Is Included? Main Equipment
One Thermal Face Lift desktop console One Dual-Bo Blade handle One Cannon Head handle Power cable suitable for the selected market Starter treatment consumables, where applicable Treatment Probes
One P1.5 mm probe One P3.0 mm probe One P4.5 mm probe Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and setup guidance Treatment-protocol guidance Cleaning and maintenance instructions Basic troubleshooting assistance Training certificate upon completion Final package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation. Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides operating guidance covering: Machine installation and setup Dual-Bo Blade handle operation Cannon Head handle operation Probe installation and selection Basic treatment-parameter adjustment Facial and neck treatment protocols Client consultation and screening Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic troubleshooting A training certificate is provided after completing the supplied equipment training. Training supports machine familiarization but does not replace anatomy training, professional qualifications or licenses required in the operator’s jurisdiction. Three-Year Professional Warranty
The Wikbeauty Thermal Face Lift Machine is supported by a three-year limited professional warranty. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty conditions, eligible manufacturing defects may be covered for: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Control system Original Dual-Bo Blade handle Original Cannon Head handle Handle connectors Other eligible original components Probes and other limited-use components may have separate warranty conditions. Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with: Remote technical assessment Guided diagnostic testing Identification of the affected component Confirmation of warranty eligibility Replacement-part or repair assistance where applicable Remote installation guidance Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Incorrect operation or misuse Unauthorized repair or modification Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning or storage Damage caused by dropping a handle Normal probe depletion or wear Incorrect probe installation Unauthorized transportation damage Failure to follow the operating manual Order information, the machine serial number, photographs and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting warranty support. All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This machine is professional aesthetic equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be performed before every treatment. Treatment may not be appropriate for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Implanted electronic devices Metallic implants in or near the treatment area Active cancer Serious cardiovascular conditions Blood-clotting disorders Uncontrolled medical conditions Active infection or inflammation Open wounds in the treatment area Severe skin conditions Conditions affecting normal healing Recent surgery in the proposed treatment area Recent injectable treatments Other contraindications listed in the operating manual Energy must not be applied directly over the eyes, thyroid, major nerves, large blood vessels, bones or other prohibited anatomical structures. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, professional training requirements and applicable local regulations. Medical guidance should be obtained whenever treatment suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
The Thermal Face Lift Machine is suitable for: Aesthetic clinics Medical spas Beauty salons Facial-rejuvenation studios Qualified independent practitioners Businesses expanding their facial treatment services Although the machine has a compact desktop design, it is not intended for casual or unsupervised home use. Why Choose the Wikbeauty Thermal Face Lift Machine?
Two Dedicated Treatment Handles
The Dual-Bo Blade and Cannon Head provide complementary energy-delivery formats for different facial zones. Three Treatment Depths
The 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm probes support customized professional protocols. Face and Neck Applications
Develop treatments for facial firming, jawline definition, texture refinement and suitable neck areas. Manufacturer-Reported Evaluation Data
The supplied assessment figures provide reference information for pore appearance, jawline, brightness, firmness and fine-line outcomes. Compact Desktop Design
The approximately 19 kg system is easier to position than a large floor-standing platform. Professional Training Included
Remote operating guidance and a training certificate are included. Long-Term Equipment Support
Technical assistance and a three-year limited professional warranty support your equipment investment. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the difference between the two handles?
The Dual-Bo Blade handle provides a broader blade-style treatment format. The Cannon Head handle supports more focused-point energy delivery for targeted areas. What do the three probe depths do?
The 1.5 mm probe supports superficial facial protocols, the 3.0 mm probe supports mid-depth treatments, and the 4.5 mm probe is intended for deeper facial applications on appropriately selected areas. Are the published percentages clinically verified?
The percentages supplied with the product should be described as manufacturer-reported evaluation data unless a complete independent clinical study is available. Is this machine suitable for the eye area?
Only appropriate areas around the eyes may be treated by a trained professional using the correct probe and parameters. Energy must never be applied directly over the eye or eyelid. How long does a treatment take?
Treatment time depends on the selected area, handle and protocol. A targeted treatment may be shorter than a complete facial session. Are results immediate?
Some clients may notice an early firming response, while collagen-remodeling effects may develop progressively. Timing and results vary between individuals. Is treatment completely painless?
No treatment experience is identical. Clients may feel warmth, tingling, tenderness or temporary discomfort depending on the area and energy setting. Is there any downtime?
Some clients may resume normal activities shortly after treatment. Temporary redness, warmth, swelling or sensitivity may occur. Is the machine safe for every skin type?
Suitability depends on the client’s skin condition, medical history, treatment area and selected parameters. A consultation and contraindication assessment are required. Is this a home-use machine?
No. This is professional aesthetic equipment intended for trained operators. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components. Probes, normal wear, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Upgrade Your Professional Facial Treatment Services
The Wikbeauty Thermal Face Lift Machine combines: Dual-Bo Blade treatment technology Cannon Head focused treatment technology Three probe depths from 1.5 mm to 4.5 mm Contact Wikbeauty for current pricing, voltage selection, delivery information and purchasing assistance. Request Pricing and Product Consultation Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Treatment category
Common area
Intended aesthetic application
Facial firming
Cheeks and lower face
Firmer-looking facial contours
Fine-line treatments
Forehead and suitable facial areas
Improvement in line appearance
Skin-texture refinement
Cheeks and broader facial areas
Smoother-looking texture
Jawline contouring
Lower face and jawline
Definition and contour refinement
Neck treatments
Suitable neck areas
Firming and profile refinement
Pore-appearance treatments
Appropriate facial areas
Improvement in visible pore appearance
Evaluated concern
Manufacturer-reported improvement
Visible pore appearance
31.54%
Jawline appearance
21.78%
Skin brightness
21.90%
Skin firmness
13.28%
Fine-line appearance
29.63%
Specification
Details
Product type
Professional RF thermal face-lifting system
Technology
Radiofrequency thermal treatment
Treatment handles
Two
Handle types
Dual-Bo Blade and Cannon Head
Probe depths
1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm
Machine design
Portable desktop system
Construction
ABS housing
Machine dimensions
57 × 48 × 43 cm
Net weight
Approximately 19 kg
Intended users
Aesthetic clinics, medical spas, beauty salons and trained practitioners
Warranty
Three-year limited professional warranty
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
Professional Portable HIFU Facial System
Three Cartridge Depths for Facial Firming and Contour Refinement
The Wikbeauty Portable HIFU Anti-Aging Machine is a professional focused-ultrasound system developed for non-surgical facial and neck treatments.
Three interchangeable cartridge depths—1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm—allow trained operators to create structured protocols for different facial tissue layers and approved treatment areas.
A large 19-inch display provides access to treatment controls, parameter settings and facial-area guidance. Its floor-standing design, metal chassis and approximately 25 kg weight make it more compact than many full-size professional HIFU platforms.
Three cartridge depths | 19-inch display | 180 W rated power | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Cartridge Depths 1.5 mm — Superficial Facial Applications
The 1.5 mm cartridge is intended for suitable superficial facial areas. Potential professional applications include: Superficial skin-firming protocols Fine-line appearance Skin-texture refinement Selected areas of the forehead and cheeks Maintenance-oriented treatments The 1.5 mm cartridge should not be marketed as permanently shrinking pores or removing wrinkles. 3.0 mm — Mid-Depth Facial Applications
The 3.0 mm cartridge supports professionally planned treatment within suitable mid-depth facial and neck tissue. Potential applications include: Facial skin firming Cheek treatments Lower-face contour refinement Suitable neck areas Improvement in the appearance of skin laxity 4.5 mm — Deeper Facial Applications
The 4.5 mm cartridge is designed for appropriately selected deeper facial areas. Potential applications include: Lower-face firming Jawline definition Submental-area protocols Suitable neck treatments Deeper facial contour-refinement programs The 4.5 mm cartridge does not build or tighten muscle like an exercise device. Focused ultrasound creates controlled focal effects within selected tissue. How Focused Ultrasound Works
The machine delivers ultrasound energy to a defined focal depth beneath the skin’s surface. At the focal point, the energy creates controlled thermal and mechanical effects. When delivered correctly, this response may support gradual tissue remodeling and improvement in the appearance of skin firmness. HIFU does not: Remove skin or tissue Produce a surgical facelift Permanently eliminate wrinkles Guarantee double-chin removal Permanently shrink pores Strengthen facial muscles Produce identical results in every client Individual outcomes depend on age, skin condition, tissue thickness, treatment parameters and biological response. Professional Facial Applications The cartridge must be selected according to anatomy, tissue thickness and professional training. A deeper cartridge is not automatically more effective. Large 19-Inch Treatment Display
The system includes a 19-inch HD display designed to provide convenient access to: Treatment-area diagrams Parameter selection Cartridge information Treatment settings Operating status Protocol guidance The display may support facial mapping through diagrams or software guidance. It should not be described as providing real-time visualization of nerves, vessels or tissue layers unless the machine includes a separate diagnostic-ultrasound imaging system. Facial mapping software does not replace anatomical knowledge or professional treatment planning. Professional Treatment Planning Full-Face Firming
Use the appropriate cartridge depths to develop a structured protocol for suitable forehead, cheek and lower-face areas. Jawline and Lower-Face Contouring
The 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges may support professionally planned treatment of appropriate lower-face areas. Submental-Area Treatment
The 4.5 mm cartridge may be used on suitable tissue beneath the chin after confirming adequate tissue depth and excluding prohibited structures. It should not be described as guaranteed double-chin removal. Neck Treatments
Selected neck areas may be treated by a trained operator. Energy must not be delivered over the thyroid, trachea, major blood vessels or other prohibited structures. Fine-Line and Texture Protocols
The shallower cartridge may support improvement in the appearance of suitable superficial concerns. It should not be represented as resurfacing the skin or removing wrinkles. Claims That Should Not Be Guaranteed
The Portable HIFU Machine should not be advertised as providing: Guaranteed immediate lifting Surgical-facelift results Permanent wrinkle removal Nasolabial-fold elimination Guaranteed double-chin removal Permanent pore reduction Zero thermal-damage risk Pain-free treatment for every client Zero downtime Safety for every skin type or medical condition Guaranteed collagen regeneration Household or unsupervised home use Focused ultrasound is professional aesthetic technology with real risks when used incorrectly. Compact Floor-Standing Design
The system combines a large display with a relatively compact vertical housing. Key design characteristics include: 19-inch HD display Metal chassis ABS exterior components Three interchangeable cartridges Professional floor-standing format Approximately 25 kg net weight 180 W rated power Compact dimensions for a professional treatment room The machine should be positioned on a level surface with sufficient clearance and ventilation. Although the system can be moved between treatment rooms, it should not be described as a handheld or consumer-portable device. How a Professional Treatment Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s concerns, medical history, previous aesthetic treatments, tissue condition and contraindications. 2. Treatment Mapping
Suitable treatment zones and prohibited anatomical areas are identified and marked. 3. Cartridge Selection
The 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm or 4.5 mm cartridge is selected according to the treatment area and tissue depth. 4. Skin Preparation
The treatment area is cleansed, and an appropriate ultrasound coupling gel is applied. 5. Parameter Selection
Energy, line spacing, treatment pattern and other available settings are selected according to the professional protocol. 6. Test Delivery
A test line or lower-energy application may be performed where required to evaluate client comfort and tissue response. 7. Controlled Treatment
The operator maintains full contact and actively controls the handpiece throughout the treatment. 8. Post-Treatment Care
The area is cleaned and suitable aftercare instructions are provided. Temporary redness, swelling, tenderness, tingling, numbness or discomfort may occur. Technical Specifications
The 50 Hz specification refers to the electrical power frequency. The ultrasound frequency must be listed separately if provided in the manufacturer’s technical documentation. The introductory draft listed 21 kg, while the technical table listed 25 kg. This final version uses the more formal technical-table value of approximately 25 kg. What Is Included? Main Equipment
One Portable HIFU control system One professional treatment handpiece Power cable suitable for the selected market Required handpiece connections Starter ultrasound coupling gel Treatment Cartridges
One 1.5 mm cartridge One 3.0 mm cartridge One 4.5 mm cartridge Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and setup guidance Cartridge installation training Facial treatment guidance Treatment-area mapping guidance Safety and contraindication instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Basic troubleshooting assistance Training certificate after completion Final cartridge quantities and package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation. Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote equipment training covering: Machine installation Display navigation Handpiece operation Cartridge installation Cartridge-depth selection Facial treatment mapping Prohibited anatomical zones Basic parameter selection Coupling-gel application Treatment monitoring Cleaning and maintenance Basic troubleshooting A training certificate is provided after completion. Equipment training does not replace anatomy education, professional aesthetic qualifications or licenses required in the operator’s jurisdiction. Three-Year Professional Warranty
The Wikbeauty Portable HIFU Machine is supported by a three-year limited professional warranty. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects may be covered for: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Display and control system Original treatment handpiece Handpiece connectors Other eligible original machine components Cartridges are limited-use components and may have separate warranty conditions. Technical-Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with: Remote technical assessment Guided diagnostic testing Identification of the affected component Confirmation of warranty eligibility Replacement-part assistance where applicable Remote installation guidance Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Incorrect operation or misuse Unauthorized repair or modification Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Damage caused by dropping the handpiece Normal cartridge depletion Incorrect cartridge installation Operation without sufficient coupling gel Unauthorized transportation damage Failure to follow the operating manual All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
The Portable HIFU Machine is professional aesthetic equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. Treatment may be contraindicated or require specialist assessment for clients with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Active electronic implants Metal implants in or near the treatment area Active cancer Open wounds or active infection Severe skin disease in the treatment area Blood-clotting disorders Uncontrolled medical conditions Impaired sensation Recent surgery Recent injectable treatments Facial implants or lifting threads Other contraindications listed in the user manual Prohibited Treatment Areas
Focused ultrasound must not be applied directly over: Eyes or eyelids Thyroid Trachea Major nerves Large blood vessels Bone surfaces Other areas prohibited by the device instructions Incorrect depth, energy or placement can cause thermal or mechanical tissue injury. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Medical clearance should be obtained whenever treatment suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
The Portable HIFU Machine is suitable for: Aesthetic clinics Medical spas Beauty salons Facial-rejuvenation studios Qualified independent practitioners Appropriately trained healthcare professionals The system is not intended for casual, consumer or unsupervised home use. Why Choose the Wikbeauty Portable HIFU Machine?
Three Essential Facial Depths
The 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges support superficial, mid-depth and deeper facial protocols. Large Control Display
The 19-inch interface provides convenient access to treatment settings and facial-area guidance. Compact Professional Format
Its vertical design and approximately 25 kg weight require less space than many larger HIFU platforms. Universal Facial Applications
Develop professional protocols for suitable face, jawline, submental and neck areas. Professional Training
Remote operating guidance and a training certificate are included. Long-Term Equipment Support
The system includes a three-year limited professional warranty and remote technical assistance. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the difference between the three cartridges?
The 1.5 mm cartridge supports superficial facial protocols, the 3.0 mm cartridge supports mid-depth treatments, and the 4.5 mm cartridge is intended for deeper applications on suitable facial and neck areas. Can it remove a double chin?
The 4.5 mm cartridge may support contour refinement in an appropriately selected submental area. Guaranteed fat removal or complete double-chin elimination should not be claimed. Can it treat nasolabial folds?
Treatment may improve surrounding skin firmness, but complete elimination of nasolabial folds should not be promised. Can the system be used around the eyes?
Only appropriate areas around the eyes may be treated by a trained operator. Energy must never be applied directly over the eye or eyelid. Are results immediate?
Some clients may notice an early change in firmness. Tissue-remodeling responses may develop progressively over time, and results vary. Is treatment painless?
Client experience varies. Warmth, tingling, tenderness or temporary discomfort may occur. Is there any downtime?
Some clients may continue normal activities shortly afterward, but temporary redness, swelling, tenderness, tingling or numbness may occur. Can this machine be used at home?
No. It is professional HIFU equipment and should only be operated by an appropriately trained person. What does 50 Hz mean?
It is the electrical input frequency, not the frequency of the ultrasound treatment energy. Is training included?
Yes. Remote operating guidance and a training certificate are included. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components. Cartridge depletion, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Add Professional HIFU Treatments to Your Service Menu
The Wikbeauty Portable HIFU Machine combines: Three professional cartridge depths A 19-inch treatment display Facial-area mapping guidance A compact floor-standing design Professional training and technical support Available for qualified professional use and subject to applicable local requirements. Request Professional Pricing and Product Information Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Treatment category
Typical area
Suitable cartridge
Superficial facial firming
Forehead and cheeks
1.5 mm
Fine-line appearance
Suitable facial areas
1.5 mm
Cheek contour refinement
Cheeks and mid-face
3.0 mm
Lower-face firming
Lower face
3.0 mm or 4.5 mm
Jawline definition
Jawline
4.5 mm
Submental treatment
Suitable area under the chin
4.5 mm
Neck firming
Approved neck areas
3.0 mm or 4.5 mm
Specification
Details
Product name
Wikbeauty Portable HIFU Anti-Aging Machine
Product type
Professional focused-ultrasound aesthetic system
Technology
High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound
Treatment cartridges
Three
Cartridge depths
1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm
Display
19-inch HD control display
Facial guidance
Software-based facial-area mapping
Rated power
180 W
Electrical frequency
50 Hz
Construction
Metal chassis with ABS exterior components
Machine dimensions
46 × 25 × 90 cm
Net weight
Approximately 25 kg
Intended treatment areas
Approved areas of the face, jawline, submental region and neck
Intended users
Trained professional operators
Warranty
Three-year limited professional warranty
Support
Professional training and remote technical assistance
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
$2,399.00
Professional 2-in-1 Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation and Roller Massage System
Dual-Function Technology for Muscle Stimulation and Body Massage
The Wikbeauty 2-in-1 Muscle Stimulation and Inner Roller System combines high-intensity electromagnetic muscle stimulation with mechanical roller massage in one professional platform.
Two electromagnetic applicators support controlled muscle-contraction programs, while two Inner Ball Roller handles provide mechanical massage for selected body areas.
A 10.4-inch intelligent touchscreen and four dedicated handles allow trained operators to create separate muscle-stimulation and massage services using one system.
Two technologies | Four treatment handles | 10.4-inch touchscreen | Three-year warranty
Two Professional Technologies in One System
Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation
The system includes two electromagnetic applicators designed to stimulate repeated muscle contractions.
According to the supplied specification, the system provides a peak magnetic-field output of up to 14 Tesla at the applicator.
Potential professional applications include:
-
Abdominal muscle-stimulation programs
-
Buttock muscle-stimulation programs
-
Selected thigh applications
-
Selected arm applications
-
Muscle-tone and firmness programs
-
Professionally supervised body-sculpting services
Magnetic-field strength decreases with distance from the applicator. The 14 T figure should not be interpreted as meaning that 14 T reaches every tissue within the stated 18 cm range.
Inner Ball Roller Massage
The system includes two mechanical Inner Ball Roller handles.
These handles provide controlled rolling massage over selected body areas and may support:
-
Professional body massage
-
Temporary improvement in cellulite appearance
-
Temporary improvement in the appearance of uneven skin texture
-
Relaxation of suitable soft-tissue areas
-
Body-contouring massage programs
-
Pre- or post-treatment massage where appropriate
Mechanical roller massage does not permanently break up cellulite deposits, remove fat or guarantee skin tightening.
Four Dedicated Treatment Handles
The system includes:
-
Two electromagnetic muscle-stimulation applicators
-
Two Inner Ball Roller massage handles
Each handle type has a separate purpose.
| Handle type | Quantity | Primary function |
|---|---|---|
| Electromagnetic applicator | 2 | Controlled muscle stimulation |
| Inner Ball Roller handle | 2 | Mechanical rolling massage |
High-Intensity Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation
A changing magnetic field can induce electrical activity in nearby nerves and muscles.
This stimulation produces repeated involuntary muscle contractions within the selected area.
Clients may experience:
-
Strong muscle contractions
-
Pulsing or tapping sensations
-
Muscle fatigue
-
Temporary soreness
-
Temporary cramping
Electromagnetic muscle stimulation may support a firmer or more toned appearance, but results differ between individuals and may require ongoing sessions to maintain.
Understanding the 14-Tesla Specification
The supplied product information lists:
-
Peak magnetic-field output: up to 14 T
-
Manufacturer-stated maximum reach: up to 18 cm
The 14 T figure refers to peak output at or near the treatment applicator. Magnetic-field intensity decreases as distance from the applicator increases.
Treatment response depends on:
-
Applicator placement
-
Distance from the applicator
-
Selected energy level
-
Pulse parameters
-
Treatment duration
-
Target anatomy
-
Individual client response
Mechanical Inner Roller Massage
The Inner Ball Roller handle applies controlled mechanical pressure and movement to the skin and underlying soft tissue.
Mechanical massage may temporarily affect the appearance of cellulite by:
-
Redistributing superficial fluid
-
Providing temporary tissue compression
-
Supporting massage-related circulation
-
Temporarily smoothing the appearance of uneven skin
The roller should not be used with excessive pressure or over areas with contraindications.
Professional Body Applications The machine should not be used over the head, chest, heart, genitals or other prohibited anatomical areas. Build Two Professional Service Categories Muscle-Tone Programs
Use the electromagnetic applicators for professionally supervised sessions focused on the abdomen, buttocks or other approved muscle groups. Roller Massage Programs
Use the Inner Ball Roller handles for massage and temporary improvement in the appearance of cellulite or uneven skin texture. Combination Body Programs
Qualified operators may include both technologies within a structured body-service plan where appropriate. The two technologies should not automatically be applied simultaneously or described as producing guaranteed combined results. Maintenance Services
Because aesthetic outcomes may be temporary, some clients may choose periodic maintenance sessions based on their individual response. Claims That Should Not Be Made
This system should not be advertised as guaranteeing: Permanent muscle growth Permanent cellulite removal Fat-cell destruction Weight loss Treatment of obesity Tightening of all loose skin Treatment of osteoarthritis Treatment of spinal disorders Accelerated surgical recovery Cure of chronic pain Healing of sports injuries Permanent circulation improvement Results equivalent to exercise Safety for every client How a Professional Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s goals, medical history, implanted devices, previous surgery and contraindications. 2. Technology Selection
Electromagnetic muscle stimulation, roller massage or a professionally justified sequence is selected. 3. Treatment-Area Assessment
The operator confirms that the area has sufficient healthy tissue and is suitable for the selected handle. 4. Applicator Placement
Electromagnetic applicators are secured over the approved muscle group, or the roller handle is prepared for manual application. 5. Parameter Selection
The operator selects the available intensity, treatment mode and session time according to the client’s condition and tolerance. 6. Controlled Treatment
Client comfort, muscle response, applicator position and skin condition are monitored throughout the session. 7. Post-Treatment Review
The treatment area is assessed, and suitable aftercare guidance is provided. Temporary muscle soreness, cramping, tenderness, redness or bruising may occur. Technical Specifications
Package dimensions should not be presented as the installed machine dimensions unless confirmed separately. What Is Included? Main Equipment
One 2-in-1 touchscreen control system Power cable suitable for the selected market Required handle-connection components Electromagnetic Accessories
Two electromagnetic muscle-stimulation applicators Applicator straps or positioning accessories Flexible support components, where included Roller Massage Accessories
Two Inner Ball Roller handles Handle connection cables Required massage accessories Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and setup guidance Electromagnetic applicator training Roller massage training Client-screening guidance Cleaning and maintenance instructions Basic troubleshooting assistance Training certificate after completion Final package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation. Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote equipment training covering: Machine installation Touchscreen navigation Electromagnetic applicator placement Treatment-area selection Intensity adjustment Roller handle operation Appropriate massage pressure Client screening Treatment monitoring Cleaning and maintenance Basic troubleshooting A training certificate is provided after completion. Equipment training does not replace professional aesthetic, physiotherapy or medical qualifications required in the operator’s jurisdiction. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty 2-in-1 Muscle Stimulation and Roller System is supported by a three-year limited warranty. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects may be covered for: Main control system Internal electronic components Touchscreen Original electromagnetic applicators Original Inner Ball Roller handles Handle connectors Flexible support components Other eligible original parts Roller surfaces, straps and other consumable or wear components may have separate coverage terms. Technical-Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with: Remote technical assessment Guided diagnostic testing Identification of the affected component Confirmation of warranty eligibility Replacement-part assistance where applicable Remote installation guidance Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Incorrect operation or misuse Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Damage caused by dropping a handle Improper cleaning or storage Excessive pressure applied to roller components Normal strap or roller wear Unauthorized transportation damage Failure to follow the operating manual All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This is professional aesthetic equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. Electromagnetic Treatment Contraindications
Treatment may be contraindicated or require specialist clearance for clients with: Pacemakers Implantable cardioverter-defibrillators Neurostimulators Medication pumps Cochlear implants Other active electronic implants Metal implants in or near the treatment field Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Active cancer Recent surgery in the treatment area Significant cardiovascular conditions Uncontrolled seizure disorders Other contraindications listed in the manual Roller Massage Contraindications
Roller massage may be unsuitable over areas with: Open wounds Active infection Significant inflammation Varicose veins Thrombosis or suspected blood clots Bleeding disorders Fragile or damaged skin Recent surgery Unexplained swelling Pressure or vibration urticaria Other contraindications listed in the manual General Precautions Remove phones, watches, cards and metallic objects from the magnetic treatment field. Do not position magnetic applicators over the head, chest, heart or prohibited areas. Monitor strong muscle contractions carefully. Do not leave clients unattended during high-intensity treatment. Clean roller handles between clients. Stop treatment if unusual pain, dizziness, numbness or skin injury occurs. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Medical clearance should be obtained when suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
The 2-in-1 system is suitable for: Aesthetic clinics Medical spas Beauty salons Body-contouring studios Fitness and wellness centers with qualified operators Appropriately trained independent practitioners The system is not intended for casual, consumer or unsupervised home use. Why Choose This 2-in-1 System? Two Complementary Technologies
Combine electromagnetic muscle stimulation and mechanical roller massage within one professional platform. Four Dedicated Handles
Two magnetic applicators and two roller handles support flexible body-treatment workflows. Dual-Area Muscle Stimulation
The two electromagnetic applicators can support treatment of two approved areas according to the selected protocol. Professional Roller Massage
The Inner Ball Roller handles provide controlled mechanical massage and may temporarily improve cellulite appearance. High-Intensity Magnetic Output
The system provides a manufacturer-stated peak output of up to 14 T at the applicator. Universal Voltage
AC 100–240 V compatibility supports installation across multiple international markets. Long-Term Equipment Support
Professional training, remote assistance and a three-year limited warranty are included. Frequently Asked Questions
What makes this a 2-in-1 system?
The machine combines electromagnetic muscle stimulation with mechanical Inner Ball Roller massage. Do the roller handles deliver 14 T magnetic energy?
The supplied information does not clearly establish that the roller handles deliver magnetic energy. The 14 T specification should be applied to the electromagnetic applicators unless the technical documentation states otherwise. Can electromagnetic stimulation build muscle?
Repeated magnetic stimulation can produce muscle contractions and may improve muscle tone or firmness. Results vary. Can both technologies be used during one appointment?
A qualified operator may include both technologies in a structured plan when appropriate. Simultaneous use should only occur if permitted by the operating instructions. Is the treatment painless?
Electromagnetic stimulation causes strong muscle contractions and may lead to soreness or cramping. Roller massage may cause pressure, tenderness or bruising. Can clients remain clothed?
Electromagnetic treatment may be delivered through suitable non-metallic clothing. Roller massage generally requires direct access to the selected body area according to the treatment protocol. Is training included?
Yes. Remote operating guidance and a training certificate are included. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components. Consumables, normal wear, accidental damage and misuse are excluded. Expand Your Body-Treatment Services
The Wikbeauty 2-in-1 System combines: Two electromagnetic muscle-stimulation applicators Two Inner Ball Roller massage handles A 10.4-inch intelligent touchscreen Up to 14 T peak magnetic output International voltage compatibility Available for qualified professional use and subject to applicable local requirements. Request Professional Pricing and Product Information Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Treatment area
Electromagnetic stimulation
Roller massage
Abdomen
Suitable according to protocol
Suitable
Buttocks
Suitable according to protocol
Suitable
Thighs
Suitable according to protocol
Suitable
Upper arms
Selected protocols
Suitable
Flanks
Limited muscle application
Suitable
Back
Only approved muscle areas
Suitable soft-tissue areas
Calves
Selected protocols
Suitable with screening
Specification
Details
Product type
Professional 2-in-1 body-treatment system
Machine Power
6500W
Magnetic Field Strength
14 Tesla
RF Function
Yes, built-in radiofrequency
Net Weight
Approximately 40 kg
Machine Dimensions
63 × 61 × 51 cm
Display
10.4-inch intelligent touchscreen
Included technologies
Electromagnetic muscle stimulation and mechanical roller massage
Total treatment handles
Four
Electromagnetic applicators
Two
Inner Ball Roller handles
Two
Manufacturer-stated maximum reach
Up to 18 cm
Input voltage
AC 100–240 V, 50/60 Hz
Package dimensions
66 × 60 × 49 cm
Typical session setting
Approximately 10–20 minutes per area, protocol dependent
Warranty
Three-year limited warranty
Support
Remote technical support and professional training
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
$2,499.00
Professional 3-in-1 TECAR, Acoustic-Wave and EMS System
Three Complementary Physiotherapy Modalities in One Platform
The Smart Tecar Wave integrates TECAR capacitive and resistive energy transfer, acoustic-wave therapy and electrical muscle stimulation within one professional system.
Dedicated handpieces and accessories allow qualified practitioners to use each modality independently according to the patient’s assessment and treatment plan.
The platform includes CET and RET TECAR handles, seven acoustic-wave applicators, EMS electrodes and vacuum-assisted EMS cups, providing flexible options for physiotherapy, sports rehabilitation and professionally supervised musculoskeletal applications.
Three modalities | CET and RET modes | Seven acoustic applicators | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Treatment Modalities TECAR Therapy
TECAR uses radiofrequency energy between 300 and 450 kHz to produce controlled energy transfer within tissue. The system includes two electrode formats: CET — Capacitive Energy Transfer RET — Resistive Energy Transfer TECAR treatment may produce thermal or non-thermal effects depending on the selected settings, treatment technique and tissue characteristics. Acoustic-Wave Therapy
The acoustic-wave module provides adjustable output from 5–200 mJ and a selectable frequency from 1–18 Hz. Seven interchangeable applicators allow the practitioner to adapt surface contact to different professionally assessed treatment areas. Electrical Muscle Stimulation
The EMS module delivers controlled electrical pulses at frequencies from 1–30 Hz. It includes: Reusable EMS electrode pads Adjustable intensity from levels 1–20 Vacuum-assisted EMS cups Multiple accessory sizes Hands-free electrode placement EMS can support selected professional programs involving muscle activation, neuromuscular re-education and rehabilitation. CET and RET TECAR Modes
CET — Capacitive Energy Transfer
CET uses an insulated electrode to transfer energy through tissue. It is generally associated with tissues containing relatively more water and electrolytes, such as: Superficial muscle Fascia Selected soft-tissue areas The system includes CET electrodes in: 20 mm 40 mm 60 mm RET — Resistive Energy Transfer
RET uses an uninsulated electrode and is generally associated with tissues offering greater electrical resistance. It may be incorporated into professional protocols concerning: Tendon regions Ligament areas Joint-adjacent tissue Denser connective tissue Other professionally assessed structures The system includes RET electrodes in: 20 mm 40 mm 60 mm CET should not simply be described as “superficial,” nor RET as directly heating bones. Energy distribution depends on electrode placement, return-electrode positioning, tissue properties and device settings. Additional TECAR Accessories
80 mm Fascia Applicator
The broad 80 mm applicator supports energy delivery over larger professionally selected treatment areas. T-Shaped Handle
The T-shaped handle is designed for broad-area TECAR application and convenient manual movement. Foot-Pad System
The foot-pad accessory provides an additional return-electrode or treatment configuration for appropriate lower-limb protocols. Each accessory must be used according to the supplied operating instructions. Seven Acoustic-Wave Applicators The acoustic-wave module includes seven interchangeable heads. Different applicator sizes may support: Localized soft-tissue areas Tendon-adjacent regions Larger muscle groups Broad surface treatment More targeted contact Applicator shape does not by itself determine treatment depth or establish that the wave is focused. The practitioner must select the applicator according to the diagnosis, anatomy, device instructions and patient tolerance. EMS and Vacuum-Assisted EMS The EMS module delivers electrical stimulation through standard electrode pads or suction-assisted electrode cups. Standard EMS Electrodes
Reusable pads provide controlled electrical stimulation to appropriately selected muscle groups. Vacuum-Assisted EMS Cups
The vacuum cups help maintain electrode contact during hands-free operation. The vacuum function does not provide proven fat reduction or automatically increase muscle growth. It primarily supports electrode positioning and contact. Adjustable EMS Parameters
Intensity levels 1–20 Frequency range 1–30 Hz Multiple electrode formats Hands-free operation Electrical stimulation must not be applied without proper knowledge of electrode placement, current pathways and contraindications. Potential Professional Applications
Subject to the device’s authorized indications and professional assessment, the Smart Tecar Wave may be incorporated into programs concerning: Selected musculoskeletal pain Professionally assessed tendon concerns Muscle tension Neuromuscular re-education Muscle activation Sports rehabilitation Post-injury rehabilitation Range-of-motion programs Selected joint-adjacent soft-tissue conditions Other authorized physiotherapy applications Clinical outcomes vary according to diagnosis, modality, settings and the broader rehabilitation program. Claims That Should Not Be Made Without Specific Authorization
Smart Tecar Wave should not automatically be promoted for: Erectile-dysfunction treatment Pelvic-floor treatment without appropriate accessories and authorization Permanent fat reduction Cellulite elimination Passive muscle building equivalent to exercise Calcium-deposit elimination Bone or cartilage regeneration Guaranteed tissue healing Treatment of every pain condition Superior results from combining all three modalities Unsupervised home use Each medical or aesthetic indication must be supported by the device’s applicable certification, instructions and clinical evidence. How the Three Modalities Work TECAR Energy Transfer
Radiofrequency current passes between the active electrode and return electrode, producing controlled energy transfer through tissue. The operator can adjust technique and parameters to create different treatment effects. Acoustic-Wave Delivery
The acoustic module delivers mechanical pressure pulses through the selected applicator and coupling medium. Its physical behavior depends on the generator design, energy output and applicator. Electrical Muscle Stimulation
EMS applies electrical pulses through surface electrodes to stimulate peripheral nerves and muscle contractions. Treatment effect depends on frequency, intensity, pulse characteristics, electrode placement and individual response. Flexible Multimodality Workflows
Independent TECAR Treatment
Use CET or RET according to the tissue characteristics and professional treatment objective. Independent Acoustic-Wave Treatment
Use the acoustic module with the selected applicator for an appropriately diagnosed condition. Independent EMS Treatment
Use standard electrodes or vacuum-assisted cups for selected neuromuscular applications. Sequential Treatment Planning
Qualified practitioners may include more than one modality in a rehabilitation plan when clinically justified. The modalities should not automatically be used simultaneously or described as producing superior outcomes. Sequence, placement and compatibility must follow the user manual and professional training. How a Professional Session Works 1. Clinical Assessment
The practitioner reviews the patient’s diagnosis, medical history, symptoms, implanted devices, treatment area and contraindications. 2. Modality Selection
TECAR, acoustic-wave therapy or EMS is selected according to the treatment goal. 3. Accessory Selection
The appropriate TECAR electrode, acoustic applicator or EMS electrode is installed. 4. Treatment Preparation
The patient is positioned correctly, and the required coupling medium, return electrode or EMS pads are applied. 5. Parameter Selection
Frequency, intensity, acoustic energy, treatment time and other settings are adjusted according to the professional protocol. 6. Controlled Treatment
The practitioner monitors patient comfort, skin response, muscle contractions and device performance. 7. Documentation and Follow-Up
Settings and patient response are documented, and further treatment is scheduled only when appropriate. Possible temporary responses include warmth, redness, tenderness, muscle fatigue, soreness, bruising or skin irritation. Technical Specifications
Package dimensions should not be described as the machine’s installed dimensions unless confirmed separately. What Is Included? Main Equipment
One Smart Tecar Wave control system Power cable suitable for the selected market Required connection cables Starter treatment consumables, where applicable TECAR Accessories
One RET handle 20 mm RET electrode 40 mm RET electrode 60 mm RET electrode One CET handle 20 mm CET electrode 40 mm CET electrode 60 mm CET electrode 80 mm fascia applicator T-shaped treatment handle Foot-pad system Return electrode and connection components Acoustic-Wave Accessories
One acoustic-wave handpiece Seven interchangeable applicator heads Applicator-removal components Starter coupling gel EMS Accessories
Standard EMS electrode pads Vacuum-assisted EMS cups EMS connection cables Replacement electrode set, where included Documentation and Certification
English user manual CE certificate Applicable ISO documentation Installation guidance Operating instructions for all three modalities Cleaning and maintenance guidance Basic troubleshooting assistance Training certificate after completion Final accessory quantities should be confirmed on the order quotation. CE-Certified Professional System
The Smart Tecar Wave comes with: CE Certificate Applicable ISO Documentation These documents are included with the machine and support its professional positioning and international distribution. The system must only be marketed and used for the indications covered by its applicable certification and local regulatory status. Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote equipment training covering: Machine installation TECAR CET and RET operation Electrode and return-plate placement Acoustic-wave handpiece operation Applicator selection EMS electrode placement Vacuum-cup operation Basic parameter adjustment Patient screening Treatment monitoring Cleaning and maintenance Basic troubleshooting A training certificate is provided after completion. Equipment training does not replace professional physiotherapy education, medical diagnosis or any license required in the operator’s jurisdiction. Three-Year Parts Warranty
The Smart Tecar Wave is supported by a three-year limited parts warranty and remote after-sales assistance. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects may be covered for: Main control system Internal electronic components Display and control interface Original TECAR handles Original acoustic-wave handpiece Original EMS and vacuum components Original connectors Other eligible machine parts Electrodes, applicators, pads, seals and other wear components may have separate coverage terms. Technical-Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with: Remote technical assessment Guided diagnostic testing Identification of the affected component Confirmation of warranty eligibility Replacement-part assistance where applicable Remote installation guidance Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Incorrect operation or misuse Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Damage caused by dropping a handpiece Improper cleaning or storage Liquid entering electrical components Normal electrode, pad or applicator wear Unauthorized transportation damage Failure to follow the operating manual All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Contraindications and Safety Precautions
This system is professional therapeutic equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. Treatment may be contraindicated or require specialist assessment for patients with: Pacemakers Implantable cardioverter-defibrillators Neurostimulators or medication pumps Other active electronic implants Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Active cancer in the treatment area Open wounds or active infection Significant bleeding disorders Thrombosis Severe cardiovascular conditions Impaired sensation Metal implants in or near the treatment area Recent surgery Other contraindications listed in the user manual TECAR Precautions
The RF current pathway must be planned carefully. Avoid treatment over active implants, prohibited anatomical areas or compromised skin. Acoustic-Wave Precautions
Do not apply acoustic energy over vulnerable organs, lung tissue, major blood vessels, the brain, spinal structures or other prohibited areas. EMS Precautions
Electrode placement must not create a current pathway across the chest or near active implanted devices. Do not apply stimulation over the anterior neck, head or other prohibited areas. This is not an exhaustive list. Medical clearance should be obtained whenever treatment suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
Smart Tecar Wave is suitable for: Physiotherapy clinics Rehabilitation centers Sports-medicine practices Orthopedic rehabilitation clinics Licensed multidisciplinary centers Qualified physical therapists Appropriately trained healthcare professionals The system is not intended for casual, consumer or unsupervised home use. Why Choose Smart Tecar Wave?
Three Modalities in One Platform
Combine TECAR, acoustic-wave therapy and EMS without purchasing three separate control systems. CET and RET Operation
Use capacitive and resistive electrode formats for different tissue characteristics and professional protocols. Comprehensive Accessory Package
Multiple TECAR electrodes, seven acoustic applicators and standard or vacuum-assisted EMS options are included. Adjustable Parameters
Select TECAR frequency, acoustic output and EMS intensity according to the treatment plan. Hands-Free EMS Options
Vacuum-assisted cups support stable electrode placement during supervised treatment. Professional Certifications
The machine comes with a CE certificate and applicable ISO documentation. Long-Term Equipment Support
Professional training and a three-year limited parts warranty are included. Frequently Asked Questions
What does “3-in-1” mean?
Smart Tecar Wave combines TECAR capacitive and resistive energy transfer, acoustic-wave therapy and electrical muscle stimulation. What is the difference between CET and RET?
CET uses an insulated electrode and is generally associated with water-rich soft tissue. RET uses an uninsulated electrode and is generally associated with tissues offering greater electrical resistance. Can all three modalities be used simultaneously?
They should only be combined or used sequentially when the device instructions and professional treatment plan permit it. Simultaneous use should not be assumed to be safe or superior. Does it provide pelvic-floor therapy?
Surface EMS may support selected professional muscle-stimulation programs, but a specific pelvic-floor indication should not be claimed without appropriate accessories, protocols and authorization. Does TECAR directly heat bones?
No. RET is associated with higher-resistance tissues, but it should not be described as selectively heating or regenerating bone. Is treatment painless?
Patient experience varies. TECAR may create warmth, acoustic-wave treatment can be uncomfortable, and EMS causes muscle contractions or tingling. Is training included?
Yes. Remote equipment training and a training certificate are included. This does not replace professional physiotherapy qualifications. Is the machine CE certified?
Yes. Smart Tecar Wave comes with a CE certificate and applicable ISO documentation. What does the warranty cover?
The three-year limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine parts. Consumables, normal wear, accidental damage and misuse are excluded. Expand Your Professional Physiotherapy Services
Smart Tecar Wave combines: CET and RET TECAR therapy Adjustable acoustic-wave technology Standard and vacuum-assisted EMS A complete professional accessory package International voltage compatibility Available for qualified professional use and subject to applicable local regulations. Request Professional Pricing and Product Information Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Specification
Details
Product name
Smart Tecar Wave
Product type
Professional 3-in-1 physiotherapy system
Included modalities
TECAR, acoustic-wave therapy and EMS
TECAR modes
CET and RET
TECAR frequency
300–450 kHz
CET electrode sizes
20 mm, 40 mm and 60 mm
RET electrode sizes
20 mm, 40 mm and 60 mm
Additional TECAR accessories
80 mm fascia applicator, T-shaped handle and foot-pad system
Acoustic-wave output
5–200 mJ
Acoustic-wave frequency
1–18 Hz
Acoustic applicators
Seven
EMS intensity
Levels 1–20
EMS frequency
1–30 Hz
EMS accessories
Standard electrodes and vacuum-assisted cups
Input voltage
AC 110–240 V
Net weight
Approximately 33 kg
Package dimensions
513 × 505 × 455 mm
Certifications
CE certified with applicable ISO documentation
Warranty
Three-year limited parts warranty
Support
Remote after-sales assistance
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
$2,299.00
Professional Radial Pressure-Wave and Ultrasound System
Two Physiotherapy Modalities in One Compact Platform
The Wikbeauty Ultrashock combines pneumatic radial pressure-wave technology with 1 MHz therapeutic ultrasound in one professional physiotherapy system.
Twelve interchangeable pressure-wave applicator heads, touchscreen controls and separate treatment modes provide qualified practitioners with flexibility for professionally assessed musculoskeletal and rehabilitation applications.
The compact system integrates two established modalities without requiring two separate control units.
Two modalities | 12 applicator heads | Touchscreen control | Three-year warranty
Two Professional Treatment Modalities Pneumatic Radial Pressure-Wave Therapy The pneumatic handpiece uses compressed air to accelerate a projectile inside the handpiece. The projectile strikes the selected applicator, producing acoustic pressure waves that spread radially into the treatment area. Key features include: Adjustable pressure up to 6 bar Twelve interchangeable applicator heads Applicator sizes from D6 to D25 Flat, targeted-contact and radial applicator designs Touchscreen body-area menus Professional handpiece construction Therapeutic Ultrasound
The ultrasound handpiece operates at 1 MHz and delivers mechanical vibration through an appropriate coupling gel. Therapeutic ultrasound can be used in continuous or pulsed formats where supported by the machine configuration and professional protocol. Potential professional applications may include: Selected soft-tissue rehabilitation Tissue-heating protocols Preparation for stretching or mobility work Other professionally assessed musculoskeletal applications Treatment outcomes depend on intensity, duration, duty cycle, treatment area and individual response. Radial Pressure Waves Versus Focused Shockwaves
Ultrashock uses pneumatic ballistic radial pressure-wave technology. An applicator described as a “focus head” provides more localized contact, but it does not turn the pneumatic radial system into a true focused shockwave generator. Twelve Interchangeable Applicator Heads
The system includes twelve pressure-wave applicator heads ranging from D6 to D25. Flat Applicators
Designed to distribute pressure over a relatively broad contact area. Common professional uses may include: Larger muscle groups Broader soft-tissue areas Surface-oriented protocols Targeted-Contact Applicators
Designed to provide more localized contact over an appropriately selected treatment area. These heads do not create a true focused shockwave field. Radial Applicators
Designed to distribute pressure across wider anatomical areas according to the supplied operating protocol. D6–D25 Size Range
Smaller applicators may suit localized areas, while larger applicators provide broader contact. Applicator selection must be based on anatomy, diagnosis, patient tolerance and professional training. Potential Professional Applications Subject to the device’s authorized indications, local regulations and clinical assessment, the Ultrashock may be incorporated into rehabilitation programs concerning: Plantar-fascia pain Achilles-tendon concerns Patellar-tendon concerns Lateral or medial elbow tendinopathy Selected shoulder-tendon conditions Myofascial trigger points Muscle tension Selected sports-related soft-tissue conditions Professionally assessed rehabilitation programs Evidence and protocols vary between conditions. The system should not be represented as treating virtually every pain, joint, tendon or sports injury. Claims That Should Not Be Guaranteed
The Ultrashock should not be promoted as guaranteeing: Calcium-deposit removal New blood-vessel formation Tissue regeneration Accelerated healing Elimination of inflammation Permanent pain relief Faster return to sport Prevention of future injuries Superior outcomes from combining both modalities Suitability for every musculoskeletal condition Clinical outcomes depend on diagnosis, treatment parameters, patient condition and the broader rehabilitation plan. Flexible Dual-Modality Workflow Radial Pressure-Wave Treatment
The practitioner selects an applicator and adjusts the available pressure, frequency and impact settings according to the treatment plan. Therapeutic-Ultrasound Treatment
The 1 MHz ultrasound handpiece is used with an appropriate coupling gel and professionally selected treatment parameters. Sequential Treatment Planning
A qualified practitioner may use both modalities within the same rehabilitation plan when clinically appropriate. The modalities should not automatically be combined on the same area or represented as producing superior results without supporting evidence. Independent Use
Either modality can be used independently according to the patient assessment and treatment objective. How a Professional Session Works 1. Clinical Assessment
The practitioner reviews the patient’s diagnosis, medical history, symptoms, treatment area and contraindications. 2. Modality Selection
Radial pressure-wave therapy, therapeutic ultrasound or a professionally justified sequence is selected. 3. Applicator Preparation
The appropriate pressure-wave head or ultrasound handpiece is inspected and installed. 4. Treatment-Area Preparation
The patient is positioned correctly, and the recommended coupling gel is applied. 5. Parameter Selection
Pressure, frequency, impact count, ultrasound intensity and treatment time are selected according to the professional protocol. 6. Controlled Treatment
The modality is applied while the practitioner monitors comfort, tissue response and device operation. 7. Documentation and Follow-Up
Treatment settings and patient response are documented. Further sessions are scheduled only when clinically appropriate. Temporary discomfort, redness, bruising, swelling or tenderness may occur after pressure-wave treatment. Therapeutic ultrasound risks depend on intensity, duration and treatment location. Technical Specifications
The package dimensions should not be described as the machine’s installed footprint unless the product dimensions are confirmed separately. What Is Included? Main Equipment
One Ultrashock control system One pneumatic radial pressure-wave handpiece One 1 MHz therapeutic-ultrasound handpiece Twelve interchangeable pressure-wave applicators Power cable suitable for the selected market Required connection accessories Starter coupling gel, where applicable Documentation and Certification
English user manual CE certificate Applicable ISO documentation Installation and setup guidance Radial pressure-wave operating guidance Therapeutic-ultrasound operating guidance Cleaning and maintenance instructions Contraindication-screening guidance Basic troubleshooting assistance Professional Training
Touchscreen navigation Pressure-wave handpiece setup Applicator selection Basic parameter adjustment Therapeutic-ultrasound operation Coupling-gel use Treatment monitoring Equipment maintenance Training certificate after completion Final package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation. CE-Certified Professional System
The Wikbeauty Ultrashock comes with: CE Certificate Applicable ISO Documentation These documents are included with the machine and support its professional positioning and international distribution. The device must be marketed and used only for the indications covered by its applicable certification and local regulatory status. Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote equipment training covering: System installation Touchscreen operation Pressure-wave handpiece setup Applicator-head installation Basic pressure and impact adjustment Therapeutic-ultrasound operation Patient screening Cleaning and maintenance Basic troubleshooting A training certificate is provided after completion. Equipment training does not replace professional physiotherapy education, medical diagnosis or any license required in the operator’s jurisdiction. Three-Year Parts Warranty
The Ultrashock is supported by a three-year limited parts warranty and remote after-sales assistance. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty conditions, eligible manufacturing defects may be covered for: Main control system Internal electronic components Touchscreen Original pneumatic handpiece Original ultrasound handpiece Internal compressor components Original connectors Other eligible machine parts Applicators, projectiles, seals, filters and other wear components may have separate warranty terms. Technical-Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with: Remote assessment Guided diagnostic testing Identification of the affected component Confirmation of warranty eligibility Replacement-part assistance where applicable Remote installation guidance Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Incorrect operation or misuse Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning or storage Damage caused by dropping a handpiece Normal applicator or projectile wear Filter and seal replacement Liquid entering a handpiece Unauthorized transportation damage Failure to follow the operating manual All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Maintenance and Operating Care Use the Correct Coupling Medium
Apply the recommended gel during radial pressure-wave and ultrasound treatments. Prevent gel or other liquids from entering the handpieces, connectors or ventilation openings. Inspect Wear Components
Regularly inspect: Applicator heads Projectile and guide components Seals Filters Handpiece connections Ultrasound treatment surface Clean After Use
Clean and disinfect external treatment surfaces according to the supplied instructions. Do not immerse electrical handpieces. Store Correctly
Keep the system in a dry, climate-controlled environment and protect all handpieces from impact. Contraindications and Safety Precautions
The Ultrashock is professional therapeutic equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. Treatment may be contraindicated or require additional assessment when the treatment field includes: Active infection Open wounds Malignant tumor A fetus Significant bleeding or coagulation disorder Thrombosis Pacemaker or implanted electronic device Severely impaired sensation Lung tissue or other air-containing organs Brain or spinal structures Active growth plates Other contraindications listed in the user manual High energy should not be applied directly over vulnerable organs, large blood vessels, major nerves or other prohibited areas. This is not an exhaustive list. Appropriate examination, diagnosis and medical clearance are required when treatment suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
The Ultrashock is suitable for: Physiotherapy clinics Rehabilitation centers Sports-medicine practices Orthopedic rehabilitation facilities Licensed multidisciplinary clinics Qualified physical therapists Appropriately trained healthcare professionals The system is not intended for casual, consumer or unsupervised home use. Why Choose Ultrashock?
Two Modalities in One Platform
Combine radial pressure-wave treatment and 1 MHz therapeutic ultrasound without purchasing two separate control units. Twelve Applicator Heads
Choose from D6–D25 applicator sizes for different professionally assessed areas. Adjustable Pressure
The pneumatic handpiece provides output up to 6 bar. Touchscreen Operation
Body-area menus help streamline equipment setup while leaving final parameter selection to the practitioner. International Voltage Options
Select either a 110 V or 220 V configuration for the intended market. Professional Certifications
The machine comes with a CE certificate and applicable ISO documentation. Long-Term Equipment Support
Professional training and a three-year limited parts warranty are included. Frequently Asked Questions
Is Ultrashock a focused shockwave machine?
No. Ultrashock uses pneumatic ballistic radial pressure-wave technology. Does the targeted-contact applicator create focused shockwaves?
No. It provides more localized surface contact but does not create the focal field of a true focused shockwave generator. What is the second treatment modality?
The system includes a 1 MHz therapeutic-ultrasound handpiece. Can both modalities be used during one session?
A qualified practitioner may use both modalities when clinically appropriate. They should not automatically be combined for every patient or condition. Can Ultrashock break down calcifications?
Some shockwave technologies are used in selected calcific conditions, but results depend on the technology, diagnosis and protocol. Guaranteed calcification removal should not be claimed for this radial device. Does the machine treat every sports injury?
No. Proper diagnosis and patient selection are required. Different injuries require different rehabilitation approaches. Is treatment painless?
Pressure-wave treatment may produce discomfort, tenderness or temporary bruising. Settings should be adjusted according to clinical needs and patient tolerance. Is training included?
Yes. Remote equipment training and a training certificate are included. This does not replace professional physiotherapy qualifications. Is Ultrashock CE approved?
The supplied information confirms CE certification and applicable ISO documentation. What does the warranty cover?
The three-year limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine parts. Wear components, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. What certifications are included?
The machine comes with a CE certificate and applicable ISO documentation. Add Dual-Modality Physiotherapy to Your Practice
The Wikbeauty Ultrashock combines: Pneumatic radial pressure-wave technology One-megahertz therapeutic ultrasound Twelve interchangeable applicator heads Touchscreen body-area controls A compact professional platform Available for qualified professional use and subject to applicable local regulations. Request Professional Pricing and Product Information Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Radial pressure waves
Focused shockwaves
Generated by a projectile striking an applicator
Generated through electrohydraulic, electromagnetic or piezoelectric mechanisms
Highest pressure is generally near the applicator surface
Energy is concentrated at a defined focal point
Pressure spreads radially from the applicator
Energy is focused at a selected depth
Commonly described using bar and Hz
Commonly described using energy-flux density
Often used for professionally assessed soft-tissue applications
Used for selected focused clinical applications
Specification
Details
Product name
Ultrashock
Product type
Professional dual-modality physiotherapy system
Included modalities
Pneumatic radial pressure waves and therapeutic ultrasound
Pressure-wave mechanism
Pneumatic ballistic
Maximum pressure
Up to 6 bar
Applicator heads
Twelve interchangeable heads
Applicator sizes
D6–D25
Applicator styles
Flat, targeted-contact and radial
Ultrasound frequency
1 MHz
Control interface
Touchscreen with body-area modes
Rated power
250 W
Voltage options
110 V or 220 V
Package dimensions
58 × 46 × 42 cm
Net weight
Approximately 28 kg
Certifications
CE certified with applicable ISO documentation
Warranty
Three-year limited parts warranty
Support
Remote after-sales support
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
$2,799.00
Professional High-Intensity Pulsed Magnetic Therapy System
Dual-Mode Electromagnetic Technology for Physiotherapy and Rehabilitation
The Physio Magneto PM-ST is a professional pulsed electromagnetic therapy system developed for physiotherapy, rehabilitation and appropriately supervised musculoskeletal applications.
With a manufacturer-stated peak magnetic-field strength of 4 Tesla at the applicator coil, two operating modes and a flexible positioning arm, the system supports hands-free treatment workflows in professional clinical environments.
A 10.4-inch touchscreen, integrated water-cooling system and universal voltage compatibility provide convenient operation for qualified physiotherapists and healthcare professionals.
Four-Tesla peak field | Two treatment modes | Hands-free operation | Three-year warranty
Two Professional Magnetic-Therapy Modes ST Mode — High-Frequency Pulsed Operation
ST Mode provides high-frequency pulsed electromagnetic stimulation with an oscillation frequency of up to 130 kHz according to the supplied specification. This mode can be incorporated into professionally supervised programs focused on: Selected musculoskeletal conditions Muscle-stimulation protocols Rehabilitation support Selected joint and soft-tissue applications Other uses authorized for the device MT Mode — 50 Hz Magnetic Operation
MT Mode delivers pulsed magnetic stimulation at 50 Hz. It provides an alternative operating format for protocols involving: Neuromuscular stimulation Muscle relaxation Selected pain-management programs Rehabilitation support Other professionally assessed applications The appropriate mode and parameters must be selected according to the client’s diagnosis, treatment area, contraindications and professional protocol. Understanding the Four-Tesla Specification The supplied technical information lists: Peak magnetic-field strength at the coil: 4 T Magnetic-field strength at 4 cm: 0.4 T Manufacturer-stated maximum reach: up to 18 cm Magnetic-field change rate: 92 T/s The 4 T figure refers to peak output at the applicator coil. Magnetic-field strength decreases with distance from the coil, as reflected by the stated 0.4 T measurement at 4 cm. Treatment effect depends on: Distance from the applicator Applicator positioning Pulse waveform Frequency Exposure duration Tissue anatomy Individual response Non-Contact, Hands-Free Operation The flexible positioning arm holds the treatment applicator over the selected area during operation. This provides several workflow advantages: Consistent applicator placement Reduced need for continuous handpiece movement Convenient positioning around larger joints and muscle groups Minimal preparation compared with contact-based modalities No conductive gel required Treatment through suitable non-metallic clothing Easier integration into professional rehabilitation workflows Hands-free operation does not mean the patient can be left completely unattended. The practitioner should monitor positioning, comfort and system performance throughout treatment. Potential Professional Applications
Subject to the device’s authorized indications, professional diagnosis and applicable local regulations, pulsed magnetic therapy may be incorporated into rehabilitation programs concerning: Selected knee, hip, shoulder or elbow concerns Muscular tension or spasm Selected osteoarthritis-related symptoms Rehabilitation following suitable sports injuries Selected chronic musculoskeletal pain Range-of-motion programs Neuromuscular stimulation Post-treatment rehabilitation under professional supervision Other applications authorized for the system Clinical evidence varies between conditions, devices and protocols. The PM-ST should not be promoted as treating virtually every pain, spinal, tendon, bone or inflammatory condition. Claims That Should Not Be Guaranteed
The Physio Magneto PM-ST should not be advertised as guaranteeing: Cellular re-energization Restoration of cell-membrane potential Increased ATP production Accelerated bone healing Permanent pain relief Elimination of inflammation Reversal of degenerative disease Restoration of damaged spinal tissue Improved circulation in every patient No adverse effects Safety for all age groups or medical conditions These outcomes require evidence for the exact device, parameters, condition and patient population. How Pulsed Magnetic Stimulation Works The applicator coil produces a time-varying magnetic field. A changing magnetic field can induce electrical activity within nearby conductive tissue. Depending on the output, frequency and positioning, this may stimulate peripheral nerves and muscles. The client may experience: Muscle contractions Twitching Tapping or pulsing sensations Tingling Temporary muscle fatigue Post-treatment soreness The technology is non-contact and does not use needles or surgical incisions. However, “non-invasive” does not mean risk-free or suitable for every patient. Build a Professional Rehabilitation Joint-Area Protocols
Position the applicator over an appropriately assessed joint area using the flexible support arm. Large Muscle-Group Stimulation
The high-intensity magnetic field can support professionally controlled stimulation of suitable muscle groups. Neuromuscular Applications
MT Mode provides a lower-frequency option for selected neuromuscular protocols. Rehabilitation Programs
The system may be incorporated into a broader rehabilitation plan that includes exercise, manual therapy and other evidence-based interventions. Monitoring and Reassessment
Treatment progress should be evaluated using appropriate clinical outcome measures rather than relying only on subjective improvement claims. How a Professional Session Works 1. Clinical Assessment
The practitioner reviews the patient’s diagnosis, symptoms, medical history, implanted devices and contraindications. 2. Treatment Planning
The practitioner selects ST Mode or MT Mode according to the clinical objective and device instructions. 3. Applicator Positioning
The patient is positioned comfortably and all metallic objects are removed from the treatment field. The applicator is secured using the adjustable arm. 4. Parameter Selection
Frequency, intensity, treatment time and other available settings are selected according to the professional protocol. 5. Controlled Treatment
Treatment begins while the practitioner monitors patient comfort, muscle response and applicator position. 6. Post-Treatment Assessment
The practitioner checks for discomfort, muscle fatigue, soreness or other responses and documents the session. 7. Follow-Up
Further sessions are scheduled only when appropriate based on the patient’s response and treatment plan. A universal 10–20-minute protocol or fixed 8–12-session course should not be promised for every condition. Technical Specifications
Specifications may be updated according to the final production configuration. What Is Included? Main Equipment
One Physio Magneto PM-ST control system One magnetic-field treatment applicator One flexible positioning arm Integrated water-cooling system Power cable suitable for the selected market Required connection accessories Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and setup guidance ST Mode operating guidance MT Mode operating guidance Patient-screening guidance Cleaning and maintenance instructions Water-cooling maintenance guidance Basic troubleshooting assistance Training certificate after completion Final package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation. Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote equipment training covering: Machine installation Touchscreen navigation Applicator positioning ST and MT Mode selection Basic parameter adjustment Patient screening Removal of metallic objects Treatment monitoring Water-cooling maintenance Cleaning and storage Basic troubleshooting A training certificate is provided after completion. Equipment training does not replace professional physiotherapy education, medical diagnosis or any license required in the operator’s jurisdiction. Three-Year Parts Warranty
The Physio Magneto PM-ST is supported by a three-year limited parts warranty and lifetime remote technical support. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects may be covered for: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Touchscreen Original treatment applicator Flexible positioning arm Water-cooling components Original connectors Other eligible machine parts Consumable, wear and maintenance components may have separate coverage terms. Technical-Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with: Remote technical assessment Guided diagnostic testing Identification of the affected component Confirmation of warranty eligibility Replacement-part assistance where applicable Remote installation guidance Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Incorrect operation or misuse Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper water-cooling maintenance Use of unsuitable cooling liquid Damage caused by dropping the applicator Normal wear of moving or support components Unauthorized transportation damage Failure to follow the operating manual All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Contraindications and Safety Precautions High-intensity pulsed magnetic fields can interact with implanted devices and metallic objects. The system must not be used without appropriate professional assessment. Treatment may be contraindicated or require specialist clearance in patients with: Pacemakers Implantable cardioverter-defibrillators Neurostimulators Medication pumps Cochlear implants Other active electronic implants Ferromagnetic implants or metal in the treatment field Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Active cancer in the treatment area Recent bleeding or significant bleeding disorders Uncontrolled seizure disorders Severe cardiovascular conditions Impaired sensation Other contraindications listed in the user manual Additional Operating Precautions
Remove phones, watches, keys, cards and other metallic or electronic objects from the treatment field. Do not position the applicator over the head, eyes or other prohibited areas unless specifically authorized. Confirm implant compatibility before treatment. Monitor the patient for excessive contractions, discomfort, dizziness or other adverse responses. Ensure the applicator is securely positioned before starting. Maintain the water-cooling system according to the supplied instructions. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Medical clearance should be obtained whenever treatment suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
The Physio Magneto PM-ST is suitable for: Physiotherapy clinics Rehabilitation centers Sports-medicine practices Orthopedic rehabilitation clinics Pain-management practices Qualified physical therapists Appropriately trained healthcare professionals The system is not intended for casual, consumer or unsupervised home use. Why Choose Physio Magneto PM-ST?
High-Intensity Magnetic Output
The system provides a manufacturer-stated peak field strength of up to 4 T at the applicator coil. Two Operating Modes
Choose between high-frequency ST Mode and 50 Hz MT Mode according to the professional protocol. Hands-Free Positioning
The flexible arm supports stable applicator placement during supervised treatment. Non-Contact Operation
Treatment can be delivered through suitable non-metallic clothing without conductive gel. Integrated Water Cooling
The 2.5 L cooling system supports controlled equipment temperature during professional operation. Universal Voltage
AC 100–240 V compatibility supports installation across multiple international markets. Long-Term Equipment Support
Professional training, a three-year limited parts warranty and lifetime remote technical assistance are included. Frequently Asked Questions
What is Physio Magneto PM-ST?
It is a professional high-intensity pulsed magnetic therapy system with two operating modes and a peak field strength of up to 4 T at the applicator coil. Is PM-ST the same as conventional low-intensity PEMF?
No. PM-ST uses substantially higher peak magnetic output than many low-intensity consumer PEMF products. Research on one type of electromagnetic device cannot automatically validate another. What is the difference between ST Mode and MT Mode?
ST Mode provides higher-frequency pulsed operation up to the machine’s specified maximum. MT Mode operates at 50 Hz for a different stimulation format. Can patients remain clothed?
The magnetic field can pass through suitable non-metallic clothing. Metallic items, electronic devices and unsuitable garments must be removed from the treatment field. Is treatment painless?
Patients may experience contractions, twitching, tingling or tapping sensations. Intensity should be adjusted according to professional judgment and patient tolerance. Is there any downtime?
Many patients may continue normal activities after treatment, but temporary muscle fatigue, soreness or cramping may occur. Is it safe for patients with pacemakers?
No. High-intensity pulsed magnetic fields may interfere with pacemakers and other active implants. These patients should not be treated unless expressly permitted by the device instructions and relevant medical specialists. How many sessions are required?
There is no universal treatment course for every condition. Frequency and session number must be determined by a qualified professional. What does the warranty cover?
The three-year limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine parts. Accidental damage, misuse, improper cooling maintenance and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Add High-Intensity Magnetic Therapy to Your Practice
The Physio Magneto PM-ST combines: Up to 4 T peak magnetic output ST and MT operating modes Hands-free applicator positioning A 10.4-inch touchscreen Integrated water cooling Available for qualified professional use and subject to applicable local regulations. Request Professional Pricing and Product Information Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Specification
Details
Product name
Physio Magneto PM-ST
Product type
Professional pulsed magnetic therapy system
Technology
High-intensity pulsed electromagnetic stimulation
Operating modes
ST Mode and MT Mode
Peak field strength at coil
Up to 4 T
Field strength at 4 cm
Approximately 0.4 T
Manufacturer-stated maximum reach
Up to 18 cm
Maximum oscillation frequency
Up to 130 kHz
MT Mode frequency
50 Hz
Magnetic-field change rate
92 T/s
Therapeutic-intensity reference
Manufacturer-stated ≥10 mT
Display
10.4-inch touchscreen
Applicator support
Flexible hands-free positioning arm
Cooling system
Integrated water cooling
Water-cooling capacity
2.5 L
Input voltage
AC 100–240 V, 50/60 Hz
Package dimensions
66 × 60 × 49 cm
Net weight
Approximately 40 kg
Warranty
Three-year limited parts warranty
Technical support
Lifetime remote support
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
$2,399.00
Professional Radial Pressure-Wave and Therapeutic Ultrasound System
Dual-Modality Physiotherapy Technology in a Protective Aluminium Case
The Ultrashock Master combines pneumatic ballistic radial pressure-wave technology with 1 MHz therapeutic ultrasound in one professional rehabilitation system.
Its 10.4-inch touchscreen provides separate body-area menus for both modalities. Twelve interchangeable pressure-wave applicator heads, adjustable operating parameters and continuous or pulsed ultrasound modes support customized physiotherapy and rehabilitation workflows.
The complete system is supplied in a protective aluminium case for organized storage and transportation between appropriate professional locations.
Two treatment modalities | 12 applicator heads | 10.4-inch touchscreen | Three-year warranty
Two Professional Treatment Modalities Pneumatic Radial Pressure-Wave Therapy
The radial pressure-wave handpiece uses compressed air to accelerate a projectile inside the handpiece. The projectile strikes the applicator, generating acoustic pressure waves that spread radially into the tissue. Adjustable operating parameters include: Pressure from 1–6 bar Frequency from 1–21 Hz Preload from 800–3,000 impacts Twelve interchangeable applicator heads Ten pre-programmed body-area menus The system produces radial pressure waves rather than focused extracorporeal shockwaves. These technologies have different physical characteristics and should not be treated as interchangeable. Therapeutic Ultrasound
The second modality delivers therapeutic ultrasound at a frequency of 1 MHz. The system supports: Adjustable intensity from 0.2–3.0 W/cm² Continuous mode Pulsed modes from 1–10 Hz Adjustable treatment time from 1–60 minutes Ten ultrasound body-area menus Operation with appropriate ultrasound coupling gel Therapeutic ultrasound parameters must be selected by a qualified professional according to the treatment area, clinical objective and patient assessment. Radial Pressure Waves Versus Focused Shockwaves
Ultrashock Master uses pneumatic ballistic radial pressure-wave technology. The machine should be marketed according to its actual radial pressure-wave technology, not as a focused shockwave device. Professional Musculoskeletal Applications
Subject to diagnosis, professional training, local regulations and the device’s authorized indications, radial pressure-wave or therapeutic-ultrasound protocols may be considered for selected musculoskeletal concerns such as: Plantar-fascia pain Achilles-tendon concerns Patellar-tendon concerns Lateral or medial elbow tendinopathy Selected shoulder-tendon conditions Myofascial trigger points Muscle tension Selected sports-related soft-tissue conditions Other professionally assessed rehabilitation applications Evidence and recommended treatment methods vary between conditions. The device should not be represented as universally effective for every pain, tendon, joint or soft-tissue disorder. Applications That Should Not Be Claimed Without Specific Authorization
The Ultrashock Master should not automatically be promoted for: Erectile-dysfunction treatment Peyronie’s plaque or penile-curvature correction Fat reduction Weight loss Permanent cellulite elimination Treatment of every form of back or neck pain Bone treatment requiring focused high-energy shockwaves Guaranteed tissue regeneration Guaranteed inflammation reduction Unsupervised home treatment Radial pressure waves are not equivalent to the focused low-intensity shockwaves evaluated in most erectile-dysfunction research. Twelve Interchangeable Applicator Heads The system includes twelve radial pressure-wave applicator heads in different sizes and shapes. This allows qualified operators to select an applicator according to: Treatment area Target-tissue size Surface anatomy Desired pressure distribution Patient tolerance Approved clinical protocol Larger heads may support broader-area treatment, while smaller heads may provide more localized contact. Applicator choice must follow the user manual and professional training. Applicator size alone does not determine treatment depth or clinical outcome. Twenty Pre-Programmed Body-Area Menus The 10.4-inch touchscreen includes: Ten radial pressure-wave menus Ten therapeutic-ultrasound menus These menus provide convenient starting points for equipment setup and workflow. Pre-programmed settings do not replace: Clinical diagnosis Physical examination Knowledge of anatomy Contraindication screening Individual parameter adjustment Monitoring during treatment Professional judgment Operators remain responsible for confirming that each setting is appropriate for the individual patient. Build a Flexible Rehabilitation Workflow Radial Pressure-Wave Treatments
Use the pneumatic handpiece with the appropriate applicator for professionally assessed soft-tissue and musculoskeletal applications. Therapeutic-Ultrasound Treatments
Use the 1 MHz ultrasound handpiece in continuous or pulsed mode according to the treatment goal and clinical protocol. Sequential Modality Planning
A qualified professional may use both modalities within a broader rehabilitation plan when appropriate. The modalities should not automatically be applied to the same area or combined solely to claim stronger results. Treatment sequence and parameters must be clinically justified. Multi-Site Professional Use
The protective aluminium case supports organized storage and transportation between suitable treatment environments. Operators remain responsible for safe transportation, sanitation, inspection and equipment setup. How a Professional Session Works 1. Clinical Assessment
The practitioner reviews the patient’s symptoms, history, diagnosis, treatment area and contraindications. Imaging or additional medical assessment may be necessary for certain conditions. 2. Modality Selection
Radial pressure-wave therapy or therapeutic ultrasound is selected according to the clinical objective. 3. Applicator or Handpiece Preparation
The appropriate pressure-wave head or ultrasound handpiece is inspected and installed. 4. Treatment-Area Preparation
The treatment area is positioned and an appropriate coupling gel is applied where required. 5. Parameter Selection
Pressure, frequency, impact count, ultrasound intensity, pulse mode and treatment time are adjusted according to the approved protocol. 6. Controlled Treatment
Treatment is delivered while the practitioner monitors comfort, tissue response and device performance. 7. Documentation and Follow-Up
Parameters and patient response are recorded, and the practitioner determines whether further treatment is appropriate. Temporary discomfort, redness, bruising, swelling or tenderness may occur after radial pressure-wave treatment. Therapeutic ultrasound risks depend on intensity, duration and treatment location. Technical Specifications
The five-million-impact figure is a manufacturer-stated component rating, not a guarantee that every wear component will operate for five million impacts without maintenance. What Is Included? Main Equipment
One Ultrashock Master control system One pneumatic radial pressure-wave handpiece One 1 MHz therapeutic-ultrasound handpiece Twelve interchangeable pressure-wave applicator heads One power cable suitable for the selected market Required connection accessories Starter coupling gel, where applicable Transport and Storage
One protective aluminium case Organized storage for the machine, handpieces and accessories Protective external shipping carton Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and setup guidance Radial pressure-wave operating guidance Therapeutic-ultrasound operating guidance Cleaning and maintenance instructions Contraindication-screening guidance Basic troubleshooting assistance Training certificate after completion Final accessories and package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation. Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote equipment training covering: System installation Touchscreen navigation Pressure-wave handpiece setup Applicator-head selection Pressure, frequency and impact adjustment Therapeutic-ultrasound operation Ultrasound intensity and pulse-mode selection Coupling-gel application Patient screening Cleaning and maintenance Basic troubleshooting A training certificate is provided after completion. Equipment training does not replace professional physiotherapy education, medical diagnosis or any license required in the operator’s jurisdiction. Three-Year Parts Warranty
The Ultrashock Master is supported by a three-year limited parts warranty and lifetime remote technical support. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty conditions, eligible manufacturing defects may be covered for: Main control system Internal electronic components Touchscreen Original pneumatic handpiece Original ultrasound handpiece Internal compressor components Original connectors Other eligible machine parts Applicators, projectiles, seals, filters and other wear components may have separate coverage terms. Technical-Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with: Remote assessment Guided diagnostic testing Identification of the affected component Confirmation of warranty eligibility Replacement-part assistance where applicable Remote installation guidance Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Incorrect operation or misuse Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning or storage Damage caused by dropping a handpiece Normal projectile or applicator wear Filter and seal replacement Damage caused by liquid entering a handpiece Unauthorized transportation damage Failure to follow the operating manual All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Maintenance and Operating Care Coupling Media
Use the coupling gel or lubricant specified for the selected modality. Do not allow gel or liquid to enter the pressure-wave handpiece, connectors or ventilation openings. Wear-Component Inspection
Inspect the projectile, internal guide components, applicators, seals and connections regularly. Although the listed projectile-life rating is up to five million impacts, other internal wear components may require inspection or replacement earlier. Filter-Cup Maintenance
Follow the supplied manual when draining or cleaning the pneumatic filter cup. Disconnect the system from power before performing applicable maintenance. Handpiece Inspection
Check each applicator and handpiece for cracks, looseness, unusual vibration or performance changes before use. Storage
Keep the system and aluminium case in a clean, dry and climate-controlled environment. Contraindications and Safety Precautions The Ultrashock Master is professional therapeutic equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. Treatment may be contraindicated or require additional assessment when the treatment field includes: Active infection Open wounds Malignant tumor A fetus Significant bleeding or coagulation disorder Thrombosis A pacemaker or implanted electronic device Severely impaired sensation Major nerves or sensitive anatomical structures Lung tissue or other air-containing organs Brain or spinal structures Active growth plates Other contraindications listed in the user manual High energy should not be applied directly over vulnerable organs, large blood vessels or other prohibited areas. This is not an exhaustive list. Appropriate examination, diagnosis and clinical clearance are required before treatment. Intended Professional Users
The Ultrashock Master is suitable for: Physiotherapy practices Rehabilitation centers Sports-medicine clinics Orthopedic rehabilitation practices Licensed multidisciplinary clinics Qualified physical therapists Other appropriately trained healthcare professionals The system is not intended for casual, consumer or unsupervised home use. Why Choose Ultrashock Master?
Two Treatment Modalities
Combine radial pressure-wave treatment and 1 MHz therapeutic ultrasound within one system. Twelve Applicator Heads
Select from multiple applicator sizes and shapes for different professionally assessed areas. Wide Parameter Range
Adjust radial pressure from 1–6 bar, frequency from 1–21 Hz and ultrasound intensity from 0.2–3.0 W/cm². Twenty Body-Area Menus
Access ten menus for radial pressure-wave operation and ten for therapeutic ultrasound. Protective Aluminium Case
Store and transport the machine, handpieces and accessories in an organized protective case. Long-Term Equipment Support
The system includes professional training, a three-year limited parts warranty and lifetime remote technical assistance. Frequently Asked Questions
Is Ultrashock Master a focused shockwave system?
No. It uses pneumatic ballistic radial pressure-wave technology. Radial and focused shockwaves have different physical characteristics. What is the second treatment modality?
The system includes a 1 MHz therapeutic-ultrasound handpiece with continuous and pulsed operating modes. Can the system be used for erectile dysfunction?
This pneumatic radial pressure-wave system should not be marketed as an ED-treatment device without a specific authorized indication and supporting clinical evidence for this exact technology. Can it remove fat or cellulite?
The supplied operating parameters do not establish guaranteed fat reduction or cellulite removal. These claims should not be used without specific evidence and regulatory authorization. Can both modalities be used during one appointment?
A qualified practitioner may incorporate both modalities into a treatment plan when clinically appropriate. They should not automatically be combined for every patient or condition. Does every treatment use the pre-programmed settings?
No. The body-area menus provide starting configurations. The practitioner remains responsible for assessment and appropriate parameter selection. Is treatment painless?
No treatment experience is identical. Pressure-wave therapy may produce discomfort, tenderness or temporary bruising. Settings should be adjusted according to clinical needs and patient tolerance. Is training included?
Yes. Remote equipment training and a training certificate are included. This does not replace professional physiotherapy qualifications. What does the warranty cover?
The three-year limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine parts. Wear components, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Upgrade Your Professional Physiotherapy Platform
The Ultrashock Master combines: Pneumatic radial pressure-wave technology One-megahertz therapeutic ultrasound Twelve interchangeable applicator heads Twenty pre-programmed body-area menus A protective aluminium transport case Available for qualified professional use and subject to applicable local regulations. Request Professional Pricing and Product Information Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Radial pressure waves
Focused shockwaves
Generated by a projectile striking an applicator
Generated by electrohydraulic, electromagnetic or piezoelectric mechanisms
Highest energy is generally near the applicator surface
Energy is concentrated at a defined focal point
Pressure spreads outward in a radial pattern
Energy can be delivered to a selected focal depth
Parameters are commonly expressed in bar and Hz
Parameters commonly include energy-flux density
Often used for soft-tissue and musculoskeletal applications
Used for selected focused clinical applications
Specification
Details
Product name
Ultrashock Master
Product type
Professional dual-modality physiotherapy system
Included modalities
Pneumatic radial pressure waves and therapeutic ultrasound
Radial pressure setting
1–6 bar
Radial frequency
1–21 Hz
Adjustable impact count
800–3,000 impacts
Applicator heads
Twelve interchangeable heads
Listed projectile-life rating
Up to five million impacts
Ultrasound frequency
1 MHz
Ultrasound intensity
0.2–3.0 W/cm²
Ultrasound modes
Continuous and pulsed
Ultrasound pulse frequency
1–10 Hz
Treatment-time setting
1–60 minutes
Display
10.4-inch color touchscreen
Pressure-wave menus
Ten body-area menus
Ultrasound menus
Ten body-area menus
Rated power
250 W
Net weight
Approximately 28 kg
Gross weight
Approximately 30 kg
Package dimensions
58 × 46 × 42 cm
Transport and storage
Aluminium protective case
Warranty
Three-year limited parts warranty
Technical support
Lifetime remote support
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
$1,599.00
Professional Portable Electromagnetic Shockwave System
Wireless Technology for Qualified Medical and Men’s Health Practices
The ESWT PRO is a compact electromagnetic shockwave system developed for qualified healthcare professionals and specialized clinical environments.
A wireless treatment handpiece, 7-inch touchscreen, adjustable intensity and pre-programmed operating modes support flexible use in men’s health, rehabilitation and other applications permitted by the device’s certification and local regulations.
At approximately 4.5 kg, the system is suitable for clinics requiring a compact platform that can be repositioned or transported between approved treatment locations.
Electromagnetic technology | Wireless handpiece | 4.5 kg system | Three-year warranty
Electromagnetic Shockwave Technology
ESWT PRO generates shockwave pulses using an electromagnetic mechanism rather than a pneumatic compressor.
Key operating features include:
-
Adjustable intensity from levels 1–10
-
Selectable pulse frequency from 10–20 Hz
-
Wireless treatment handpiece
-
Precision applicator
-
Pre-programmed operating modes
-
Color touchscreen control
-
Rechargeable portable operation
Electromagnetic and pneumatic systems use different energy-generation mechanisms. One technology should not be described as universally safer, more effective or more comfortable without direct comparative evidence for the specific devices.
Portable Wireless Design
The ESWT PRO platform is designed for professional mobility within appropriate clinical environments.
Lightweight System
At approximately 4.5 kg, the system is easier to transport and reposition than many full-size shockwave platforms.
Wireless Handpiece
The rechargeable handpiece reduces cable restrictions during operation and can be returned to the supplied charging dock between treatments.
Extended Battery Operation
The supplied specification lists more than 10 hours of operation per full charge. Actual battery life may vary according to intensity, frequency, treatment duration and battery condition.
Compact Desktop Footprint
The system measures approximately 28 × 22 × 15 cm with its dock, allowing installation in treatment rooms where space is limited.
Portable design does not automatically authorize house calls or mobile medical treatment. Operators remain responsible for maintaining privacy, hygiene, documentation, electrical safety and local healthcare compliance.
Potential Professional Applications
Depending on the device’s registered indications and applicable local regulations, shockwave technology may be evaluated for use within professional programs concerning:
-
Selected cases of vasculogenic erectile dysfunction
-
Men’s sexual-health assessment programs
-
Rehabilitation applications
-
Musculoskeletal treatment protocols
-
Other manufacturer-authorized professional uses
Low-intensity shockwave therapy should not be advertised as suitable for every cause or severity of erectile dysfunction.
ED may have vascular, neurological, hormonal, medication-related, psychological or mixed causes. Proper medical assessment is required before determining whether shockwave treatment is appropriate.
Evidence-Informed Positioning for Erectile Dysfunction Published research suggests that low-intensity shockwave therapy may produce a modest improvement in erectile-function scores in some men with vasculogenic ED. However: Results are not consistent across all studies Device technologies and energy outputs vary Treatment protocols are not fully standardized Not every ED cause is vascular Benefits may diminish over time No result can be guaranteed Regulatory status differs between countries Clinical Use Requires Proper Patient Selection Appropriate patient assessment should include: Complete medical history Sexual history Medication review Cardiovascular-risk assessment Identification of possible vascular, hormonal or neurological causes Review of previous ED treatments Physical examination where clinically indicated Validated erectile-function questionnaire where appropriate Discussion of available treatment alternatives Informed consent Only a qualified healthcare professional should diagnose erectile dysfunction or decide whether shockwave therapy is appropriate. Important Limitations of Use
ESWT PRO should not be promoted for: Guaranteed treatment of all ED severity levels Permanent restoration of erectile function Premature-ejaculation treatment without supporting indication Dissolution of Peyronie’s plaque Correction of penile curvature Guaranteed recovery following prostate surgery Replacement of prescribed medication Unsupervised home use Sexual-performance enhancement in clients without medical assessment For Peyronie’s disease, shockwave therapy may be considered for pain in some circumstances, but it should not be marketed as reducing plaque size or correcting curvature. Professional Treatment Workflow 1. Medical Assessment
A qualified professional reviews the patient’s medical and sexual history, cardiovascular status, medications, previous treatments and possible contraindications. 2. Treatment Planning
The clinician determines whether shockwave therapy is appropriate and selects a protocol consistent with the device instructions and applicable clinical guidance. 3. System Preparation
The wireless handpiece is checked, the applicator is prepared and the treatment area is positioned according to the approved protocol. 4. Parameter Selection
Intensity, frequency, pulse count and treatment locations are selected by the qualified operator. 5. Controlled Treatment
Shockwave pulses are delivered while the operator monitors patient comfort and tissue response. 6. Post-Treatment Review
The patient receives appropriate guidance, and the treatment parameters and any adverse responses are documented. 7. Follow-Up Assessment
Progress should be evaluated using an appropriate clinical method rather than relying only on subjective marketing claims. Treatment Protocols The appropriate protocol depends on: Confirmed diagnosis Device energy characteristics Energy flux density Pulse count Pulse frequency Treatment locations Patient response Clinical guidance Local regulatory requirements The supplied specifications mention pre-programmed ED modes and typical sessions of approximately 12–15 minutes. These settings should not be represented as universal clinical protocols. A fixed course of 12–16 treatments, monthly maintenance or permanent maintenance benefits should not be promised without evidence for the specific device and patient. Technical Specifications
What Is Included? Main Equipment
One ESWT PRO control system One wireless treatment handpiece One precision applicator One desktop charging dock Power supply suitable for the selected market Documentation and Certification
English user manual CE certificate Applicable ISO documentation Installation and setup guidance Operating instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Technical-support information Professional Training
Equipment setup training Touchscreen and handpiece operation Intensity and frequency adjustment Patient-screening guidance Contraindication review Treatment documentation Cleaning and infection-control guidance Basic troubleshooting Training certificate after completion Final package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation. CE-Certified Professional System
The ESWT PRO comes with: CE Certificate Applicable ISO Documentation The equipment must be used only for the indications and within the jurisdictions covered by its applicable certification and registration. Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote equipment training covering: System installation Wireless handpiece charging Touchscreen navigation Applicator preparation Intensity and frequency controls Pre-programmed modes Patient-screening principles Basic operating procedures Cleaning and maintenance Troubleshooting A training certificate is provided after completion. Equipment training does not qualify an unlicensed person to diagnose or treat erectile dysfunction. Medical training, professional licensing and local authorization remain the operator’s responsibility. Three-Year Parts Warranty
The ESWT PRO is supported by a three-year limited parts warranty and lifetime remote technical support. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects may be covered for: Main control system Internal electronic components Touchscreen Original wireless handpiece Charging dock Power-supply components Other eligible original parts Battery cells, applicators and other consumable or limited-life components may have separate coverage conditions. Technical-Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with: Remote assessment Guided diagnostic testing Identification of the affected component Confirmation of warranty eligibility Replacement-part assistance where applicable Remote installation guidance Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Incorrect operation or misuse Unauthorized repair or modification Incorrect charging or electrical connection Improper cleaning or storage Damage caused by dropping the handpiece Normal battery degradation Normal applicator wear Unauthorized transportation damage Use outside the supplied instructions All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Contraindications and Clinical Precautions This is professional equipment. Screening must be performed by a qualified healthcare professional. Treatment may be contraindicated or require additional assessment in patients with: Active infection or inflammation in the treatment area Open wounds or significant skin injury Active malignancy in or near the treatment area Significant bleeding disorders Anticoagulant use Recent surgery in the treatment area Implanted devices affected by electromagnetic equipment Severe uncontrolled cardiovascular disease Untreated hypertension Significant neurological impairment affecting sensation Other contraindications identified in the user manual Penile implants, recent pelvic procedures and complex urological conditions require specialist evaluation. This is not an exhaustive list. The operator must follow the device manual, applicable medical guidance and local regulations. Intended Professional Users
ESWT PRO is intended for appropriately qualified professionals working in settings such as: Urology practices Sexual-medicine clinics Men’s health centers Licensed medical clinics Rehabilitation practices where the device is appropriately registered Qualified multidisciplinary healthcare centers The device is not intended for casual, consumer or unsupervised home use. Why Choose ESWT PRO?
Electromagnetic Energy Generation
The system uses an electromagnetic mechanism rather than a pneumatic compressor. Wireless Handpiece
Rechargeable wireless operation supports flexible positioning during professional use. Compact 4.5 kg Design
The lightweight system is easier to transport and install than many full-size shockwave platforms. Adjustable Operation
Ten intensity levels and selectable 10–20 Hz frequency support protocol customization by qualified operators. Touchscreen Interface
A 7-inch color display provides access to controls and pre-programmed modes. Professional Training
Remote equipment training and a training certificate are included. Long-Term Equipment Support
The system includes a three-year limited parts warranty and lifetime remote technical assistance. Frequently Asked Questions
What is electromagnetic shockwave therapy?
It is a method of generating shockwave pulses through an electromagnetic mechanism rather than a pneumatic compressor. Treatment characteristics depend on the device’s energy output, applicator and settings. Is it appropriate for every type of ED?
No. ED has vascular, neurological, hormonal, psychological, medication-related and mixed causes. Medical assessment is necessary before treatment. Is the treatment completely painless?
Patient experience varies. Adjustable intensity may help manage comfort, but pressure, vibration, sensitivity or discomfort may occur. How many sessions are required?
There is no universal protocol suitable for every device or patient. Session number and frequency must be selected by a qualified clinician. Can this machine be used for home visits?
Portable design may support professional mobility where legally permitted. The operator must maintain clinical privacy, sanitation, documentation and regulatory compliance. Is the device approved for ED treatment in every country?
No. Regulatory status and permitted indications vary by jurisdiction. The device must only be marketed and used within the indications covered by its applicable registration. Is training included?
Yes. Remote equipment training and a training certificate are included. This training does not replace professional medical qualifications. What does the warranty cover?
The three-year limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved parts. Consumables, normal battery wear, accidental damage and misuse are excluded. What certifications are included?
The machine comes with a CE certificate and applicable ISO documentation. Add Portable Shockwave Technology to Your Practice
ESWT PRO combines: Electromagnetic shockwave generation Wireless handpiece operation Ten adjustable intensity levels A compact 4.5 kg design A seven-inch touchscreen interface Available exclusively for qualified professional use and subject to applicable local regulations. Request Professional Pricing and Product Information Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Specification
Details
Product name
ESWT PRO
Product type
Portable professional shockwave system
Energy-generation method
Electromagnetic
Adjustable intensity
Levels 1–10
Pulse frequency
10–20 Hz
Treatment handpiece
Wireless rechargeable handpiece
User interface
7-inch color touchscreen
Pre-programmed modes
Five ED-focused operating programs
Typical session duration
Approximately 12–15 minutes, protocol dependent
Listed battery operation
More than 10 hours per charge
Charging system
Desktop charging dock
System weight
Approximately 4.5 kg
Dimensions with dock
Approximately 28 × 22 × 15 cm
Warranty
Three-year limited parts warranty
Technical support
Lifetime remote support
Certification
CE certificate and applicable ISO documentation
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
Buying guide
Browse every Wikbeauty professional beauty and body machine in one place: EMSlim and EMSzero body sculpting machines, cryolipolysis, cavitation RF, lipo laser, HIFU, RF microneedling, hydra facial, pelvic floor chairs, shockwave therapy and more.
Compare every body contouring technology in our body sculpting machines collection.
All machines include a 3-year warranty and free worldwide shipping.
Wait — here's $50 off your order
Looks like you left something behind. Complete your order now and take $50 off with code COMEBACK50 — no minimum purchase required.
- Choosing a selection results in a full page refresh.
- Opens in a new window.